nix-shell: add milc dependency (#11086)

Co-authored-by: Ryan <fauxpark@gmail.com>

.clang_complete

@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-
--I.
--I./drivers
--I./drivers/avr
--I./keyboards/ergodox_ez
--I./keyboards/ergodox_ez/keymaps/vim
--I./lib
--I./lib/lufa
--I./quantum
--I./quantum/api
--I./quantum/audio
--I./quantum/keymap_extras
--I./quantum/process_keycode
--I./quantum/serial_link
--I./quantum/template
--I./quantum/tools
--I./quantum/visualizer
--I./tmk_core
--I./tmk_core/common
--I./tmk_core/common/debug.h
--I./tmk_core/protocol
--I./tmk_core/protocol/lufa
--I./util
--DQMK_KEYBOARD=\"$(KEYBOARD)\" -DQMK_KEYMAP=\"$(KEYMAP)\"

.github/PULL_REQUEST_TEMPLATE.md

@@ -26,7 +26,8 @@
 
 <!--- Go over all the following points, and put an `x` in all the boxes that apply. -->
 <!--- If you're unsure about any of these, don't hesitate to ask. We're here to help! -->
-- [ ] My code follows the code style of this project.
+- [ ] My code follows the code style of this project: [**C**](https://docs.qmk.fm/#/coding_conventions_c), [**Python**](https://docs.qmk.fm/#/coding_conventions_python)
+- [ ] I have read the [**PR Checklist** document](https://docs.qmk.fm/#/pr_checklist) and have made the appropriate changes.
 - [ ] My change requires a change to the documentation.
 - [ ] I have updated the documentation accordingly.
 - [ ] I have read the [**CONTRIBUTING** document](https://docs.qmk.fm/#/contributing).

.github/labeler.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+core:
+  - quantum/**/*
+  - tmk_core/**/*
+  - drivers/**/*
+  - tests/**/*
+  - util/**/*
+  - platforms/**/*
+  - Makefile
+  - '*.mk'
+dependencies:
+  - any:
+    - 'lib/**/*'
+    - '!lib/python/**/*'
+keyboard:
+  - any:
+    - 'keyboards/**/*'
+    - '!keyboards/**/keymaps/**/*'
+keymap:
+  - users/**/*
+  - layouts/**/*
+  - keyboards/**/keymaps/**/*
+via:
+  - keyboards/**/keymaps/via/*
+cli:
+  - bin/qmk
+  - requirements.txt
+  - lib/python/**/*
+python:
+  - '**/*.py'
+documentation:
+  - docs/**/*
+translation:
+  - docs/fr-fr/**/*
+  - docs/es/**/*
+  - docs/ja/**/*
+  - docs/he-il/**/*
+  - docs/pt-br/**/*
+  - docs/zh-cn/**/*
+  - docs/de/**/*
+  - docs/ru-ru/**/*
+CI:
+  - .github/**/*

.github/workflows/api.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+name: Update API Data
+
+on:
+  push:
+    branches:
+    - master
+    paths:
+    - 'keyboards/**'
+    - 'layouts/community/**'
+
+jobs:
+  api_data:
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    container: qmkfm/base_container
+
+    # protect against those who develop with their fork on master
+    if: github.repository == 'qmk/qmk_firmware'
+
+    steps:
+    - uses: actions/checkout@v2
+      with:
+        fetch-depth: 1
+        persist-credentials: false
+
+    - name: Generate API Data
+      run: qmk generate-api
+
+    - name: Install rsync
+      run: |
+        apt-get update && apt-get install -y rsync
+
+    - name: Upload API Data
+      uses: JamesIves/github-pages-deploy-action@3.7.1
+      with:
+        ACCESS_TOKEN: ${{ secrets.API_TOKEN_GITHUB }}
+        GITHUB_TOKEN: ${{ secrets.GITHUB_TOKEN }}
+        BRANCH: main
+        FOLDER: api_data/v1
+        CLEAN: true
+        GIT_CONFIG_EMAIL: hello@qmk.fm
+        REPOSITORY_NAME: qmk/qmk_keyboards
+        TARGET_FOLDER: v1

.github/workflows/cli.yml

@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ jobs:
     container: qmkfm/base_container
 
     steps:
-    - uses: actions/checkout@v1
+    - uses: actions/checkout@v2
       with:
         submodules: recursive
     - name: Install dependencies

.github/workflows/develop_api.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+name: Update Develop API Data
+
+on:
+  push:
+    branches:
+    - develop
+    paths:
+    - 'keyboards/**'
+    - 'layouts/community/**'
+
+jobs:
+  api_data:
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    container: qmkfm/base_container
+
+    # protect against those who work in their fork on develop
+    if: github.repository == 'qmk/qmk_firmware'
+
+    steps:
+    - uses: actions/checkout@v2
+      with:
+        fetch-depth: 1
+        persist-credentials: false
+
+    - name: Generate API Data
+      run: qmk generate-api
+
+    - name: Install rsync
+      run: |
+        apt-get update && apt-get install -y rsync
+
+    - name: Upload API Data
+      uses: JamesIves/github-pages-deploy-action@3.7.1
+      with:
+        ACCESS_TOKEN: ${{ secrets.API_TOKEN_GITHUB }}
+        GITHUB_TOKEN: ${{ secrets.GITHUB_TOKEN }}
+        BRANCH: main
+        FOLDER: api_data/v1
+        CLEAN: true
+        GIT_CONFIG_EMAIL: hello@qmk.fm
+        REPOSITORY_NAME: qmk/qmk_keyboards_devel
+        TARGET_FOLDER: v1

.github/workflows/develop_update.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+name: Update develop after master merge
+
+on:
+  push:
+    branches:
+    - master
+
+
+jobs:
+  develop_update:
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+
+    if: github.repository == 'qmk/qmk_firmware'
+
+    steps:
+    - uses: actions/checkout@v2
+      with:
+        fetch-depth: 0
+
+    - name: Checkout develop
+      run: |
+        git fetch origin master develop
+        git checkout develop
+
+    - name: Check if branch locked
+      id: check_locked
+      uses: andstor/file-existence-action@v1
+      with:
+        files: ".locked"
+
+    - name: Update develop from master
+      if: steps.check_locked.outputs.files_exists == 'false'
+      run: |
+        git config --global user.name "QMK Bot"
+        git config --global user.email "hello@qmk.fm"
+        git merge origin/master
+        git push origin develop

.github/workflows/docs.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+name: Generate Docs
+
+on:
+  push:
+    branches:
+    - master
+    paths:
+    - 'tmk_core/**'
+    - 'quantum/**'
+    - 'platforms/**'
+    - 'docs/**'
+    - '.github/workflows/docs.yml'
+
+jobs:
+  generate:
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    container: qmkfm/base_container
+
+    # protect against those who develop with their fork on master
+    if: github.repository == 'qmk/qmk_firmware'
+
+    steps:
+    - uses: actions/checkout@v2
+      with:
+        fetch-depth: 1
+
+    - name: Install dependencies
+      run: |
+        apt-get update && apt-get install -y rsync nodejs npm doxygen
+        npm install -g moxygen
+
+    - name: Build docs
+      run: |
+        qmk --verbose generate-docs
+
+    - name: Deploy
+      uses: JamesIves/github-pages-deploy-action@3.7.1
+      with:
+        GITHUB_TOKEN: ${{ secrets.GITHUB_TOKEN }}
+        BASE_BRANCH: master
+        BRANCH: gh-pages
+        FOLDER: .build/docs
+        GIT_CONFIG_EMAIL: hello@qmk.fm

.github/workflows/labeler.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+name: "Pull Request Labeler"
+
+on:
+  pull_request_target:
+    types: [opened, synchronize, reopened, ready_for_review, locked]
+
+jobs:
+  triage:
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    steps:
+    - uses: actions/labeler@main
+      with:
+        repo-token: "${{ secrets.GITHUB_TOKEN }}"
+        configuration-path: '.github/labeler.yml'

.github/workflows/lint.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+name: PR Lint keyboards
+
+on:
+  pull_request:
+    paths:
+    - 'keyboards/**'
+
+jobs:
+  lint:
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+
+    container: qmkfm/base_container
+
+    steps:
+    - uses: actions/checkout@v2
+      with:
+        fetch-depth: 0
+
+    - uses: trilom/file-changes-action@v1.2.4
+      id: file_changes
+      with:
+        output: '\n'
+
+    - name: Print info
+      run: |
+        git rev-parse --short HEAD
+        echo ${{ github.event.pull_request.base.sha }}
+        echo '${{ steps.file_changes.outputs.files}}'
+
+    - name: Run qmk lint
+      shell: 'bash {0}'
+      run: |
+        QMK_CHANGES=$(echo -e '${{ steps.file_changes.outputs.files}}')
+        QMK_KEYBOARDS=$(qmk list-keyboards)
+
+        exit_code=0
+        for KB in $QMK_KEYBOARDS; do
+          KEYBOARD_CHANGES=$(echo "$QMK_CHANGES" | grep -E '^(keyboards/'${KB}'/)')
+          if [[ -z "$KEYBOARD_CHANGES" ]]; then
+            # skip as no changes for this keyboard
+            continue
+          fi
+
+          KEYMAP_ONLY=$(echo "$KEYBOARD_CHANGES" | grep -cv /keymaps/)
+          if [[ $KEYMAP_ONLY -gt 0 ]]; then
+            echo "linting ${KB}"
+
+            qmk lint --keyboard ${KB} && qmk info -l --keyboard ${KB}
+            exit_code=$(($exit_code + $?))
+          fi
+        done
+        if [[ $exit_code -gt 255 ]]; then
+            exit 255
+        fi
+        exit $exit_code

.gitignore

@@ -16,6 +16,7 @@
 *.swp
 tags
 *~
+api_data/v1
 build/
 .build/
 *.bak
@@ -24,6 +25,7 @@ quantum/version.h
 .idea/
 CMakeLists.txt
 cmake-build-debug
+.clang_complete
 doxygen/
 .DS_Store
 /util/wsl_downloaded
@@ -47,7 +49,6 @@ doxygen/
 *.iml
 .browse.VC.db*
 *.stackdump
-util/Win_Check_Output.txt
 # Let these ones be user specific, since we have so many different configurations
 .vscode/c_cpp_properties.json
 .vscode/launch.json
@@ -73,3 +74,6 @@ __pycache__
 
 # prerequisites for updating ChibiOS
 /util/fmpp*
+
+# Allow to exist but don't include it in the repo
+user_song_list.h

.gitmodules

@@ -12,7 +12,13 @@
 	branch = master
 [submodule "lib/googletest"]
 	path = lib/googletest
-	url = https://github.com/google/googletest
+	url = https://github.com/qmk/googletest
 [submodule "lib/lufa"]
 	path = lib/lufa
 	url = https://github.com/qmk/lufa
+[submodule "lib/vusb"]
+	path = lib/vusb
+	url = https://github.com/qmk/v-usb
+[submodule "lib/printf"]
+	path = lib/printf
+	url = https://github.com/qmk/printf

.travis.yml

@@ -18,20 +18,16 @@ addons:
       - ubuntu-toolchain-r-test
       - llvm-toolchain-trusty-7
     packages:
-    - pandoc
     - diffutils
     - dos2unix
-    - doxygen
     - clang-format-7
     - libstdc++-7-dev
-install:
-  - npm install -g moxygen
 script:
+  - git fetch --depth=50 origin $TRAVIS_BRANCH:$TRAVIS_BRANCH
   - git rev-parse --short HEAD
   - git diff --name-only HEAD $TRAVIS_BRANCH
   - bash util/travis_test.sh
   - bash util/travis_build.sh
-  - bash util/travis_docs.sh
 after_script:
   bash util/travis_compiled_push.sh
 notifications:

.vscode/settings.json

@@ -9,13 +9,18 @@
         "**/*.bin": true
     },
     "files.associations": {
-      "*.h": "c",
-      "*.c": "c",
-      "*.inc": "c",
-      "*.cpp": "cpp",
-      "*.hpp": "cpp",
-      "xstddef": "c",
-      "type_traits": "c",
-      "utility": "c"
+        "*.h": "c",
+        "*.c": "c",
+        "*.inc": "c",
+        "*.cpp": "cpp",
+        "*.hpp": "cpp",
+        "xstddef": "c",
+        "type_traits": "c",
+        "utility": "c",
+        "ranges": "c"
+    },
+    "[markdown]": {
+        "editor.trimAutoWhitespace": false,
+        "files.trimTrailingWhitespace": false
     }
 }

Makefile

@@ -29,6 +29,9 @@ $(info QMK Firmware $(QMK_VERSION))
 endif
 endif
 
+# avoid 'Entering|Leaving directory' messages
+MAKEFLAGS += --no-print-directory
+
 ON_ERROR := error_occurred=1
 
 BREAK_ON_ERRORS = no
@@ -269,11 +272,24 @@ endef
 define PARSE_RULE
     RULE := $1
     COMMANDS :=
+    REQUIRE_PLATFORM_KEY :=
     # If the rule starts with all, then continue the parsing from
     # PARSE_ALL_KEYBOARDS
     ifeq ($$(call COMPARE_AND_REMOVE_FROM_RULE,all),true)
         KEYBOARD_RULE=all
         $$(eval $$(call PARSE_ALL_KEYBOARDS))
+    else ifeq ($$(call COMPARE_AND_REMOVE_FROM_RULE,all-avr),true)
+        KEYBOARD_RULE=all
+        REQUIRE_PLATFORM_KEY := avr
+        $$(eval $$(call PARSE_ALL_KEYBOARDS))
+    else ifeq ($$(call COMPARE_AND_REMOVE_FROM_RULE,all-chibios),true)
+        KEYBOARD_RULE=all
+        REQUIRE_PLATFORM_KEY := chibios
+        $$(eval $$(call PARSE_ALL_KEYBOARDS))
+    else ifeq ($$(call COMPARE_AND_REMOVE_FROM_RULE,all-arm_atsam),true)
+        KEYBOARD_RULE=all
+        REQUIRE_PLATFORM_KEY := arm_atsam
+        $$(eval $$(call PARSE_ALL_KEYBOARDS))
     else ifeq ($$(call COMPARE_AND_REMOVE_FROM_RULE,test),true)
         $$(eval $$(call PARSE_TEST))
     # If the rule starts with the name of a known keyboard, then continue
@@ -291,8 +307,8 @@ define PARSE_RULE
         $$(info |  QMK's make format recently changed to use folder locations and colons:)
         $$(info |     make project_folder:keymap[:target])
         $$(info |  Examples:)
-        $$(info |     make planck/rev4:default:dfu)
-        $$(info |     make planck:default)
+        $$(info |     make dz60:default)
+        $$(info |     make planck/rev6:default:flash)
         $$(info |)
     endif
 endef
@@ -444,7 +460,7 @@ define PARSE_KEYMAP
     # Format it in bold
     KB_SP := $(BOLD)$$(KB_SP)$(NO_COLOR)
     # Specify the variables that we are passing forward to submake
-    MAKE_VARS := KEYBOARD=$$(CURRENT_KB) KEYMAP=$$(CURRENT_KM)
+    MAKE_VARS := KEYBOARD=$$(CURRENT_KB) KEYMAP=$$(CURRENT_KM) REQUIRE_PLATFORM_KEY=$$(REQUIRE_PLATFORM_KEY)
     # And the first part of the make command
     MAKE_CMD := $$(MAKE) -r -R -C $(ROOT_DIR) -f build_keyboard.mk $$(MAKE_TARGET)
     # The message to display
@@ -463,6 +479,8 @@ define BUILD
         LOG=$$$$($$(MAKE_CMD) $$(MAKE_VARS) SILENT=true 2>&1) ; \
         if [ $$$$? -gt 0 ]; \
             then $$(PRINT_ERROR_PLAIN); \
+        elif [ "$$$$LOG" = "skipped" ] ; \
+            then $$(PRINT_SKIPPED_PLAIN); \
         elif [ "$$$$LOG" != "" ] ; \
             then $$(PRINT_WARNING_PLAIN); \
         else \
@@ -559,14 +577,16 @@ endef
 %:
 	# Check if we have the CMP tool installed
 	cmp $(ROOT_DIR)/Makefile $(ROOT_DIR)/Makefile >/dev/null 2>&1; if [ $$? -gt 0 ]; then printf "$(MSG_NO_CMP)"; exit 1; fi;
-	# Ensure that python3 is installed. This check can be removed after python is used in more places.
-	if ! python3 --version 1> /dev/null 2>&1; then printf "$(MSG_PYTHON_MISSING)"; fi
+	# Ensure that bin/qmk works. This will be a failing check after the next develop merge on 2020 Aug 29.
+	if ! bin/qmk hello 1> /dev/null 2>&1; then printf "$(MSG_PYTHON_MISSING)"; fi
 	# Check if the submodules are dirty, and display a warning if they are
 ifndef SKIP_GIT
 	if [ ! -e lib/chibios ]; then git submodule sync lib/chibios && git submodule update --depth 50 --init lib/chibios; fi
 	if [ ! -e lib/chibios-contrib ]; then git submodule sync lib/chibios-contrib && git submodule update --depth 50 --init lib/chibios-contrib; fi
 	if [ ! -e lib/ugfx ]; then git submodule sync lib/ugfx && git submodule update --depth 50 --init lib/ugfx; fi
 	if [ ! -e lib/lufa ]; then git submodule sync lib/lufa && git submodule update --depth 50 --init lib/lufa; fi
+	if [ ! -e lib/vusb ]; then git submodule sync lib/vusb && git submodule update --depth 50 --init lib/vusb; fi
+	if [ ! -e lib/printf ]; then git submodule sync lib/printf && git submodule update --depth 50 --init lib/printf; fi
 	git submodule status --recursive 2>/dev/null | \
 	while IFS= read -r x; do \
 		case "$$x" in \
@@ -632,12 +652,13 @@ else
 endif
 ifndef SKIP_VERSION
 BUILD_DATE := $(shell date +"%Y-%m-%d-%H:%M:%S")
+else
+BUILD_DATE := 2020-01-01-00:00:00
+endif
+
 $(shell echo '#define QMK_VERSION "$(GIT_VERSION)"' > $(ROOT_DIR)/quantum/version.h)
 $(shell echo '#define QMK_BUILDDATE "$(BUILD_DATE)"' >> $(ROOT_DIR)/quantum/version.h)
 $(shell echo '#define CHIBIOS_VERSION "$(CHIBIOS_VERSION)"' >> $(ROOT_DIR)/quantum/version.h)
 $(shell echo '#define CHIBIOS_CONTRIB_VERSION "$(CHIBIOS_CONTRIB_VERSION)"' >> $(ROOT_DIR)/quantum/version.h)
-else
-BUILD_DATE := NA
-endif
 
 include $(ROOT_DIR)/testlist.mk

Vagrantfile

@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Vagrant.configure(2) do |config|
 
   Examples:
      make planck/rev4:default:dfu
-     make planck:default
+     make planck/rev4:default
 
   EOT
 end

api_data/_config.yml

@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+theme: jekyll-theme-cayman

api_data/readme.md

@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+# QMK Keyboard Metadata
+
+This directory contains machine parsable data about keyboards supported by QMK. The latest version is always available online at <https://keyboards.qmk.fm>.
+
+Do not edit anything here by hand. It is generated with the `qmk generate-api` command.

bin/qmk

@@ -4,38 +4,59 @@
 import os
 import sys
 from importlib.util import find_spec
+from pathlib import Path
 
 # Add the QMK python libs to our path
-script_dir = os.path.dirname(os.path.realpath(__file__))
-qmk_dir = os.path.abspath(os.path.join(script_dir, '..'))
-python_lib_dir = os.path.abspath(os.path.join(qmk_dir, 'lib', 'python'))
-sys.path.append(python_lib_dir)
+script_dir = Path(os.path.realpath(__file__)).parent
+qmk_dir = script_dir.parent
+python_lib_dir = Path(qmk_dir / 'lib' / 'python').resolve()
+sys.path.append(str(python_lib_dir))
 
-# Make sure our modules have been setup
-with open(os.path.join(qmk_dir, 'requirements.txt'), 'r') as fd:
-    for line in fd.readlines():
-        line = line.strip().replace('<', '=').replace('>', '=')
 
-        if line[0] == '#':
-            continue
+def _check_modules(requirements):
+    """ Check if the modules in the given requirements.txt are available.
+    """
+    with Path(qmk_dir / requirements).open() as fd:
+        for line in fd.readlines():
+            line = line.strip().replace('<', '=').replace('>', '=')
 
-        if '#' in line:
-            line = line.split('#')[0]
+            if len(line) == 0 or line[0] == '#' or line.startswith('-r'):
+                continue
 
-        module = line.split('=')[0] if '=' in line else line
+            if '#' in line:
+                line = line.split('#')[0]
+
+            module = dict()
+            module['name'] = module['import'] = line.split('=')[0] if '=' in line else line
 
-        if module in ['pep8-naming']:
             # Not every module is importable by its own name.
-            continue
+            if module['name'] == "pep8-naming":
+                module['import'] = "pep8ext_naming"
 
-        if not find_spec(module):
-            print('Could not find module %s!' % module)
-            print('Please run `pip3 install -r requirements.txt` to install the python dependencies.')
-            exit(255)
+            if not find_spec(module['import']):
+                print('Could not find module %s!' % module['name'])
+                print('Please run `python3 -m pip install -r %s` to install required python dependencies.' % (qmk_dir / requirements,))
+                if developer:
+                    print('You can also turn off developer mode: qmk config user.developer=None')
+                print()
+                exit(255)
+
+
+developer = False
+# Make sure our modules have been setup
+_check_modules('requirements.txt')
 
 # Setup the CLI
 import milc  # noqa
 
+# For developers additional modules are needed
+if milc.cli.config.user.developer:
+    # Do not run the check for 'config',
+    # so users can turn off developer mode
+    if len(sys.argv) == 1 or (len(sys.argv) > 1 and 'config' != sys.argv[1]):
+        developer = True
+        _check_modules('requirements-dev.txt')
+
 milc.EMOJI_LOGLEVELS['INFO'] = '{fg_blue}Ψ{style_reset_all}'
 
 

bootloader.mk

@@ -27,6 +27,8 @@
 # qmk-dfu        QMK DFU (LUFA + blinkenlight)
 # bootloadHID    HIDBootFlash compatible (ATmega32A)
 # USBasp         USBaspLoader (ATmega328P)
+# kiibohd        Input:Club Kiibohd bootloader (only used on their boards)
+# stm32duino     STM32Duino (STM32F103x8)
 #
 # BOOTLOADER_SIZE can still be defined manually, but it's recommended
 # you add any possible configuration to this list
@@ -34,30 +36,30 @@
 ifeq ($(strip $(BOOTLOADER)), atmel-dfu)
     OPT_DEFS += -DBOOTLOADER_ATMEL_DFU
     OPT_DEFS += -DBOOTLOADER_DFU
-    ifneq (,$(filter $(MCU), at90usb646 atmega16u2 atmega16u4 atmega32u2 atmega32u4))
+    ifneq (,$(filter $(MCU), atmega16u2 atmega32u2 atmega16u4 atmega32u4 at90usb646 at90usb647))
         BOOTLOADER_SIZE = 4096
     endif
-    ifeq ($(strip $(MCU)), at90usb1286)
+    ifneq (,$(filter $(MCU), at90usb1286 at90usb1287))
         BOOTLOADER_SIZE = 8192
     endif
 endif
 ifeq ($(strip $(BOOTLOADER)), lufa-dfu)
     OPT_DEFS += -DBOOTLOADER_LUFA_DFU
     OPT_DEFS += -DBOOTLOADER_DFU
-    ifneq (,$(filter $(MCU), at90usb646 atmega16u2 atmega16u4 atmega32u2 atmega32u4))
+    ifneq (,$(filter $(MCU), atmega16u2 atmega32u2 atmega16u4 atmega32u4 at90usb646 at90usb647))
         BOOTLOADER_SIZE = 4096
     endif
-    ifeq ($(strip $(MCU)), at90usb1286)
+    ifneq (,$(filter $(MCU), at90usb1286 at90usb1287))
         BOOTLOADER_SIZE = 8192
     endif
 endif
 ifeq ($(strip $(BOOTLOADER)), qmk-dfu)
     OPT_DEFS += -DBOOTLOADER_QMK_DFU
     OPT_DEFS += -DBOOTLOADER_DFU
-    ifneq (,$(filter $(MCU), at90usb646 atmega16u2 atmega16u4 atmega32u2 atmega32u4))
+    ifneq (,$(filter $(MCU), atmega16u2 atmega32u2 atmega16u4 atmega32u4 at90usb646 at90usb647))
         BOOTLOADER_SIZE = 4096
     endif
-    ifeq ($(strip $(MCU)), at90usb1286)
+    ifneq (,$(filter $(MCU), at90usb1286 at90usb1287))
         BOOTLOADER_SIZE = 8192
     endif
 endif
@@ -89,7 +91,30 @@ ifeq ($(strip $(BOOTLOADER)), lufa-ms)
     BOOTLOADER_SIZE = 6144
     FIRMWARE_FORMAT = bin
 endif
-
 ifdef BOOTLOADER_SIZE
     OPT_DEFS += -DBOOTLOADER_SIZE=$(strip $(BOOTLOADER_SIZE))
 endif
+
+ifeq ($(strip $(BOOTLOADER)), kiibohd)
+    OPT_DEFS += -DBOOTLOADER_KIIBOHD
+    ifeq ($(strip $(MCU_ORIG)), MK20DX128)
+        MCU_LDSCRIPT = MK20DX128BLDR4
+    endif
+    ifeq ($(strip $(MCU_ORIG)), MK20DX256)
+        MCU_LDSCRIPT = MK20DX256BLDR8
+    endif
+
+    DFU_ARGS = -d 1C11:B007
+    DFU_SUFFIX_ARGS = -v 1C11 -p B007
+endif
+
+ifeq ($(strip $(BOOTLOADER)), stm32duino)
+    OPT_DEFS += -DBOOTLOADER_STM32DUINO
+    MCU_LDSCRIPT = STM32F103x8_stm32duino_bootloader
+    BOARD = STM32_F103_STM32DUINO
+    # STM32F103 does NOT have an USB bootloader in ROM (only serial), so setting anything here does not make much sense
+    STM32_BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS = 0x80000000
+
+    DFU_ARGS = -d 1EAF:0003 -a2 -R
+    DFU_SUFFIX_ARGS = -v 1EAF -p 0003
+endif

build_json.mk

@@ -21,6 +21,11 @@ else ifneq ("$(wildcard $(MAIN_KEYMAP_PATH_1)/keymap.json)","")
     KEYMAP_PATH := $(MAIN_KEYMAP_PATH_1)
 endif
 
+# Load the keymap-level rules.mk if exists
+ifneq ("$(wildcard $(KEYMAP_PATH))", "")
+    -include $(KEYMAP_PATH)/rules.mk
+endif
+
 # Generate the keymap.c
 $(KEYBOARD_OUTPUT)/src/keymap.c: $(KEYMAP_JSON)
 	bin/qmk json2c --quiet --output $(KEYMAP_C) $(KEYMAP_JSON)

build_keyboard.mk

@@ -16,7 +16,6 @@ include common.mk
 KEYBOARD_FILESAFE := $(subst /,_,$(KEYBOARD))
 TARGET ?= $(KEYBOARD_FILESAFE)_$(KEYMAP)
 KEYBOARD_OUTPUT := $(BUILD_DIR)/obj_$(KEYBOARD_FILESAFE)
-STM32_PATH := quantum/stm32
 
 # Force expansion
 TARGET := $(TARGET)
@@ -138,7 +137,7 @@ endif
 
 ifeq ($(strip $(CONVERT_TO_PROTON_C)), yes)
     TARGET := $(TARGET)_proton_c
-    include $(STM32_PATH)/proton_c.mk
+    include platforms/chibios/GENERIC_STM32_F303XC/configs/proton_c.mk
     OPT_DEFS += -DCONVERT_TO_PROTON_C
 endif
 
@@ -148,12 +147,6 @@ endif
 
 include quantum/mcu_selection.mk
 
-ifdef MCU_FAMILY
-    OPT_DEFS += -DQMK_STM32
-    KEYBOARD_PATHS += $(STM32_PATH)
-endif
-
-
 # Find all the C source files to be compiled in subfolders.
 KEYBOARD_SRC :=
 
@@ -324,6 +317,13 @@ SRC += $(TMK_COMMON_SRC)
 OPT_DEFS += $(TMK_COMMON_DEFS)
 EXTRALDFLAGS += $(TMK_COMMON_LDFLAGS)
 
+SKIP_COMPILE := no
+ifneq ($(REQUIRE_PLATFORM_KEY),)
+    ifneq ($(REQUIRE_PLATFORM_KEY),$(PLATFORM_KEY))
+        SKIP_COMPILE := yes
+    endif
+endif
+
 include $(TMK_PATH)/$(PLATFORM_KEY).mk
 ifneq ($(strip $(PROTOCOL)),)
     include $(TMK_PATH)/protocol/$(strip $(shell echo $(PROTOCOL) | tr '[:upper:]' '[:lower:]')).mk
@@ -359,7 +359,13 @@ $(KEYBOARD_OUTPUT)_INC := $(PROJECT_INC) $(GFXINC)
 $(KEYBOARD_OUTPUT)_CONFIG := $(PROJECT_CONFIG)
 
 # Default target.
+ifeq ($(SKIP_COMPILE),no)
 all: build check-size
+else
+all:
+	echo "skipped" >&2
+endif
+
 build: elf cpfirmware
 check-size: build
 objs-size: build

build_layout.mk

@@ -3,8 +3,14 @@ LAYOUTS_REPOS := $(patsubst %/,%,$(sort $(dir $(wildcard $(LAYOUTS_PATH)/*/))))
 
 define SEARCH_LAYOUTS_REPO
     LAYOUT_KEYMAP_PATH := $$(LAYOUTS_REPO)/$$(LAYOUT)/$$(KEYMAP)
+    LAYOUT_KEYMAP_JSON := $$(LAYOUT_KEYMAP_PATH)/keymap.json
     LAYOUT_KEYMAP_C := $$(LAYOUT_KEYMAP_PATH)/keymap.c
-    ifneq ("$$(wildcard $$(LAYOUT_KEYMAP_C))","")
+    ifneq ("$$(wildcard $$(LAYOUT_KEYMAP_JSON))","")
+        -include $$(LAYOUT_KEYMAP_PATH)/rules.mk
+        KEYMAP_C := $(KEYBOARD_OUTPUT)/src/keymap.c
+        KEYMAP_JSON := $$(LAYOUT_KEYMAP_JSON)
+        KEYMAP_PATH := $$(LAYOUT_KEYMAP_PATH)
+    else ifneq ("$$(wildcard $$(LAYOUT_KEYMAP_C))","")
         -include $$(LAYOUT_KEYMAP_PATH)/rules.mk
         KEYMAP_C := $$(LAYOUT_KEYMAP_C)
         KEYMAP_PATH := $$(LAYOUT_KEYMAP_PATH)
@@ -24,4 +30,7 @@ ifneq ($(FORCE_LAYOUT),)
     endif
 endif
 
-$(foreach LAYOUT,$(LAYOUTS),$(eval $(call SEARCH_LAYOUTS)))
+$(foreach LAYOUT,$(LAYOUTS),$(eval $(call SEARCH_LAYOUTS)))
+
+# Use rule from build_json.mk, but update prerequisite in case KEYMAP_JSON was updated
+$(KEYBOARD_OUTPUT)/src/keymap.c: $(KEYMAP_JSON)

build_test.mk

@@ -49,6 +49,7 @@ endif
 
 include common_features.mk
 include $(TMK_PATH)/common.mk
+include $(QUANTUM_PATH)/sequencer/tests/rules.mk
 include $(QUANTUM_PATH)/serial_link/tests/rules.mk
 ifneq ($(filter $(FULL_TESTS),$(TEST)),)
 include build_full_test.mk

common.mk

@@ -21,4 +21,5 @@ COMMON_VPATH += $(QUANTUM_PATH)/keymap_extras
 COMMON_VPATH += $(QUANTUM_PATH)/audio
 COMMON_VPATH += $(QUANTUM_PATH)/process_keycode
 COMMON_VPATH += $(QUANTUM_PATH)/api
+COMMON_VPATH += $(QUANTUM_PATH)/sequencer
 COMMON_VPATH += $(DRIVER_PATH)

common_features.mk

@@ -17,9 +17,15 @@ SERIAL_PATH := $(QUANTUM_PATH)/serial_link
 
 QUANTUM_SRC += \
     $(QUANTUM_DIR)/quantum.c \
+    $(QUANTUM_DIR)/led.c \
     $(QUANTUM_DIR)/keymap_common.c \
     $(QUANTUM_DIR)/keycode_config.c
 
+ifeq ($(strip $(DEBUG_MATRIX_SCAN_RATE_ENABLE)), yes)
+    OPT_DEFS += -DDEBUG_MATRIX_SCAN_RATE
+    CONSOLE_ENABLE = yes
+endif
+
 ifeq ($(strip $(API_SYSEX_ENABLE)), yes)
     OPT_DEFS += -DAPI_SYSEX_ENABLE
     OPT_DEFS += -DAPI_ENABLE
@@ -38,6 +44,13 @@ ifeq ($(strip $(AUDIO_ENABLE)), yes)
     SRC += $(QUANTUM_DIR)/audio/luts.c
 endif
 
+ifeq ($(strip $(SEQUENCER_ENABLE)), yes)
+    OPT_DEFS += -DSEQUENCER_ENABLE
+    MUSIC_ENABLE = yes
+    SRC += $(QUANTUM_DIR)/sequencer/sequencer.c
+    SRC += $(QUANTUM_DIR)/process_keycode/process_sequencer.c
+endif
+
 ifeq ($(strip $(MIDI_ENABLE)), yes)
     OPT_DEFS += -DMIDI_ENABLE
     MUSIC_ENABLE = yes
@@ -70,7 +83,7 @@ ifeq ($(strip $(POINTING_DEVICE_ENABLE)), yes)
     SRC += $(QUANTUM_DIR)/pointing_device.c
 endif
 
-VALID_EEPROM_DRIVER_TYPES := vendor custom transient i2c
+VALID_EEPROM_DRIVER_TYPES := vendor custom transient i2c spi
 EEPROM_DRIVER ?= vendor
 ifeq ($(filter $(EEPROM_DRIVER),$(VALID_EEPROM_DRIVER_TYPES)),)
   $(error EEPROM_DRIVER="$(EEPROM_DRIVER)" is not a valid EEPROM driver)
@@ -85,6 +98,11 @@ else
     COMMON_VPATH += $(DRIVER_PATH)/eeprom
     QUANTUM_LIB_SRC += i2c_master.c
     SRC += eeprom_driver.c eeprom_i2c.c
+  else ifeq ($(strip $(EEPROM_DRIVER)), spi)
+    OPT_DEFS += -DEEPROM_DRIVER -DEEPROM_SPI
+    COMMON_VPATH += $(DRIVER_PATH)/eeprom
+    QUANTUM_LIB_SRC += spi_master.c
+    SRC += eeprom_driver.c eeprom_spi.c
   else ifeq ($(strip $(EEPROM_DRIVER)), transient)
     OPT_DEFS += -DEEPROM_DRIVER -DEEPROM_TRANSIENT
     COMMON_VPATH += $(DRIVER_PATH)/eeprom
@@ -109,6 +127,17 @@ else
         SRC += $(PLATFORM_COMMON_DIR)/flash_stm32.c
         OPT_DEFS += -DEEPROM_EMU_STM32F072xB
         OPT_DEFS += -DSTM32_EEPROM_ENABLE
+      else ifeq ($(MCU_SERIES)_$(MCU_LDSCRIPT), STM32F0xx_STM32F042x6)
+
+        # Stack sizes: Since this chip has limited RAM capacity, the stack area needs to be reduced.
+        # This ensures that the EEPROM page buffer fits into RAM
+        USE_PROCESS_STACKSIZE = 0x600
+        USE_EXCEPTIONS_STACKSIZE = 0x300
+        
+        SRC += $(PLATFORM_COMMON_DIR)/eeprom_stm32.c
+        SRC += $(PLATFORM_COMMON_DIR)/flash_stm32.c
+        OPT_DEFS += -DEEPROM_EMU_STM32F042x6
+        OPT_DEFS += -DSTM32_EEPROM_ENABLE
       else ifneq ($(filter $(MCU_SERIES),STM32L0xx STM32L1xx),)
         OPT_DEFS += -DEEPROM_DRIVER
         COMMON_VPATH += $(DRIVER_PATH)/eeprom
@@ -139,12 +168,14 @@ ifeq ($(strip $(RGBLIGHT_ENABLE)), yes)
     endif
 endif
 
-VALID_MATRIX_TYPES := yes IS31FL3731 IS31FL3733 IS31FL3737 WS2812 custom
 
 LED_MATRIX_ENABLE ?= no
-ifneq ($(strip $(LED_MATRIX_ENABLE)), no)
-    ifeq ($(filter $(LED_MATRIX_ENABLE),$(VALID_MATRIX_TYPES)),)
-        $(error LED_MATRIX_ENABLE="$(LED_MATRIX_ENABLE)" is not a valid matrix type)
+VALID_LED_MATRIX_TYPES := IS31FL3731 custom
+# TODO: IS31FL3733 IS31FL3737 IS31FL3741
+
+ifeq ($(strip $(LED_MATRIX_ENABLE)), yes)
+    ifeq ($(filter $(LED_MATRIX_DRIVER),$(VALID_LED_MATRIX_TYPES)),)
+        $(error LED_MATRIX_DRIVER="$(LED_MATRIX_DRIVER)" is not a valid matrix type)
     else
         BACKLIGHT_ENABLE = yes
         BACKLIGHT_DRIVER = custom
@@ -152,65 +183,73 @@ ifneq ($(strip $(LED_MATRIX_ENABLE)), no)
         SRC += $(QUANTUM_DIR)/led_matrix.c
         SRC += $(QUANTUM_DIR)/led_matrix_drivers.c
     endif
-endif
 
-ifeq ($(strip $(LED_MATRIX_ENABLE)), IS31FL3731)
-    OPT_DEFS += -DIS31FL3731
-    COMMON_VPATH += $(DRIVER_PATH)/issi
-    SRC += is31fl3731-simple.c
-    QUANTUM_LIB_SRC += i2c_master.c
+    ifeq ($(strip $(LED_MATRIX_DRIVER)), IS31FL3731)
+        OPT_DEFS += -DIS31FL3731 -DSTM32_I2C -DHAL_USE_I2C=TRUE
+        COMMON_VPATH += $(DRIVER_PATH)/issi
+        SRC += is31fl3731-simple.c
+        QUANTUM_LIB_SRC += i2c_master.c
+    endif
 endif
 
 RGB_MATRIX_ENABLE ?= no
+VALID_RGB_MATRIX_TYPES := IS31FL3731 IS31FL3733 IS31FL3737 IS31FL3741 WS2812 custom
 
-ifneq ($(strip $(RGB_MATRIX_ENABLE)), no)
-ifeq ($(filter $(RGB_MATRIX_ENABLE),$(VALID_MATRIX_TYPES)),)
-    $(error RGB_MATRIX_ENABLE="$(RGB_MATRIX_ENABLE)" is not a valid matrix type)
-endif
+ifeq ($(strip $(RGB_MATRIX_ENABLE)), yes)
+    ifeq ($(filter $(RGB_MATRIX_DRIVER),$(VALID_RGB_MATRIX_TYPES)),)
+        $(error "$(RGB_MATRIX_DRIVER)" is not a valid matrix type)
+    endif
     OPT_DEFS += -DRGB_MATRIX_ENABLE
+ifneq (,$(filter $(MCU), atmega16u2 atmega32u2))
+    # ATmegaxxU2 does not have hardware MUL instruction - lib8tion must be told to use software multiplication routines
+    OPT_DEFS += -DLIB8_ATTINY
+endif
     SRC += $(QUANTUM_DIR)/color.c
     SRC += $(QUANTUM_DIR)/rgb_matrix.c
     SRC += $(QUANTUM_DIR)/rgb_matrix_drivers.c
     CIE1931_CURVE := yes
     RGB_KEYCODES_ENABLE := yes
-endif
 
-ifeq ($(strip $(RGB_MATRIX_ENABLE)), yes)
-	RGB_MATRIX_ENABLE := IS31FL3731
-endif
+    ifeq ($(strip $(RGB_MATRIX_DRIVER)), IS31FL3731)
+        OPT_DEFS += -DIS31FL3731 -DSTM32_I2C -DHAL_USE_I2C=TRUE
+        COMMON_VPATH += $(DRIVER_PATH)/issi
+        SRC += is31fl3731.c
+        QUANTUM_LIB_SRC += i2c_master.c
+    endif
 
-ifeq ($(strip $(RGB_MATRIX_ENABLE)), IS31FL3731)
-    OPT_DEFS += -DIS31FL3731 -DSTM32_I2C -DHAL_USE_I2C=TRUE
-    COMMON_VPATH += $(DRIVER_PATH)/issi
-    SRC += is31fl3731.c
-    QUANTUM_LIB_SRC += i2c_master.c
-endif
+    ifeq ($(strip $(RGB_MATRIX_DRIVER)), IS31FL3733)
+        OPT_DEFS += -DIS31FL3733 -DSTM32_I2C -DHAL_USE_I2C=TRUE
+        COMMON_VPATH += $(DRIVER_PATH)/issi
+        SRC += is31fl3733.c
+        QUANTUM_LIB_SRC += i2c_master.c
+    endif
 
-ifeq ($(strip $(RGB_MATRIX_ENABLE)), IS31FL3733)
-    OPT_DEFS += -DIS31FL3733 -DSTM32_I2C -DHAL_USE_I2C=TRUE
-    COMMON_VPATH += $(DRIVER_PATH)/issi
-    SRC += is31fl3733.c
-    QUANTUM_LIB_SRC += i2c_master.c
-endif
+    ifeq ($(strip $(RGB_MATRIX_DRIVER)), IS31FL3737)
+        OPT_DEFS += -DIS31FL3737 -DSTM32_I2C -DHAL_USE_I2C=TRUE
+        COMMON_VPATH += $(DRIVER_PATH)/issi
+        SRC += is31fl3737.c
+        QUANTUM_LIB_SRC += i2c_master.c
+    endif
 
-ifeq ($(strip $(RGB_MATRIX_ENABLE)), IS31FL3737)
-    OPT_DEFS += -DIS31FL3737 -DSTM32_I2C -DHAL_USE_I2C=TRUE
-    COMMON_VPATH += $(DRIVER_PATH)/issi
-    SRC += is31fl3737.c
-    QUANTUM_LIB_SRC += i2c_master.c
-endif
+    ifeq ($(strip $(RGB_MATRIX_DRIVER)), IS31FL3741)
+        OPT_DEFS += -DIS31FL3741 -DSTM32_I2C -DHAL_USE_I2C=TRUE
+        COMMON_VPATH += $(DRIVER_PATH)/issi
+        SRC += is31fl3741.c
+        QUANTUM_LIB_SRC += i2c_master.c
+    endif
 
-ifeq ($(strip $(RGB_MATRIX_ENABLE)), WS2812)
-    OPT_DEFS += -DWS2812
-    WS2812_DRIVER_REQUIRED := yes
-endif
+    ifeq ($(strip $(RGB_MATRIX_DRIVER)), WS2812)
+        OPT_DEFS += -DWS2812
+        WS2812_DRIVER_REQUIRED := yes
+    endif
 
-ifeq ($(strip $(RGB_MATRIX_CUSTOM_KB)), yes)
-    OPT_DEFS += -DRGB_MATRIX_CUSTOM_KB
-endif
+    ifeq ($(strip $(RGB_MATRIX_CUSTOM_KB)), yes)
+        OPT_DEFS += -DRGB_MATRIX_CUSTOM_KB
+    endif
 
-ifeq ($(strip $(RGB_MATRIX_CUSTOM_USER)), yes)
-    OPT_DEFS += -DRGB_MATRIX_CUSTOM_USER
+    ifeq ($(strip $(RGB_MATRIX_CUSTOM_USER)), yes)
+        OPT_DEFS += -DRGB_MATRIX_CUSTOM_USER
+    endif
 endif
 
 ifeq ($(strip $(RGB_KEYCODES_ENABLE)), yes)
@@ -234,12 +273,13 @@ ifeq ($(strip $(SERIAL_LINK_ENABLE)), yes)
     VAPTH += $(SERIAL_PATH)
 endif
 
-ifneq ($(strip $(VARIABLE_TRACE)),)
+VARIABLE_TRACE ?= no
+ifneq ($(strip $(VARIABLE_TRACE)),no)
     SRC += $(QUANTUM_DIR)/variable_trace.c
     OPT_DEFS += -DNUM_TRACED_VARIABLES=$(strip $(VARIABLE_TRACE))
-ifneq ($(strip $(MAX_VARIABLE_TRACE_SIZE)),)
-    OPT_DEFS += -DMAX_VARIABLE_TRACE_SIZE=$(strip $(MAX_VARIABLE_TRACE_SIZE))
-endif
+    ifneq ($(strip $(MAX_VARIABLE_TRACE_SIZE)),)
+        OPT_DEFS += -DMAX_VARIABLE_TRACE_SIZE=$(strip $(MAX_VARIABLE_TRACE_SIZE))
+    endif
 endif
 
 ifeq ($(strip $(LCD_ENABLE)), yes)
@@ -251,7 +291,7 @@ ifeq ($(strip $(BACKLIGHT_CUSTOM_DRIVER)), yes)
     BACKLIGHT_DRIVER := custom
 endif
 
-VALID_BACKLIGHT_TYPES := pwm software custom
+VALID_BACKLIGHT_TYPES := pwm timer software custom
 
 BACKLIGHT_ENABLE ?= no
 BACKLIGHT_DRIVER ?= pwm
@@ -291,6 +331,12 @@ ifeq ($(strip $(WS2812_DRIVER_REQUIRED)), yes)
         SRC += ws2812.c
     else
         SRC += ws2812_$(strip $(WS2812_DRIVER)).c
+
+        ifeq ($(strip $(PLATFORM)), CHIBIOS)
+            ifeq ($(strip $(WS2812_DRIVER)), pwm)
+                OPT_DEFS += -DSTM32_DMA_REQUIRED=TRUE
+            endif
+        endif
     endif
 
     # add extra deps
@@ -378,9 +424,20 @@ ifneq ($(strip $(CUSTOM_MATRIX)), yes)
     endif
 endif
 
+# Support for translating old names to new names:
+ifeq ($(strip $(DEBOUNCE_TYPE)),sym_g)
+    DEBOUNCE_TYPE:=sym_defer_g
+else ifeq ($(strip $(DEBOUNCE_TYPE)),eager_pk)
+    DEBOUNCE_TYPE:=sym_eager_pk
+else ifeq ($(strip $(DEBOUNCE_TYPE)),sym_pk)
+    DEBOUNCE_TYPE:=sym_defer_pk
+else ifeq ($(strip $(DEBOUNCE_TYPE)),eager_pr)
+    DEBOUNCE_TYPE:=sym_eager_pr
+endif
+
 DEBOUNCE_DIR:= $(QUANTUM_DIR)/debounce
 # Debounce Modules. Set DEBOUNCE_TYPE=custom if including one manually.
-DEBOUNCE_TYPE?= sym_g
+DEBOUNCE_TYPE?= sym_defer_g
 ifneq ($(strip $(DEBOUNCE_TYPE)), custom)
     QUANTUM_SRC += $(DEBOUNCE_DIR)/$(strip $(DEBOUNCE_TYPE)).c
 endif
@@ -398,11 +455,14 @@ ifeq ($(strip $(SPLIT_KEYBOARD)), yes)
         # Functions added via QUANTUM_LIB_SRC are only included in the final binary if they're called.
         # Unused functions are pruned away, which is why we can add multiple drivers here without bloat.
         ifeq ($(PLATFORM),AVR)
-            QUANTUM_LIB_SRC += i2c_master.c \
-                               i2c_slave.c
+            ifneq ($(NO_I2C),yes)
+                QUANTUM_LIB_SRC += i2c_master.c \
+                                   i2c_slave.c
+            endif
         endif
 
         SERIAL_DRIVER ?= bitbang
+        OPT_DEFS += -DSERIAL_DRIVER_$(strip $(shell echo $(SERIAL_DRIVER) | tr '[:lower:]' '[:upper:]'))
         ifeq ($(strip $(SERIAL_DRIVER)), bitbang)
             QUANTUM_LIB_SRC += serial.c
         else
@@ -516,3 +576,19 @@ ifeq ($(strip $(AUTO_SHIFT_ENABLE)), yes)
         OPT_DEFS += -DAUTO_SHIFT_MODIFIERS
     endif
 endif
+
+JOYSTICK_ENABLE ?= no
+ifneq ($(strip $(JOYSTICK_ENABLE)), no)
+    OPT_DEFS += -DJOYSTICK_ENABLE
+    SRC += $(QUANTUM_DIR)/process_keycode/process_joystick.c
+    SRC += $(QUANTUM_DIR)/joystick.c
+endif
+
+ifeq ($(strip $(JOYSTICK_ENABLE)), analog)
+    OPT_DEFS += -DANALOG_JOYSTICK_ENABLE
+    SRC += analog.c
+endif
+
+ifeq ($(strip $(JOYSTICK_ENABLE)), digital)
+    OPT_DEFS += -DDIGITAL_JOYSTICK_ENABLE
+endif

docs/ChangeLog/20200530.md

@@ -0,0 +1,239 @@
+# QMK Breaking Change - 2020 May 30 Changelog
+
+Four times a year QMK runs a process for merging Breaking Changes. A Breaking Change is any change which modifies how QMK behaves in a way that is incompatible or potentially dangerous. We limit these changes to 4 times per year so that users can have confidence that updating their QMK tree will not break their keymaps.
+
+The list of changes follows.
+
+
+## Core Changes
+
+### Converting V-USB usbdrv to a submodule
+
+[#8321](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8321) and [qmk_compiler#62](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_compiler/pull/62).
+
+These PRs move the V-USB driver code out of the qmk_firmware repository and into a submodule pointed at https://github.com/obdev/v-usb. This will make it easier to update the codebase if needed, while applying any potential QMK-specific modifications by forking it to the QMK GitHub organization.
+
+### Unify Tap Hold functions and documentation
+
+[#8348](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8348)
+
+Updates all of the per key tap-hold functions to pass the `keyrecord_t` structure, and include documentation changes.
+
+Any remaining versions or code outside of the main repo will need to be converted: 
+| Old function                                         | New Function                                                              |
+|------------------------------------------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+|`uint16_t get_tapping_term(uint16_t keycode)`         |`uint16_t get_tapping_term(uint16_t keycode, keyrecord_t *record)`         |
+|`bool get_ignore_mod_tap_interrupt(uint16_t keycode)` |`bool get_ignore_mod_tap_interrupt(uint16_t keycode, keyrecord_t *record)` |
+
+### Python Required In The Build Process
+
+[#9000](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9000)
+
+This is the last release of QMK that will work without having Python 3.6 (or later) installed. If your environment is not fully setup you will get a warning instructing you to set it up.
+
+After the next breaking change you will not be able to build if `bin/qmk hello` does not work.
+
+### Upgrade from tinyprintf to mpaland/printf
+
+[#8269](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8269)
+
+- Provides debug functionality on ChibiOS/ARM that is more compliant than previous integrations.
+- Less maintenence, fewer QMK customisations, and allows QMK to sidestep previous compile and runtime issues.
+- A `make git-submodule` may be required after pulling the latest QMK Firmware code to update to the new dependency.
+
+### Fixed RGB_DISABLE_AFTER_TIMEOUT to be seconds based & small internals cleanup
+
+[#6480](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/6480)
+
+- Changes `RGB_DISABLE_AFTER_TIMEOUT` to be based on milliseconds instead of ticks.
+- Includes a code cleanup, resulting in a savings of 100 bytes, depending on features used.
+- Fixed issues with timeouts / suspending at the wrong time not turning off all LEDs in some cases.
+
+The `RGB_DISABLE_AFTER_TIMEOUT` definition is now deprecated, and has been superseded by `RGB_DISABLE_TIMEOUT`. To use the new definition, rename `RGB_DISABLE_AFTER_TIMEOUT` to `RGB_DISABLE_TIMEOUT` in your `config.h` file, and multiply the value set by 1200.
+
+Before: `#define RGB_DISABLE_AFTER_TIMEOUT 100`  
+After: `#define RGB_DISABLE_TIMEOUT 120000`
+
+### Switch to qmk forks for everything
+
+[#9019](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9019)
+
+Fork all QMK submodules to protect against upstream repositories disappearing.
+
+### code cleanup regarding deprecated macro PLAY_NOTE_ARRAY by replacing it with PLAY_SONG
+
+[#8484](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8484)
+
+Removes the deprecated `PLAY_NOTE_ARRAY` macro. References to it are replaced with `PLAY_SONG`, which references the same function.
+
+### fixing wrong configuration of AUDIO feature
+
+[#8903](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8903) and [#8974](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8974)
+
+`audio_avr.c` does not default to any pin; there has to be a #define XX_AUDIO in config.h at some level for Audio to actually work. Otherwise, the Audio code ends up cluttering the firmware, possibly breaking builds because the maximum allowed firmware size is exceeded.
+
+These changes fix this by disabling Audio on keyboards that have the feature misconfigured, and therefore non-functional.
+
+Also, add a compile-time error to alert the user to a missing pin-configuration (on AVR boards) when `AUDIO_ENABLE = yes` is set.
+
+
+## Keyboard Refactors
+
+### Migrating Lily58 to use split_common
+
+[#6260](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/6260)
+
+Modifies the default firmware for Lily58 to use the `split_common` library, instead of including and depending on its own set of libraries for the following functionality:
+
+- SSD1306 display
+- i2c for OLED
+- Serial Communication
+
+This allows current lily58 firmware to advance with updates to the `split_common` library, which is shared with many other split keyboards.
+
+#### To migrate existing Lily58 firmware:
+
+[Changes to `config.h`](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/6260/files#diff-445ac369c8717dcd6fc6fc3630836fc1):
+- Remove `#define SSD1306OLED` from config.h
+
+
+[Changes to `keymap.c`](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/6260/files#diff-20943ea59856e9bdf3d99ecb2eee40b7):
+- Find/Replace each instance of `#ifdef SSD1306OLED` with `#ifdef OLED_DRIVER_ENABLE`
+- The following changes are for compatibility with the OLED driver. If you don't use the OLED driver you may safely delete [this section](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/blob/e6b9980bd45c186f7360df68c24b6e05a80c10dc/keyboards/lily58/keymaps/default/keymap.c#L144-L190)
+- Alternatively, if you did not change the OLED code from that in `default`, you may find it easier to simply copy the [relevant section](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/blob/4ac310668501ae6786c711ecc8f01f62ddaa1c0b/keyboards/lily58/keymaps/default/keymap.c#L138-L172). Otherwise, the changes you need to make are as follows (sample change [here](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/6260/files#diff-20943ea59856e9bdf3d99ecb2eee40b7R138-R173))
+- [Remove](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/6260/files#diff-20943ea59856e9bdf3d99ecb2eee40b7L138-L141) the block
+```c
+#ifdef SSD1306OLED	
+  iota_gfx_init(!has_usb());   // turns on the display	
+#endif
+```
+- Within the block bounded by `#ifdef OLED_DRIVER_ENABLE` and `#endif // OLED_DRIVER_ENABLE`, add the following block to ensure that your two OLEDs are rotated correctly across the left and right sides:
+```c
+oled_rotation_t oled_init_user(oled_rotation_t rotation) {
+  if (!is_keyboard_master())
+    return OLED_ROTATION_180;  // flips the display 180 degrees if offhand
+  return rotation;
+}
+```
+- Remove the functions `matrix_scan_user`, `matrix_update` and `iota_gfx_task_user`
+- Find/Replace `matrix_render_user(struct CharacterMatrix *matrix)` with `iota_gfx_task_user(void)`
+- Find/Replace `is_master` with `is_keyboard_master()`
+- For each instance of `matrix_write_ln(matrix, display_fn())`, rewrite it as `oled_write_ln(read_layer_state(), false);`
+- For each instance of `matrix_write(matrix, read_logo());`, replace with `oled_write(read_logo(), false);`
+
+### Refactor zinc to use split_common
+
+[#7114](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/7114) and [#9171](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9171)
+
+* Refactor to use split_common and remove split codes under the zinc/revx/
+* Add - backlight RGB LED and/or underglow RGB LED option
+* Add - continuous RGB animations feature (between L and R halves) 
+* Fix - keymap files to adapt to changes
+    * all authors of keymaps confirmed this PR
+* Update - documents and rules.mk
+
+### Refactor of TKC1800 to use common OLED code
+
+[#8472](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8472)
+
+Modifies the default firmware for TKC1800 to use the in-built I2C and OLED drivers, instead of including and depending on its own set of libraries for the following functionality:
+
+- SSD1306 display
+- i2c for OLED
+
+This allows current TKC1800 firmware to advance with updates to those drivers, which are shared with other keyboards.
+
+#### To migrate existing TKC1800 firmware:
+
+[Changes to `config.h`](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8472/files#diff-d10b26e676b4a55cbb00d71955116526):
+- Remove `#define SSD1306OLED` from config.h
+
+[Changes to `tkc1800.c`](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8472/files#diff-3b35bd30abe89c8110717c6972cd2cc5):
+- Add the following to avoid debug errors on HID_listen if the screen is not present
+```c
+void keyboard_pre_init_kb(void) {
+  setPinInputHigh(D0);
+  setPinInputHigh(D1);
+
+  keyboard_pre_init_user();
+}
+```
+
+[Changes to `keymap.c`](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8472/files#diff-05a2a344ce27e4d045fe68520ccd4771):
+- Find/Replace each instance of `#ifdef SSD1306OLED` with `#ifdef OLED_DRIVER_ENABLE`
+- The following changes are for compatibility with the OLED driver. If you don't use the OLED driver you may safely delete [this section](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/blob/e6b9980bd45c186f7360df68c24b6e05a80c10dc/keyboards/lily58/keymaps/default/keymap.c#L144-L190)
+- [Remove](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/6260/files#diff-20943ea59856e9bdf3d99ecb2eee40b7L91-L158) the block
+```c
+#ifdef SSD1306OLED	
+  iota_gfx_init(!has_usb());   // turns on the display	
+#endif
+```
+- Within the block bounded by `#ifdef OLED_DRIVER_ENABLE` and `#endif // OLED_DRIVER_ENABLE`, add the following block to ensure that your two OLEDs are rotated correctly across the left and right sides:
+```c
+oled_rotation_t oled_init_user(oled_rotation_t rotation) {
+  if (!is_keyboard_master())
+    return OLED_ROTATION_180;  // flips the display 180 degrees if offhand
+  return rotation;
+}
+```
+- Remove the function `iota_gfx_task_user`
+
+### Split HHKB to ANSI and JP layouts and Add VIA support for each
+
+[#8582](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8582)
+
+- Splits the HHKB codebase into two separate folders `keyboards/hhkb/ansi` and `keyboards/hhkb/jp`.
+- Adds VIA Configurator support for both versions.
+
+#### Migrating existing HHKB keymaps
+
+- Remove any checks for the `HHKB_JP` definition
+  - All checks for this definition have been removed, and each version uses the source that is appropriate to that version.
+- Move the directory for your keymap into the appropriate `keymaps` directory
+  - `keyboards/hhkb/ansi/keymaps/` for ANSI HHKBs
+  - `keyboards/hhkb/jp/keymaps/` for HHKB JPs
+- Compile with the new keyboard names
+  - This PR changes the compilation instructions for the HHKB Alternate Controller. To compile firmware for this controller moving forward, use:
+    - `make hhkb/ansi` for ANSI-layout HHKBs
+    - `make hhkb/jp` for HHKB JP keyboards
+
+
+## Keyboard Moves
+
+- [#8412](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8412 "Changing board names to prevent confusion") by blindassassin111
+- [#8499](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8499 "Move the Keyboardio Model01 to a keyboardio/ subdir") by algernon
+- [#8830](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8830 "Move spaceman keyboards") by Spaceman (formerly known as Rionlion100)
+- [#8537](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8537 "Organizing my keyboards (plaid, tartan, ergoinu)") by hsgw
+
+Keyboards by Keyboardio, Spaceman, and hsgw move to vendor folders, while PCBs designed by blindassassin111 are renamed.
+
+Old Name           | New Name
+:----------------- | :-----------------
+2_milk             | spaceman/2_milk
+at101_blackheart   | at101_bh
+ergoinu            | dm9records/ergoinu
+model01            | keyboardio/model01
+omnikey_blackheart | omnikey_bh
+pancake            | spaceman/pancake
+plaid              | dm9records/plaid
+tartan             | dm9records/tartan
+z150_blackheart    | z150_bh
+
+If you own one of these PCBs, please use the new names to compile your firmware moving forward.
+
+
+## Keycode Migration PRs
+
+[#8954](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8954 "Migrate `ACTION_LAYER_TOGGLE` to `TG()`"), [#8957](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8957 "Migrate `ACTION_MODS_ONESHOT` to `OSM()`"), [#8958](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8958 "Migrate `ACTION_DEFAULT_LAYER_SET` to `DF()`"), [#8959](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8959 "Migrate `ACTION_LAYER_MODS` to `LM()`"), [#8968](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8968 "Migrate `ACTION_MODS_TAP_KEY` to `MT()`"), [#8977](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8977 "Migrate miscellaneous `fn_actions` entries"), and [#8979](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8979 "Migrate `ACTION_MODS_KEY` to chained mod keycodes")
+
+Authored by fauxpark, these pull requests remove references to deprecated TMK macros that have been superseded by native QMK keycodes.
+
+Old `fn_actions` action | New QMK keycode
+:---------------------- | :--------------
+`ACTION_DEFAULT_LAYER_SET(layer)` | `DF(layer)`
+`ACTION_LAYER_MODS(layer, mod)` | `LM(layer, mod)`
+`ACTION_LAYER_ONESHOT(mod)` | `OSL(mod)`
+`ACTION_LAYER_TOGGLE(layer)` | `TG(layer)`
+`ACTION_MODS_ONESHOT(mod)` | `OSM(mod)`
+`ACTION_MODS_TAP_KEY(mod, kc)` | `MT(mod, kc)`
+`ACTION_MODS_KEY(mod, kc)`<br>e.g. `ACTION_MODS_KEY(MOD_LCTL, KC_0)` | `MOD(kc)`<br>e.g. `LCTL(KC_0)`

docs/ChangeLog/20200829.md

@@ -0,0 +1,148 @@
+# QMK Breaking Change - 2020 Aug 29 Changelog
+
+Four times a year QMK runs a process for merging Breaking Changes. A Breaking Change is any change which modifies how QMK behaves in a way that is incompatible or potentially dangerous. We limit these changes to 4 times per year so that users can have confidence that updating their QMK tree will not break their keymaps.
+
+
+## Changes Requiring User Action :id=changes-requiring-user-action
+
+### Relocated Keyboards :id-relocated-keyboards
+
+#### The Key Company project consolidation ([#9547](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9547))
+#### relocating boards by flehrad to flehrad/ folder ([#9635](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9635))
+
+Keyboards released by The Key Company and keyboards designed by flehrad have moved to vendor folders. If you own any of the keyboards listed below, please use the new names to compile your firmware moving forward.
+
+Old Name               | New Name
+:--------------------- | :------------------
+candybar/lefty         | tkc/candybar/lefty
+candybar/righty        | tkc/candybar/righty
+m0lly                  | tkc/m0lly
+tkc1800                | tkc/tkc1800
+bigswitch              | flehrad/bigswitch
+handwired/downbubble   | flehrad/downbubble
+handwired/numbrero     | flehrad/numbrero
+snagpad                | flehrad/snagpad
+handwired/tradestation | flehrad/tradestation
+
+### Updated Keyboard Codebases :id=keyboard-updates
+
+#### Keebio RGB wiring update ([#7754](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/7754))
+
+This pull request changes the configuration for Keebio split boards to use the same RGB strip wiring for each half, which provides the following improvements:
+
+* Easier wiring due to one fewer wire needed (the wire between left DOut to extra data pin) and the fact that wiring is the same for both halves.
+* RGB LEDs can be controlled by each half now instead of just master half.
+* Extra data line is freed up to allow for I2C usage instead of serial.
+
+If you have customized the value of `RGBLED_SPLIT` for your keymap, you will need to undefine it using `#undef RGBLED_SPLIT` before defining it to your customized value.
+
+This change affects:
+
+* BFO-9000
+* Fourier
+* Iris rev2
+* Levinson, revs. 1 and 2
+* Nyquist, revs. 1 and 2
+* Quefrency rev1
+* Viterbi, revs. 1 and 2
+
+### Changes to Core Functionality :id=core-updates
+
+* Bigger Combo index ([#9318](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9318))
+
+Allows the Combo feature to support more than 256 combos.
+
+Any fork that uses `process_combo_event` needs to update the function's first argument to `uint16_t`:
+
+* Old function: `void process_combo_event(uint8_t combo_index, bool pressed)`
+* New function: `void process_combo_event(uint16_t combo_index, bool pressed)`
+
+
+## Core Changes :id=core-changes
+
+### Fixes :id=core-fixes
+
+* Mousekeys: scrolling acceleration is no longer coupled to mouse movement acceleration ([#9174](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9174))
+* Keymap Extras: correctly assign Question Mark in Czech layout ([#9987](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9987))
+
+### Additions and Enhancements :id=core-additions
+
+* allow for WS2812 PWM to work on DMAMUX-capable devices ([#9471](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9471))
+  * Newer STM32 MCUs have a DMAMUX peripheral, which allows mapping of DMAs to different DMA streams, rather than hard-defining the target streams in silicon.
+  * Affects STM32L4+ devices, as well as the soon-to-be-supported-by-QMK STM32G4/H7 families.
+  * Tested on F303/Proton C (ChibiOS v19, non-DMAMUX), G474 (ChibiOS v20, with DMAMUX).
+* dual-bank STM32 bootloader support ([#8778](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8778) and [#9738](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9738))
+  * Adds support for STM32 dual-bank flash bootloaders, by toggling a GPIO during early init in order to charge an RC circuit attached to `BOOT0`.
+  * The main rationale behind this is that dual-bank STM32 devices unconditionally execute user-mode code, regardless of whether or not the user-mode code jumps to the bootloader. If either flash bank is valid (and `BOOT0` is low), then the built-in bootloader will skip any sort of DFU.
+  * This PR allows for the initialisation sequencing to charge the RC circuit based on the example circuit posted on Discord, effectively pulling `BOOT0` high before issuing the system reset. As the RC circuit takes a while to discharge, the system reset executes the ROM bootloader which subsequently sees `BOOT0` high, and starts executing the DFU routines.
+  * Tested with STM32L082 (with current QMK+current ChibiOS), and STM32G474 (against ChibiOS 20.x).
+* update Space Cadet and Tap Dance features to use Custom Tapping Term when appropriate ([#6259](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/6259))
+  * For the Tap Dance feature, this completely removes the need for the `ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN_ADVANCED_TIME` dance.
+* HID Joystick Interface ([#4226](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/4226) and [#9949](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9949 "Fix Joystick Compile Issues"))
+  * This implements a joystick feature, including a joystick_task function called from TMK, specific keycodes for joystick buttons and a USB HID interface.
+  * Tested on V-USB backend and Proton C; compiles but untested on LUFA.
+  * In order to test, you have to add `JOYSTICK_ENABLE = yes` to your `rules.mk` and
+    ```c
+    #define JOYSTICK_BUTTON_COUNT 8
+    #define JOYSTICK_AXES_COUNT 2
+    ```
+    in your config.h.
+* Christmas RGB Underglow animation now fades between green and red ([#7648](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/7648))
+  * `RGBLIGHT_EFFECT_CHRISTMAS_INTERVAL` has been greatly decreased; please check your animation if you have customized this value.
+* layer state now initializes on startup ([#8318](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8318))
+  * This should produce more consistent behavior between the two functions and layer masks.
+* added support for HSV->RGB conversion without using CIE curve ([#9856](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9856))
+* added NOEEPROM functions for RGB Matrix ([#9487](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9487))
+  * Added eeprom_helpers for toggle, mode, sethsv, speed, similar to rgblight versions.
+  * Added set_speed function.
+  * Added helper functions, similar to those in rgblight, in order to add NOEEPROM versions of toggle, step, hue, sat, val, and speed.
+  * Minor: spelling correction for EEPROM in a debug message.
+* flashing firmware using `st-flash` utility from [STLink Tools](https://github.com/stlink-org/stlink) is now supported ([#9964](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9964))
+* add ability to dump all makefile variables for the specified target ([#8256](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8256))
+  * Adds a new subtarget to builds, `dump_vars`, which allows for printing out all the variables that make knows about, after all substitutions occur.
+  * Example: `make handwired/onekey/proton_c:default:dump_vars`
+* add ability to change the Auto Shift timeout in real time ([#8441](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8441))
+* added a timer implementation for backlight on ChibiOS ([#8291](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8291))
+* added a third endpoint to V-USB keyboards ([#9020](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9020))
+* added a method to read the OLED display buffer from user space ([#8777](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8777))
+* K-Type refactor ([#9864](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9864))
+  * The K-Type has been refactored to use QMK's native matrix scanning routine, and now has partial support for the RGB Matrix feature.
+* Joysticks can now be used without defining analog pins ([#10169](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10169))
+
+### Clean-ups and Optimizations :id=core-optimizations
+
+* iWRAP protocol removed ([#9284](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9284))
+* work begun for consolidation of ChibiOS platform files ([#8327](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8327) and [#9315](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9315))
+  * Start of the consolidation work to move the ChibiOS board definitions as well as the default set of configuration files for existing board definitions used by keyboards.
+    * Uses `/platforms/chibios` as previously discussed on discord.
+    * Consolidates the Proton C configs into the generic F303 definitions.
+    * Allows for defining a default set of `chconf.h`, `halconf.h`, and `mcuconf.h` files within the platform definition, which is able to be overridden by the keyboard directly, though include path ordering.
+    * Adds template `chconf.h`, `halconf.h`, `mcuconf.h`, and `board.h` that can be dropped into a keyboard directory, in order to override rather than replace the entire contents of the respective files.
+    * Removed Proton C QMK board definitions, falling back to ChibiOS board definitions with QMK overrides.
+* Various tidy-ups for USB descriptor code ([#9005](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9005))
+  * Renamed `keyboard_led_stats` in lufa.c and ChibiOS usb_main.c to `keyboard_led_state`, as well as `vusb_keyboard_leds`, for consistency
+  * Formatted CDC and MIDI descriptors better
+  * Removed `ENDPOINT_CONFIG` macro, it seems pointless and removes the need for endpoint address defines in the middle of the endpoint numbering enum
+  * Fixed (possibly?) V-USB `GET_REPORT` request handling. Not sure about this one, but the existing code appears to always return an empty report - now `send_keyboard` sets this variable to the current report, matching what the LUFA code does.
+* converted `CONSUMER2BLUEFRUIT()` and `CONSUMER2RN42()` macros to static inline functions ([#9055](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9055))
+* Additional cleanups for V-USB code ([#9310](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9310))
+  * Removing the UART stuff entirely, now that we have Console support. Also fixing up various other things; switching some `debug()` calls to `dprintf()`, moved `raw_hid_report` out of the way so that we can implement the shared endpoint stuff.
+* removed inclusion of `adafruit_ble.h` from `ssd1306.c` ([#9355](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9355))
+* `outputselect.c` is no longer compiled if Bluetooth is disabled ([#9356](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9356))
+* `analogRead()` deprecated in favor of `analogReadPin()` ([#9023](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9023))
+* forcibly disable NKRO on V-USB controllers ([#9054](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9054))
+* removed warning if running backlight on STM32F072 ([#10040](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10040))
+* removed unused CORTEX_VTOR_INIT rules.mk option ([#10053](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10053))
+* improved handling for enabling Link Time Optimization ([#9832](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9832))
+* streamline rules for supporting Kiibohd bootloader ([#10129](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10129))
+* Define `STM32_DMA_REQUIRED` when using DMA-based WS2812 driver on STM32 ([#10127](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10127))
+* fix DMA stream ID calculation in ws2812_pwm ([#10008](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10008))
+* remove support for Adafruit EZ Key Bluetooth controller ([#10103](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10103))
+
+
+## QMK Infrastructure and Internals :id=qmk-internals
+
+* Attempt to fix CI for non-master branches. ([#9308](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9308))
+  * Actually fetch the branch we're attempting to compare against.
+* Run `qmk cformat` on `develop` branch ([#9501](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9501))
+* minor refactor of Bluetooth API ([#9905](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9905))

docs/ChangeLog/20201128.md

@@ -0,0 +1,150 @@
+# QMK Breaking Change - 2020 Nov 28 Changelog
+
+Four times a year QMK runs a process for merging Breaking Changes. A Breaking Change is any change which modifies how QMK behaves in a way that is incompatible or potentially dangerous. We limit these changes to 4 times per year so that users can have confidence that updating their QMK tree will not break their keymaps.
+
+
+## Changes Requiring User Action :id=changes-requiring-user-action
+
+### Relocated Keyboards :id-relocated-keyboards
+
+#### Reduce Helix keyboard build variation ([#8669](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8669))
+
+The build commands for the Helix keyboard are:
+
+```
+make <helix_build_name>:<keymap_name>
+```
+
+For `<helix_build_name>`, specify the one in the rightmost column of the table below, such as `helix`,` helix/pico`.
+
+| before Oct 17 2019   |  Oct 17 2019            | Mar 10 2020             | Nov 28 2020             |
+| ---------------------|-------------------------|-------------------------| ------------------------|
+| helix/rev1           | helix/rev1              | helix/rev1              | helix/rev1              |
+| helix/pico           | helix/pico              | helix/pico              | helix/pico              |
+|                      | helix/pico/back         | helix/pico/back         | helix/pico/back         |
+|                      | helix/pico/under        | helix/pico/under        | helix/pico/under        |
+|                      |                         | helix/pico/sc           | --                      |
+|                      |                         | helix/pico/sc/back      | helix/pico/sc           |
+|                      |                         | helix/pico/sc/under     | --                      |
+| helix/rev2 (=helix)  | helix/rev2 (=helix)     | helix/rev2 (=helix)     | --                      |
+|                      | helix/rev2/back         | helix/rev2/back         | --                      |
+|                      | helix/rev2/back/oled    | helix/rev2/back/oled    | ( --> helix/rev2/back)  |
+|                      | helix/rev2/oled         | helix/rev2/oled         | helix/rev2　(=helix)     |
+|                      | helix/rev2/oled/back    | helix/rev2/oled/back    | helix/rev2/back         |
+|                      | helix/rev2/oled/under   | helix/rev2/oled/under   | helix/rev2/under        |
+|                      |                         | helix/rev2/sc           | --                      |
+|                      |                         | helix/rev2/sc/back      | --                      |
+|                      |                         | helix/rev2/sc/oled      | --                      |
+|                      |                         | helix/rev2/sc/oledback  | helix/rev2/sc           |
+|                      |                         | helix/rev2/sc/oledunder | --                      |
+|                      |                         | helix/rev2/sc/under     | --                      |
+|                      | helix/rev2/under        | helix/rev2/under        | --                      |
+|                      | helix/rev2/under/oled   | helix/rev2/under/oled   | ( --> helix/rev2/under) |
+
+#### Update the Speedo firmware for v3.0 ([#10657](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10657))
+
+The Speedo keyboard has moved to `cozykeys/speedo/v2` as the designer prepares to release the Speedo v3.0.
+
+| Previous Name | New Name                   |
+| :------------ | :------------------------- |
+| speedo        | cozykeys/speedo/v2         |
+| --            | cozykeys/speedo/v3 **new** |
+
+#### Maartenwut/Maarten name change to evyd13/Evy ([#10274](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10274))
+
+Maartenwut has rebranded as @evyd13, and all released Maartenwut boards have moved.
+
+| Previous Name          | New Name           |
+| :--------------------- | :----------------- |
+| maartenwut/atom47/rev2 | evyd13/atom47/rev2 |
+| maartenwut/atom47/rev3 | evyd13/atom47/rev3 |
+| maartenwut/eon40       | evyd13/eon40       |
+| maartenwut/eon65       | evyd13/eon65       |
+| maartenwut/eon75       | evyd13/eon75       |
+| maartenwut/eon87       | evyd13/eon87       |
+| maartenwut/eon95       | evyd13/eon95       |
+| maartenwut/gh80_1800   | evyd13/gh80_1800   |
+| maartenwut/gh80_3700   | evyd13/gh80_3700   |
+| maartenwut/minitomic   | evyd13/minitomic   |
+| maartenwut/mx5160      | evyd13/mx5160      |
+| maartenwut/nt660       | evyd13/nt660       |
+| maartenwut/omrontkl    | evyd13/omrontkl    |
+| maartenwut/plain60     | evyd13/plain60     |
+| maartenwut/pockettype  | evyd13/pockettype  |
+| maartenwut/quackfire   | evyd13/quackfire   |
+| maartenwut/solheim68   | evyd13/solheim68   |
+| maartenwut/ta65        | evyd13/ta65        |
+| maartenwut/wasdat      | evyd13/wasdat      |
+| maartenwut/wasdat_code | evyd13/wasdat_code |
+| maartenwut/wonderland  | evyd13/wonderland  |
+
+#### Xelus Valor and Dawn60 Refactors ([#10512](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10512), [#10584](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10584))
+
+The Valor and Dawn60 keyboards by Xelus22 both now require their revisions to be specified when compiling.
+
+| Previous Name | New Name          |
+| :------------ | :---------------- |
+| xelus/dawn60  | xelus/dawn60/rev1 |
+| xelus/valor   | xelus/valor/rev1  |
+
+
+### Updated Keyboard Codebases :id=keyboard-updates
+
+#### AEboards EXT65 Refactor ([#10820](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10820))
+
+The EXT65 codebase has been reworked so keymaps can be used with either revision.
+
+
+## Core Changes :id=core-changes
+
+### Fixes :id=core-fixes
+
+* Reconnect the USB if users wake up a computer from the keyboard to restore the USB state ([#10088](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10088))
+* Fix cursor position bug in oled_write_raw functions ([#10800](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10800))
+
+### Additions and Enhancements :id=core-additions
+
+* Allow MATRIX_ROWS to be greater than 32 ([#10183](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10183))
+* Add support for soft serial to ATmega32U2 ([#10204](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10204))
+* Allow direct control of MIDI velocity value ([#9940](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9940))
+* Joystick 16-bit support ([#10439](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10439))
+* Allow encoder resolutions to be set per encoder ([#10259](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10259))
+* Share button state from mousekey to pointing_device ([#10179](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10179))
+* Add advanced/efficient RGB Matrix Indicators ([#8564](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8564))
+* OLED display update interval support ([#10388](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10388))
+* Per-Key Retro Tapping ([#10622](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10622))
+* Allow backlight duty cycle limit ([#10260](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10260))
+* Add step sequencer feature ([#9703](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9703))
+* Added `add_oneshot_mods` & `del_oneshot_mods` ([#10549](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10549))
+* Add AT90USB support for serial.c ([#10706](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10706))
+* Auto shift: support repeats and early registration (#9826)
+
+### Clean-ups and Optimizations :id=core-optimizations
+
+* Haptic and solenoid cleanup ([#9700](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9700))
+* XD75 cleanup ([#10524](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10524))
+* Minor change to behavior allowing display updates to continue between task ticks ([#10750](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10750))
+* Change some GPIO manipulations in matrix.c to be atomic ([#10491](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10491))
+* combine repeated lines of code for ATmega32U2, ATmega16U2, ATmega328 and ATmega328P ([#10837](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10837))
+* Remove references to HD44780 ([#10735](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10735))
+
+
+## QMK Infrastructure and Internals :id=qmk-internals
+
+* Add ability to build a subset of all keyboards based on platform. ([#10420](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10420))
+* Initialise EEPROM drivers at startup, instead of upon first execution ([#10438](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10438))
+* Make bootloader_jump weak for ChibiOS ([#10417](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10417))
+* Support for STM32 GPIOF,G,H,I,J,K ([#10206](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10206))
+* Add milc as a dependency and remove the installed milc ([#10563](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10563))
+* ChibiOS upgrade: early init conversions ([#10214](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10214))
+* ChibiOS upgrade: configuration file migrator ([#9952](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/9952))
+* Add definition based on currently-selected serial driver. ([#10716](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10716))
+* Allow for modification of output RGB values when using rgblight/rgb_matrix. ([#10638](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10638))
+* Allow keyboards/keymaps to execute code at each main loop iteration ([#10530](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10530))
+* qmk cformat ([#10767](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10767))
+* Add a Make variable to easily enable DEBUG_MATRIX_SCAN_RATE on the command line ([#10824](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10824))
+* update Chibios OS USB for the OTG driver ([#8893](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/8893))
+* Fixup version.h writing when using `SKIP_VERSION=yes` ([#10972](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10972), [#10974](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10974))
+* Rename ledmatrix.h to match .c file ([#7949](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/7949))
+* Split RGB_MATRIX_ENABLE into _ENABLE and _DRIVER ([#10231](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10231))
+* Split LED_MATRIX_ENABLE into _ENABLE and _DRIVER ([#10840](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/10840))

docs/_summary.md

@@ -6,6 +6,7 @@
   * [Testing and Debugging](newbs_testing_debugging.md)
   * [Getting Help/Support](support.md)
   * [Other Resources](newbs_learn_more_resources.md)
+  * [Syllabus](syllabus.md)
 
 * FAQs
   * [General FAQ](faq_general.md)
@@ -22,6 +23,7 @@
     * [Overview](api_overview.md)
     * [API Documentation](api_docs.md)
     * [Keyboard Support](reference_configurator_support.md)
+    * [Adding Default Keymaps](configurator_default_keymaps.md)
 
 * CLI
     * [Overview](cli.md)
@@ -33,7 +35,9 @@
     * [Customizing Functionality](custom_quantum_functions.md)
     * [Driver Installation with Zadig](driver_installation_zadig.md)
     * [Keymap Overview](keymap.md)
-    * [Vagrant Guide](getting_started_vagrant.md)
+    * Development Environments
+      * [Docker Guide](getting_started_docker.md)
+      * [Vagrant Guide](getting_started_vagrant.md)
     * Flashing
       * [Flashing](flashing.md)
       * [Flashing ATmega32A (ps2avrgb)](flashing_bootloadhid.md)
@@ -52,6 +56,7 @@
   * Simple Keycodes
     * [Full List](keycodes.md)
     * [Basic Keycodes](keycodes_basic.md)
+    * [Language-Specific Keycodes](reference_keymap_extras.md)
     * [Modifier Keys](feature_advanced_keycodes.md)
     * [Quantum Keycodes](quantum_keycodes.md)
 
@@ -74,6 +79,8 @@
     * [Layers](feature_layers.md)
     * [One Shot Keys](one_shot_keys.md)
     * [Pointing Device](feature_pointing_device.md)
+    * [Raw HID](feature_rawhid.md)
+    * [Sequencer](feature_sequencer.md)
     * [Swap Hands](feature_swap_hands.md)
     * [Tap Dance](feature_tap_dance.md)
     * [Tap-Hold Configuration](tap_hold.md)
@@ -98,6 +105,8 @@
     * [DIP Switch](feature_dip_switch.md)
     * [Encoders](feature_encoders.md)
     * [Haptic Feedback](feature_haptic_feedback.md)
+    * [Joystick](feature_joystick.md)
+    * [LED Indicators](feature_led_indicators.md)
     * [Proton C Conversion](proton_c_conversion.md)
     * [PS/2 Mouse](feature_ps2_mouse.md)
     * [Split Keyboard](feature_split_keyboard.md)
@@ -106,10 +115,14 @@
     * [Velocikey](feature_velocikey.md)
 
 * Developing QMK
+  * [PR Checklist](pr_checklist.md)
   * Breaking Changes
     * [Overview](breaking_changes.md)
     * [My Pull Request Was Flagged](breaking_changes_instructions.md)
     * History
+      * [2020 Nov 28](ChangeLog/20201128.md)
+      * [2020 Aug 29](ChangeLog/20200829.md)
+      * [2020 May 30](ChangeLog/20200530.md)
       * [2020 Feb 29](ChangeLog/20200229.md)
       * [2019 Aug 30](ChangeLog/20190830.md)
 
@@ -121,8 +134,10 @@
     * [Drivers](hardware_drivers.md)
       * [ADC Driver](adc_driver.md)
       * [I2C Driver](i2c_driver.md)
+      * [SPI Driver](spi_driver.md)
       * [WS2812 Driver](ws2812_driver.md)
       * [EEPROM Driver](eeprom_driver.md)
+      * ['serial' Driver](serial_driver.md)
     * [GPIO Controls](internals_gpio_control.md)
     * [Keyboard Guidelines](hardware_keyboard_guidelines.md)
 
@@ -135,6 +150,11 @@
       * [Development Environment](api_development_environment.md)
       * [Architecture Overview](api_development_overview.md)
 
+  * Hardware Platform Development
+    * Arm/ChibiOS
+      * [Selecting an MCU](platformdev_selecting_arm_mcu.md)
+      * [Early initialization](platformdev_chibios_earlyinit.md)
+
   * QMK Reference
     * [Contributing to QMK](contributing.md)
     * [Translating the QMK Docs](translating.md)

docs/adc_driver.md

@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ Then place this include at the top of your code:
 
 ### AVR
 
-|Channel|AT90USB64/128|ATmega16/32U4|ATmega32A|ATmega328P|
+|Channel|AT90USB64/128|ATmega16/32U4|ATmega32A|ATmega328/P|
 |-------|-------------|-------------|---------|----------|
 |0      |`F0`         |`F0`         |`A0`     |`C0`      |
 |1      |`F1`         |`F1`         |`A1`     |`C1`      |
@@ -39,15 +39,15 @@ Then place this include at the top of your code:
 |12     |             |`B5`         |         |          |
 |13     |             |`B6`         |         |          |
 
-<sup>\* The ATmega328P possesses two extra ADC channels; however, they are not present on the DIP pinout, and are not shared with GPIO pins. You can use `adc_read()` directly to gain access to these.</sup>
+<sup>\* The ATmega328/P possesses two extra ADC channels; however, they are not present on the DIP pinout, and are not shared with GPIO pins. You can use `adc_read()` directly to gain access to these.</sup>
 
 ### ARM
 
 Note that some of these pins are doubled-up on ADCs with the same channel. This is because the pins can be used for either ADC.
 
-Also note that the F0 and F3 use different numbering schemes. The F0 has a single ADC and the channels are 0-based, whereas the F3 has 4 ADCs and the channels are 1 based. This is because the F0 uses the `ADCv1` implementation of the ADC, whereas the F3 uses the `ADCv3` implementation.
+Also note that the F0 and F3 use different numbering schemes. The F0 has a single ADC and the channels are 0-indexed, whereas the F3 has 4 ADCs and the channels are 1-indexed. This is because the F0 uses the `ADCv1` implementation of the ADC, whereas the F3 uses the `ADCv3` implementation.
 
-|ADC|Channel|STM32F0XX|STM32F3XX|
+|ADC|Channel|STM32F0xx|STM32F3xx|
 |---|-------|---------|---------|
 |1  |0      |`A0`     |         |
 |1  |1      |`A1`     |`A0`     |
@@ -122,32 +122,29 @@ Also note that the F0 and F3 use different numbering schemes. The F0 has a singl
 |Function                    |Description                                                                                                        |
 |----------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
 |`analogReference(mode)`     |Sets the analog voltage reference source. Must be one of `ADC_REF_EXTERNAL`, `ADC_REF_POWER` or `ADC_REF_INTERNAL`.|
-|`analogRead(pin)`           |Reads the value from the specified Arduino pin, eg. `4` for ADC6 on the ATmega32U4.                                |
-|`analogReadPin(pin)`        |Reads the value from the specified QMK pin, eg. `F6` for ADC6 on the ATmega32U4.                                   |
-|`pinToMux(pin)`             |Translates a given QMK pin to a mux value. If an unsupported pin is given, returns the mux value for "0V (GND)".   |
+|`analogReadPin(pin)`        |Reads the value from the specified pin, eg. `F6` for ADC6 on the ATmega32U4.                                       |
+|`pinToMux(pin)`             |Translates a given pin to a mux value. If an unsupported pin is given, returns the mux value for "0V (GND)".       |
 |`adc_read(mux)`             |Reads the value from the ADC according to the specified mux. See your MCU's datasheet for more information.        |
 
 ### ARM
 
-Note that care was taken to match all of the functions used for AVR devices, however complications in the ARM platform prevent that from always being possible. For example, the `STM32` chips do not have assigned Arduino pins. We could use the default pin numbers, but those numbers change based on the package type of the device. For this reason, please specify your target pins with their identifiers (`A0`, `F3`, etc.). Also note that there are some variants of functions that accept the target ADC for the pin. Some pins can be used for multiple ADCs, and this specified can help you pick which ADC will be used to interact with that pin.
-
-|Function                    |Description                                                                                                         |
-|----------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-|`analogReadPin(pin)`        |Reads the value from the specified QMK pin, eg. `A0` for channel 0 on the STM32F0 and ADC1 channel 1 on the STM32F3. Note that if a pin can be used for multiple ADCs, it will pick the lower numbered ADC for this function. eg. `C0` will be channel 6 of ADC 1 when it could be used for ADC 2 as well.|
-|`analogReadPinAdc(pin, adc)`|Reads the value from the specified QMK pin and ADC, eg. `C0, 1` will read from channel 6, ADC 2 instead of ADC 1. Note that the ADCs are 0-indexed for this function.|
-|`pinToMux(pin)`             |Translates a given QMK pin to a channel and ADC combination. If an unsupported pin is given, returns the mux value for "0V (GND)".|
-|`adc_read(mux)`             |Reads the value from the ADC according to the specified pin and adc combination. See your MCU's datasheet for more information.|
+|Function                    |Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+|----------------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+|`analogReadPin(pin)`        |Reads the value from the specified pin, eg. `A0` for channel 0 on the STM32F0 and ADC1 channel 1 on the STM32F3. Note that if a pin can be used for multiple ADCs, it will pick the lower numbered ADC for this function. eg. `C0` will be channel 6 of ADC 1 when it could be used for ADC 2 as well.|
+|`analogReadPinAdc(pin, adc)`|Reads the value from the specified pin and ADC, eg. `C0, 1` will read from channel 6, ADC 2 instead of ADC 1. Note that the ADCs are 0-indexed for this function.                                                                                                                                     |
+|`pinToMux(pin)`             |Translates a given pin to a channel and ADC combination. If an unsupported pin is given, returns the mux value for "0V (GND)".                                                                                                                                                                        |
+|`adc_read(mux)`             |Reads the value from the ADC according to the specified pin and ADC combination. See your MCU's datasheet for more information.                                                                                                                                                                       |
 
 ## Configuration
 
 ## ARM
 
-The ARM implementation of the ADC has a few additional options that you can override in your own keyboards and keymaps to change how it operates.
+The ARM implementation of the ADC has a few additional options that you can override in your own keyboards and keymaps to change how it operates. Please consult the corresponding `hal_adc_lld.h` in ChibiOS for your specific microcontroller for further documentation on your available options.
 
-|`#define`          |Type  |Default              |Description|
-|-------------------|------|---------------------|-----------|
-|ADC_CIRCULAR_BUFFER|`bool`|`false`              |If `TRUE`, then the implementation will use a circular buffer.|
-|ADC_NUM_CHANNELS   |`int` |`1`                  |Sets the number of channels that will be scanned as part of an ADC operation. The current implementation only supports `1`.|
-|ADC_BUFFER_DEPTH   |`int` |`2`                  |Sets the depth of each result. Since we are only getting a 12-bit result by default, we set this to `2` bytes so we can contain our one value. This could be set to 1 if you opt for a 8-bit or lower result.|
-|ADC_SAMPLING_RATE  |`int` |`ADC_SMPR_SMP_1P5`   |Sets the sampling rate of the ADC. By default, it is set to the fastest setting. Please consult the corresponding `hal_adc_lld.h` in ChibiOS for your specific microcontroller for further documentation on your available options.|
-|ADC_RESOLUTION     |`int` |`ADC_CFGR1_RES_12BIT`|The resolution of your result. We choose 12 bit by default, but you can opt for 12, 10, 8, or 6 bit. Please consult the corresponding `hal_adc_lld.h` in ChibiOS for your specific microcontroller for further documentation on your available options.|
+|`#define`            |Type  |Default              |Description                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
+|---------------------|------|---------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+|`ADC_CIRCULAR_BUFFER`|`bool`|`false`              |If `true`, then the implementation will use a circular buffer.                                                                                                                                              |
+|`ADC_NUM_CHANNELS`   |`int` |`1`                  |Sets the number of channels that will be scanned as part of an ADC operation. The current implementation only supports `1`.                                                                                 |
+|`ADC_BUFFER_DEPTH`   |`int` |`2`                  |Sets the depth of each result. Since we are only getting a 12-bit result by default, we set this to 2 bytes so we can contain our one value. This could be set to 1 if you opt for an 8-bit or lower result.|
+|`ADC_SAMPLING_RATE`  |`int` |`ADC_SMPR_SMP_1P5`   |Sets the sampling rate of the ADC. By default, it is set to the fastest setting.                                                                                                                            |
+|`ADC_RESOLUTION`     |`int` |`ADC_CFGR1_RES_12BIT`|The resolution of your result. We choose 12 bit by default, but you can opt for 12, 10, 8, or 6 bit.                                                                                                        |

docs/breaking_changes.md

@@ -6,27 +6,30 @@ The breaking change period is when we will merge PR's that change QMK in dangero
 
 ## What has been included in past Breaking Changes?
 
+* [2020 Nov 28](ChangeLog/20201128.md)
+* [2020 Aug 29](ChangeLog/20200829.md)
+* [2020 May 30](ChangeLog/20200530.md)
 * [2020 Feb 29](ChangeLog/20200229.md)
 * [2019 Aug 30](ChangeLog/20190830.md)
 
 ## When is the next Breaking Change?
 
-The next Breaking Change is scheduled for May 30, 2020.
+The next Breaking Change is scheduled for February 27, 2021.
 
 ### Important Dates
 
-* [x] 2020 Feb 29 - `future` is created. It will be rebased weekly.
-* [ ] 2020 May 2 - `future` closed to new PR's.
-* [ ] 2020 May 2 - Call for testers.
-* [ ] 2020 May 28 - `master` is locked, no PR's merged.
-* [ ] 2020 May 30 - Merge `future` to `master`.
-* [ ] 2020 May 30 - `master` is unlocked. PR's can be merged again.
+* [x] 2020 Nov 28 - `develop` is created. Each push to `master` is subsequently merged to `develop`
+* [ ] 2021 Jan 30 - `develop` closed to new PR's.
+* [ ] 2021 Jan 30 - Call for testers.
+* [ ] 2021 Feb 25 - `master` is locked, no PR's merged.
+* [ ] 2021 Feb 27 - Merge `develop` to `master`.
+* [ ] 2021 Feb 27 - `master` is unlocked. PR's can be merged again.
 
 ## What changes will be included?
 
-To see a list of breaking change candidates you can look at the [`breaking_change` label](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pulls?q=is%3Aopen+label%3Abreaking_change+is%3Apr). New changes might be added between now and when `future` is closed, and a PR with that label applied is not guaranteed to be merged.
+To see a list of breaking change candidates you can look at the [`breaking_change` label](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pulls?q=is%3Aopen+label%3Abreaking_change+is%3Apr). New changes might be added between now and when `develop` is closed, and a PR with that label applied is not guaranteed to be merged.
 
-If you want your breaking change to be included in this round you need to create a PR with the `breaking_change` label and have it accepted before `future` closes. After `future` closes no new breaking changes will be accepted.
+If you want your breaking change to be included in this round you need to create a PR with the `breaking_change` label and have it accepted before `develop` closes. After `develop` closes no new breaking changes will be accepted.
 
 Criteria for acceptance:
 
@@ -37,41 +40,26 @@ Criteria for acceptance:
 
 This section documents various processes we use when running the Breaking Changes process.
 
-## Rebase `future` from `master`
+## Creating the `develop` branch
 
-This is run every Friday while `future` is open.
-
-Process:
-
-```
-cd qmk_firmware
-git checkout master
-git pull --ff-only
-git checkout future
-git rebase master
-git push --force
-```
-
-## Creating the `future` branch
-
-This happens immediately after the previous `future` branch is merged.
+This happens immediately after the previous `develop` branch is merged.
 
 * `qmk_firmware` git commands
     * [ ] `git checkout master`
     * [ ] `git pull --ff-only`
-    * [ ] `git checkout -b future`
+    * [ ] `git checkout -b develop`
     * [ ] Edit `readme.md`
         * [ ] Add a big notice at the top that this is a testing branch.
         * [ ] Include a link to this document
     * [ ] `git commit -m 'Branch point for <DATE> Breaking Change'`
     * [ ] `git tag breakpoint_<YYYY>_<MM>_<DD>`
     * [ ] `git tag <next_version>` # Prevent the breakpoint tag from confusing version incrementing
-    * [ ] `git push origin future`
+    * [ ] `git push origin develop`
     * [ ] `git push --tags`
 
 ## 4 Weeks Before Merge
 
-* `future` is now closed to new PR's, only fixes for current PR's may be merged
+* `develop` is now closed to new PR's, only fixes for current PR's may be merged
 * Post call for testers
     * [ ] Discord
     * [ ] GitHub PR
@@ -94,15 +82,15 @@ This happens immediately after the previous `future` branch is merged.
 ## Day Of Merge
 
 * `qmk_firmware` git commands
-    * [ ] `git checkout future`
+    * [ ] `git checkout develop`
     * [ ] `git pull --ff-only`
     * [ ] `git rebase origin/master`
     * [ ] Edit `readme.md`
-        * [ ] Remove the notes about `future`
+        * [ ] Remove the notes about `develop`
     * [ ] Roll up the ChangeLog into one file.
     * [ ] `git commit -m 'Merge point for <DATE> Breaking Change'`
-    * [ ] `git push origin future`
-* Github Actions
-    * [ ] Create a PR for `future`
+    * [ ] `git push origin develop`
+* GitHub Actions
+    * [ ] Create a PR for `develop`
     * [ ] Make sure travis comes back clean
-    * [ ] Merge `future` PR
+    * [ ] Merge `develop` PR

docs/breaking_changes_instructions.md

@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ If you are contributing core code, and the only reason it needs to go through br
 
 We require submissions that go through the Breaking Change process to include a changelog entry. The entry should be a short summary of the changes your pull request makes – [each section here started as a changelog](ChangeLog/20190830.md "n.b. This should link to the 2019 Aug 30 Breaking Changes doc  - @noroadsleft").
 
-Your changelog should be located at `docs/ChangeLog/YYYYMMDD/PR####.md`, where `YYYYMMDD` is the date on which QMK's breaking change branch – usually named `future` – will be merged into the `master` branch, and `####` is the number of your pull request.
+Your changelog should be located at `docs/ChangeLog/YYYYMMDD/PR####.md`, where `YYYYMMDD` is the date on which QMK's breaking change branch – usually named `develop` – will be merged into the `master` branch, and `####` is the number of your pull request.
 
 If your submission requires action on the part of users, your changelog should instruct users what action(s) must be taken, or link to a location that does so.
 

docs/cli.md

@@ -6,25 +6,24 @@ The QMK CLI makes building and working with QMK keyboards easier. We have provid
 
 ### Requirements :id=requirements
 
-The CLI requires Python 3.5 or greater. We try to keep the number of requirements small but you will also need to install the packages listed in [`requirements.txt`](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/blob/master/requirements.txt). These are installed automatically when you install the QMK CLI.
+QMK requires Python 3.6 or greater. We try to keep the number of requirements small but you will also need to install the packages listed in [`requirements.txt`](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/blob/master/requirements.txt). These are installed automatically when you install the QMK CLI.
 
 ### Install Using Homebrew (macOS, some Linux) :id=install-using-homebrew
 
 If you have installed [Homebrew](https://brew.sh) you can tap and install QMK:
 
 ```
-brew tap qmk/qmk
-brew install qmk
+brew install qmk/qmk/qmk
 export QMK_HOME='~/qmk_firmware' # Optional, set the location for `qmk_firmware`
 qmk setup  # This will clone `qmk/qmk_firmware` and optionally set up your build environment
 ```
 
-### Install Using easy_install or pip :id=install-using-easy_install-or-pip
+### Install Using pip :id=install-using-easy_install-or-pip
 
-If your system is not listed above you can install QMK manually. First ensure that you have python 3.5 (or later) installed and have installed pip. Then install QMK with this command:
+If your system is not listed above you can install QMK manually. First ensure that you have Python 3.6 (or later) installed and have installed pip. Then install QMK with this command:
 
 ```
-pip3 install qmk
+python3 -m pip install qmk
 export QMK_HOME='~/qmk_firmware' # Optional, set the location for `qmk_firmware`
 qmk setup  # This will clone `qmk/qmk_firmware` and optionally set up your build environment
 ```

docs/cli_commands.md

@@ -1,43 +1,13 @@
 # QMK CLI Commands
 
-# CLI Commands
-
-## `qmk cformat`
-
-This command formats C code using clang-format. 
-
-Run it with no arguments to format all core code that has been changed. Default checks `origin/master` with `git diff`, branch can be changed using `-b <branch_name>`
-
-Run it with `-a` to format all core code, or pass filenames on the command line to run it on specific files.
-
-**Usage for specified files**:
-
-```
-qmk cformat [file1] [file2] [...] [fileN]
-```
-
-**Usage for all core files**:
-
-```
-qmk cformat -a
-```
-
-**Usage for only changed files against origin/master**:
-
-```
-qmk cformat
-```
-
-**Usage for only changed files against branch_name**:
-
-```
-qmk cformat -b branch_name
-```
+# User Commands
 
 ## `qmk compile`
 
 This command allows you to compile firmware from any directory. You can compile JSON exports from <https://config.qmk.fm>, compile keymaps in the repo, or compile the keyboard in the current working directory.
 
+This command is directory aware. It will automatically fill in KEYBOARD and/or KEYMAP if you are in a keyboard or keymap directory.
+
 **Usage for Configurator Exports**:
 
 ```
@@ -105,8 +75,9 @@ $ qmk compile -kb dz60
 
 ## `qmk flash`
 
-This command is similar to `qmk compile`, but can also target a bootloader. The bootloader is optional, and is set to `:flash` by default.
-To specify a different bootloader, use `-bl <bootloader>`. Visit the [Flashing Firmware](flashing.md) guide for more details of the available bootloaders.
+This command is similar to `qmk compile`, but can also target a bootloader. The bootloader is optional, and is set to `:flash` by default. To specify a different bootloader, use `-bl <bootloader>`. Visit the [Flashing Firmware](flashing.md) guide for more details of the available bootloaders.
+
+This command is directory aware. It will automatically fill in KEYBOARD and/or KEYMAP if you are in a keyboard or keymap directory.
 
 **Usage for Configurator Exports**:
 
@@ -136,16 +107,6 @@ This command lets you configure the behavior of QMK. For the full `qmk config` d
 qmk config [-ro] [config_token1] [config_token2] [...] [config_tokenN]
 ```
 
-## `qmk docs`
-
-This command starts a local HTTP server which you can use for browsing or improving the docs. Default port is 8936.
-
-**Usage**:
-
-```
-qmk docs [-p PORT]
-```
-
 ## `qmk doctor`
 
 This command examines your environment and alerts you to potential build or flash problems. It can fix many of them if you want it to.
@@ -170,6 +131,32 @@ Check your environment and report problems only:
 
     qmk doctor -n
 
+## `qmk info`
+
+Displays information about keyboards and keymaps in QMK. You can use this to get information about a keyboard, show the layouts, display the underlying key matrix, or to pretty-print JSON keymaps.
+
+**Usage**:
+
+```
+qmk info [-f FORMAT] [-m] [-l] [-km KEYMAP] [-kb KEYBOARD]
+```
+
+This command is directory aware. It will automatically fill in KEYBOARD and/or KEYMAP if you are in a keyboard or keymap directory.
+
+**Examples**:
+
+Show basic information for a keyboard:
+
+    qmk info -kb planck/rev5
+
+Show the matrix for a keyboard:
+
+    qmk info -kb ergodox_ez -m
+
+Show a JSON keymap for a keyboard:
+
+    qmk info -kb clueboard/california -km default
+
 ## `qmk json2c`
 
 Creates a keymap.c from a QMK Configurator export.
@@ -180,6 +167,135 @@ Creates a keymap.c from a QMK Configurator export.
 qmk json2c [-o OUTPUT] filename
 ```
 
+## `qmk c2json`
+
+Creates a keymap.json from a keymap.c.  
+**Note:** Parsing C source files is not easy, therefore this subcommand may not work your keymap. In some cases not using the C pre-processor helps.
+
+**Usage**:
+
+```
+qmk c2json [--no-cpp] [-o OUTPUT] filename
+```
+
+## `qmk lint`
+
+Checks over a keyboard and/or keymap and highlights common errors, problems, and anti-patterns.
+
+**Usage**:
+
+```
+qmk lint [-km KEYMAP] [-kb KEYBOARD] [--strict]
+```
+
+This command is directory aware. It will automatically fill in KEYBOARD and/or KEYMAP if you are in a keyboard or keymap directory.
+
+**Examples**:
+
+Do a basic lint check:
+
+    qmk lint -kb rominronin/katana60/rev2
+
+## `qmk list-keyboards`
+
+This command lists all the keyboards currently defined in `qmk_firmware`
+
+**Usage**:
+
+```
+qmk list-keyboards
+```
+
+## `qmk list-keymaps`
+
+This command lists all the keymaps for a specified keyboard (and revision).
+
+This command is directory aware. It will automatically fill in KEYBOARD if you are in a keyboard directory.
+
+**Usage**:
+
+```
+qmk list-keymaps -kb planck/ez
+```
+
+## `qmk new-keymap`
+
+This command creates a new keymap based on a keyboard's existing default keymap.
+
+This command is directory aware. It will automatically fill in KEYBOARD and/or KEYMAP if you are in a keyboard or keymap directory.
+
+**Usage**:
+
+```
+qmk new-keymap [-kb KEYBOARD] [-km KEYMAP]
+```
+
+## `qmk clean`
+
+This command cleans up the `.build` folder. If `--all` is passed, any .hex or .bin files present in the `qmk_firmware` directory will also be deleted.
+
+**Usage**:
+
+```
+qmk clean [-a]
+```
+
+---
+
+# Developer Commands
+
+## `qmk cformat`
+
+This command formats C code using clang-format. 
+
+Run it with no arguments to format all core code that has been changed. Default checks `origin/master` with `git diff`, branch can be changed using `-b <branch_name>`
+
+Run it with `-a` to format all core code, or pass filenames on the command line to run it on specific files.
+
+**Usage for specified files**:
+
+```
+qmk cformat [file1] [file2] [...] [fileN]
+```
+
+**Usage for all core files**:
+
+```
+qmk cformat -a
+```
+
+**Usage for only changed files against origin/master**:
+
+```
+qmk cformat
+```
+
+**Usage for only changed files against branch_name**:
+
+```
+qmk cformat -b branch_name
+```
+
+## `qmk docs`
+
+This command starts a local HTTP server which you can use for browsing or improving the docs. Default port is 8936.
+
+**Usage**:
+
+```
+qmk docs [-p PORT]
+```
+
+## `qmk generate-docs`
+
+This command allows you to generate QMK documentation locally. It can be uses for general browsing or improving the docs. External tools such as [serve](https://www.npmjs.com/package/serve) can be used to browse the generated files.
+
+**Usage**:
+
+```
+qmk generate-docs
+```
+
 ## `qmk kle2json`
 
 This command allows you to convert from raw KLE data to QMK Configurator JSON. It accepts either an absolute file path, or a file name in the current directory. By default it will not overwrite `info.json` if it is already present. Use the `-f` or `--force` flag to overwrite.
@@ -202,36 +318,6 @@ $ qmk kle2json -f kle.txt -f
 Ψ Wrote out to info.json
 ```
 
-## `qmk list-keyboards`
-
-This command lists all the keyboards currently defined in `qmk_firmware`
-
-**Usage**:
-
-```
-qmk list-keyboards
-```
-
-## `qmk list-keymaps`
-
-This command lists all the keymaps for a specified keyboard (and revision).
-
-**Usage**:
-
-```
-qmk list-keymaps -kb planck/ez
-```
-
-## `qmk new-keymap`
-
-This command creates a new keymap based on a keyboard's existing default keymap.
-
-**Usage**:
-
-```
-qmk new-keymap [-kb KEYBOARD] [-km KEYMAP]
-```
-
 ## `qmk pyformat`
 
 This command formats python code in `qmk_firmware`.

docs/cli_configuration.md

@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ compile.keymap: skully -> None
 |-----|---------------|-------------|
 | user.keyboard | None | The keyboard path (Example: `clueboard/66/rev4`) |
 | user.keymap | None | The keymap name (Example: `default`) |
-| user.name | None | The user's github username. |
+| user.name | None | The user's GitHub username. |
 
 # All Configuration Options
 

docs/cli_development.md

@@ -6,6 +6,18 @@ This document has useful information for developers wishing to write new `qmk` s
 
 The QMK CLI operates using the subcommand pattern made famous by git. The main `qmk` script is simply there to setup the environment and pick the correct entrypoint to run. Each subcommand is a self-contained module with an entrypoint (decorated by `@cli.subcommand()`) that performs some action and returns a shell returncode, or None.
 
+## Developer mode:
+
+If you intend to maintain keyboards and/or contribute to QMK, you can enable the CLI's "Developer" mode:
+
+`qmk config user.developer=True`
+
+This will allow you to see all available subcommands.  
+**Note:** You will have to install additional requirements:  
+```bash
+python3 -m pip install -r requirements-dev.txt
+```
+
 # Subcommands
 
 [MILC](https://github.com/clueboard/milc) is the CLI framework `qmk` uses to handle argument parsing, configuration, logging, and many other features. It lets you focus on writing your tool without wasting your time writing glue code.
@@ -32,7 +44,7 @@ def hello(cli):
 
 First we import the `cli` object from `milc`. This is how we interact with the user and control the script's behavior. We use `@cli.argument()` to define a command line flag, `--name`. This also creates a configuration variable named `hello.name` (and the corresponding `user.name`) which the user can set so they don't have to specify the argument. The `cli.subcommand()` decorator designates this function as a subcommand. The name of the subcommand will be taken from the name of the function.
 
-Once inside our function we find a typical "Hello, World!" program. We use `cli.log` to access the underlying [Logger Object](https://docs.python.org/3.5/library/logging.html#logger-objects), whose behavior is user controllable. We also access the value for name supplied by the user as `cli.config.hello.name`. The value for `cli.config.hello.name` will be determined by looking at the `--name` argument supplied by the user, if not provided it will use the value in the `qmk.ini` config file, and if neither of those is provided it will fall back to the default supplied in the `cli.argument()` decorator.
+Once inside our function we find a typical "Hello, World!" program. We use `cli.log` to access the underlying [Logger Object](https://docs.python.org/3.6/library/logging.html#logger-objects), whose behavior is user controllable. We also access the value for name supplied by the user as `cli.config.hello.name`. The value for `cli.config.hello.name` will be determined by looking at the `--name` argument supplied by the user, if not provided it will use the value in the `qmk.ini` config file, and if neither of those is provided it will fall back to the default supplied in the `cli.argument()` decorator.
 
 # User Interaction
 
@@ -44,13 +56,13 @@ There are two main methods for outputting text in a subcommand- `cli.log` and `c
 
 You can use special tokens to colorize your text, to make it easier to understand the output of your program. See [Colorizing Text](#colorizing-text) below.
 
-Both of these methods support built-in string formatting using python's [printf style string format operations](https://docs.python.org/3.5/library/stdtypes.html#old-string-formatting). You can use tokens such as `%s` and `%d` within your text strings then pass the values as arguments. See our Hello, World program above for an example.
+Both of these methods support built-in string formatting using python's [printf style string format operations](https://docs.python.org/3.6/library/stdtypes.html#old-string-formatting). You can use tokens such as `%s` and `%d` within your text strings then pass the values as arguments. See our Hello, World program above for an example.
 
 You should never use the format operator (`%`) directly, always pass values as arguments.
 
 ### Logging (`cli.log`)
 
-The `cli.log` object gives you access to a [Logger Object](https://docs.python.org/3.5/library/logging.html#logger-objects). We have configured our log output to show the user a nice emoji for each log level (or the log level name if their terminal does not support unicode.) This way the user can tell at a glance which messages are most important when something goes wrong.
+The `cli.log` object gives you access to a [Logger Object](https://docs.python.org/3.6/library/logging.html#logger-objects). We have configured our log output to show the user a nice emoji for each log level (or the log level name if their terminal does not support unicode.) This way the user can tell at a glance which messages are most important when something goes wrong.
 
 The default log level is `INFO`. If the user runs `qmk -v <subcommand>` the default log level will be set to `DEBUG`.
 
@@ -198,7 +210,7 @@ Our tests can be found in `lib/python/qmk/tests/`. You will find both unit and i
 
 If your PR does not include a comprehensive set of tests please add comments like this to your code so that other people know where they can help:
 
-    # TODO(unassigned/<yourGithubUsername>): Write <unit|integration> tests
+    # TODO(unassigned/<your_github_username>): Write <unit|integration> tests
 
 We use [nose2](https://nose2.readthedocs.io/en/latest/getting_started.html) to run our tests. You can refer to the nose2 documentation for more details on what you can do in your test functions.
 

docs/coding_conventions_c.md

@@ -20,11 +20,11 @@ Most of our style is pretty easy to pick up on, but right now it's not entirely
 * We accept both forms of preprocessor if's: `#ifdef DEFINED` and `#if defined(DEFINED)`
   * If you are not sure which to prefer use the `#if defined(DEFINED)` form.
   * Do not change existing code from one style to the other, except when moving to a multiple condition `#if`.
-  * Do not put whitespace between `#` and `if`.
-  * When deciding how (or if) to indent directives keep these points in mind:
-    * Readability is more important than consistency.
-    * Follow the file's existing style. If the file is mixed follow the style that makes sense for the section you are modifying.
-    * When choosing to indent you can follow the indention level of the surrounding C code, or preprocessor directives can have their own indent level. Choose the style that best communicates the intent of your code.
+* When deciding how (or if) to indent preprocessor directives, keep these points in mind:
+  * Readability is more important than consistency.
+  * Follow the file's existing style. If the file is mixed, follow the style that makes sense for the section you are modifying.
+  * When indenting, keep the hash at the start of the line and add whitespace between `#` and `if`, starting with 4 spaces after the `#`.
+  * You can follow the indention level of the surrounding C code, or preprocessor directives can have their own indentation levels. Choose the style that best communicates the intent of your code.
 
 Here is an example for easy reference:
 

docs/coding_conventions_python.md

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 
 Most of our style follows PEP8 with some local modifications to make things less nit-picky. 
 
-* We target Python 3.5 for compatability with all supported platforms.
+* We target Python 3.6 for compatability with all supported platforms.
 * We indent using four (4) spaces (soft tabs)
 * We encourage liberal use of comments
   * Think of them as a story describing the feature
@@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ At the time of this writing our tests are not very comprehensive. Looking at the
 
 ## Integration Tests
 
-Integration tests can be found in `lib/python/qmk/tests/test_cli_commands.py`. This is where CLI commands are actually run and their overall behavior is verified. We use [`subprocess`](https://docs.python.org/3.5/library/subprocess.html#module-subprocess) to launch each CLI command and a combination of checking output and returncode to determine if the right thing happened.
+Integration tests can be found in `lib/python/qmk/tests/test_cli_commands.py`. This is where CLI commands are actually run and their overall behavior is verified. We use [`subprocess`](https://docs.python.org/3.6/library/subprocess.html#module-subprocess) to launch each CLI command and a combination of checking output and returncode to determine if the right thing happened.
 
 ## Unit Tests
 

docs/compatible_microcontrollers.md

@@ -14,6 +14,7 @@ Certain MCUs which do not have native USB will use [V-USB](https://www.obdev.at/
 
 * [ATmega32A](https://www.microchip.com/wwwproducts/en/ATmega32A)
 * [ATmega328P](https://www.microchip.com/wwwproducts/en/ATmega328P)
+* [ATmega328](https://www.microchip.com/wwwproducts/en/ATmega328)
 
 ## ARM
 

docs/config_options.md

@@ -43,8 +43,6 @@ This is a C header file that is one of the first things included, and will persi
   * generally who/whatever brand produced the board
 * `#define PRODUCT Board`
   * the name of the keyboard
-* `#define DESCRIPTION a keyboard`
-  * a short description of what the keyboard is
 * `#define MATRIX_ROWS 5`
   * the number of rows in your keyboard's matrix
 * `#define MATRIX_COLS 15`
@@ -115,9 +113,9 @@ If you define these options you will disable the associated feature, which can s
 * `#define NO_ACTION_ONESHOT`
   * disable one-shot modifiers
 * `#define NO_ACTION_MACRO`
-  * disable old style macro handling: MACRO() & action_get_macro
+  * disable old-style macro handling using `MACRO()`, `action_get_macro()` _(deprecated)_
 * `#define NO_ACTION_FUNCTION`
-  * disable calling of action_function() from the fn_actions array (deprecated)
+  * disable old-style function handling using `fn_actions`, `action_function()` _(deprecated)_
 
 ## Features That Can Be Enabled
 
@@ -137,6 +135,8 @@ If you define these options you will enable the associated feature, which may in
 * `#define RETRO_TAPPING`
   * tap anyway, even after TAPPING_TERM, if there was no other key interruption between press and release
   * See [Retro Tapping](tap_hold.md#retro-tapping) for details
+* `#define RETRO_TAPPING_PER_KEY`
+  * enables handling for per key `RETRO_TAPPING` settings
 * `#define TAPPING_TOGGLE 2`
   * how many taps before triggering the toggle
 * `#define PERMISSIVE_HOLD`
@@ -191,7 +191,14 @@ If you define these options you will enable the associated feature, which may in
 * `#define RGBLIGHT_ANIMATIONS`
   * run RGB animations
 * `#define RGBLIGHT_LAYERS`
-  * Lets you define [lighting layers](feature_rgblight.md) that can be toggled on or off. Great for showing the current keyboard layer or caps lock state.
+  * Lets you define [lighting layers](feature_rgblight.md?id=lighting-layers) that can be toggled on or off. Great for showing the current keyboard layer or caps lock state.
+* `#define RGBLIGHT_MAX_LAYERS`
+  * Defaults to 8. Can be expanded up to 32 if more [lighting layers](feature_rgblight.md?id=lighting-layers) are needed.
+  * Note: Increasing the maximum will increase the firmware size and slow sync on split keyboards.
+* `#define RGBLIGHT_LAYER_BLINK` 
+  * Adds ability to [blink](feature_rgblight.md?id=lighting-layer-blink) a lighting layer for a specified number of milliseconds (e.g. to acknowledge an action).
+* `#define RGBLIGHT_LAYERS_OVERRIDE_RGB_OFF`
+  * If defined, then [lighting layers](feature_rgblight?id=overriding-rgb-lighting-onoff-status) will be shown even if RGB Light is off.
 * `#define RGBLED_NUM 12`
   * number of LEDs
 * `#define RGBLIGHT_SPLIT`
@@ -243,7 +250,10 @@ There are a few different ways to set handedness for split keyboards (listed in
 * `#define SPLIT_HAND_PIN B7`
   * For using high/low pin to determine handedness, low = right hand, high = left hand. Replace `B7` with the pin you are using. This is optional, and if you leave `SPLIT_HAND_PIN` undefined, then you can still use the EE_HANDS method or MASTER_LEFT / MASTER_RIGHT defines like the stock Let's Split uses.
 
-* `#define EE_HANDS` (only works if `SPLIT_HAND_PIN` is not defined)
+* `#define SPLIT_HAND_MATRIX_GRID <out_pin>,<in_pin>`
+  * The handedness is determined by using the intersection of the keyswitches in the key matrix, which does not exist. Normally, when this intersection is shorted (level low), it is considered left. If you define `#define SPLIT_HAND_MATRIX_GRID_LOW_IS_RIGHT`, it is determined to be right when the level is low.
+
+* `#define EE_HANDS` (only works if `SPLIT_HAND_PIN` and `SPLIT_HAND_MATRIX_GRID` are not defined)
   * Reads the handedness value stored in the EEPROM after `eeprom-lefthand.eep`/`eeprom-righthand.eep` has been flashed to their respective halves.
 
 * `#define MASTER_RIGHT`
@@ -316,11 +326,9 @@ This is a [make](https://www.gnu.org/software/make/manual/make.html) file that i
     ```
 * `LAYOUTS`
   * A list of [layouts](feature_layouts.md) this keyboard supports.
-* `LINK_TIME_OPTIMIZATION_ENABLE`
-  * Enables Link Time Optimization (`LTO`) when compiling the keyboard.  This makes the process take longer, but can significantly reduce the compiled size (and since the firmware is small, the added time is not noticeable).  However, this will automatically disable the old Macros and Functions features automatically, as these break when `LTO` is enabled.
-  It does this by automatically defining `NO_ACTION_MACRO` and `NO_ACTION_FUNCTION`
 * `LTO_ENABLE`
-  * It has the same meaning as LINK_TIME_OPTIMIZATION_ENABLE.  You can use `LTO_ENABLE` instead of `LINK_TIME_OPTIMIZATION_ENABLE`.
+  * Enables Link Time Optimization (LTO) when compiling the keyboard.  This makes the process take longer, but it can significantly reduce the compiled size (and since the firmware is small, the added time is not noticeable).
+However, this will automatically disable the legacy TMK Macros and Functions features, as these break when LTO is enabled.  It does this by automatically defining `NO_ACTION_MACRO` and `NO_ACTION_FUNCTION`.  (Note: This does not affect QMK [Macros](feature_macros.md) and [Layers](feature_layers.md).)
 
 ## AVR MCU Options
 * `MCU = atmega32u4`
@@ -365,10 +373,8 @@ Use these to enable or disable building certain features. The more you have enab
   * MIDI controls
 * `UNICODE_ENABLE`
   * Unicode
-* `BLUETOOTH_ENABLE`
-  * Legacy option to Enable Bluetooth with the Adafruit EZ-Key HID. See BLUETOOTH
 * `BLUETOOTH`
-  * Current options are AdafruitEzKey, AdafruitBLE, RN42
+  * Current options are AdafruitBLE, RN42
 * `SPLIT_KEYBOARD`
   * Enables split keyboard support (dual MCU like the let's split and bakingpy's boards) and includes all necessary files located at quantum/split_common
 * `CUSTOM_MATRIX`

docs/configurator_default_keymaps.md

@@ -0,0 +1,193 @@
+# Adding Default Keymaps to QMK Configurator :id=adding-default-keymaps
+
+This page covers how to add a default keymap for a keyboard to QMK Configurator.
+
+
+## Technical Information :id=technical-information
+
+QMK Configurator uses JSON as its native file format for keymaps. As much as possible, these should be kept such that they behave the same as running `make <keyboard>:default` from `qmk_firmware`.
+
+Keymaps in this directory require four key-value pairs:
+
+* `keyboard` (string)
+  * This is the name of the keyboard, the same as would be used when running a compile job through `make` (e.g. `make 1upkeyboards/1up60rgb:default`).
+* `keymap` (string)
+  * Should be set to `default`.
+* `layout` (string)
+  * This is the layout macro used by the default keymap.
+* `layers` (array)
+  * The keymap itself. This key should contain one array per layer, which themselves should contain the keycodes that make up that layer.
+
+Additionally, most keymaps contain a `commit` key. This key is not consumed by the API that back-stops QMK Configurator, but is used by Configurator's maintainers to tell which version of a keymap was used to create the JSON keymap in this repository. The value is the SHA of the last commit to modify a board's default `keymap.c` in the `qmk_firmware` repository. The SHA is found by checking out [the `master` branch of the `qmk/qmk_firmware` repository](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/tree/master/) and running `git log -1 --pretty=oneline -- keyboards/<keyboard>/keymaps/default/keymap.c` (use `keymap.json` if the keyboard in question has this file instead), which should return something similar to:
+
+```shell
+f14629ed1cd7c7ec9089604d64f29a99981558e8 Remove/migrate action_get_macro()s from default keymaps (#5625)
+```
+
+In this example, `f14629ed1cd7c7ec9089604d64f29a99981558e8` is the value that should be used for `commit`.
+
+
+## Example :id=example
+
+If one wished to add a default keymap for the H87a by Hineybush, one would run the `git log` command above against the H87a's default keymap in `qmk_firmware`:
+
+```shell
+user ~/qmk_firmware (master)
+$ git log -1 --pretty=oneline master -- keyboards/hineybush/h87a/keymaps/default/keymap.c
+ef8878fba5d3786e3f9c66436da63a560cd36ac9 Hineybush h87a lock indicators (#8237)
+```
+
+Now that we have the commit hash, we need the keymap (edited for readability):
+
+```c
+...
+#include QMK_KEYBOARD_H
+
+const uint16_t PROGMEM keymaps[][MATRIX_ROWS][MATRIX_COLS] = {
+
+  [0] = LAYOUT_all(
+    KC_ESC,           KC_F1,   KC_F2,   KC_F3,   KC_F4,   KC_F5,   KC_F6,   KC_F7,   KC_F8,   KC_F9,   KC_F10,  KC_F11,  KC_F12,              KC_PSCR, KC_SLCK, KC_PAUS,
+    KC_GRV,  KC_1,    KC_2,    KC_3,    KC_4,    KC_5,    KC_6,    KC_7,    KC_8,    KC_9,    KC_0,    KC_MINS, KC_EQL,  KC_BSPC, KC_BSPC,    KC_INS,  KC_HOME, KC_PGUP,
+    KC_TAB,  KC_Q,    KC_W,    KC_E,    KC_R,    KC_T,    KC_Y,    KC_U,    KC_I,    KC_O,    KC_P,    KC_LBRC, KC_RBRC, KC_BSLS,             KC_DEL,  KC_END,  KC_PGDN,
+    KC_CAPS, KC_A,    KC_S,    KC_D,    KC_F,    KC_G,    KC_H,    KC_J,    KC_K,    KC_L,    KC_SCLN, KC_QUOT, KC_NUHS, KC_ENT,
+    KC_LSFT, KC_NUBS, KC_Z,    KC_X,    KC_C,    KC_V,    KC_B,    KC_N,    KC_M,    KC_COMM, KC_DOT,  KC_SLSH, KC_RSFT, KC_TRNS,                      KC_UP,
+    KC_LCTL, KC_LGUI, KC_LALT,                            KC_SPC,                             KC_RALT, MO(1),   KC_RGUI, KC_RCTL,             KC_LEFT, KC_DOWN, KC_RGHT),
+
+  [1] = LAYOUT_all(
+    KC_TRNS,          KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, RGB_TOG, RGB_MOD, RGB_HUD, RGB_HUI, RGB_SAD, RGB_SAI, RGB_VAD, RGB_VAI,             BL_TOGG, BL_DEC,  BL_INC,
+    KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS,    KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_VOLU,
+    KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, RESET,   KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS,             KC_MPLY, KC_MNXT, KC_VOLD,
+    KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS,
+    KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS,                      KC_TRNS,
+    KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS,                            KC_TRNS,                            KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS,             KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS, KC_TRNS),
+
+};
+```
+
+The default keymap uses the `LAYOUT_all` macro, so that will be the value of the `layout` key. Compiled to a QMK Configurator JSON keymap, our resulting file should be:
+
+```json
+{
+  "keyboard": "hineybush/h87a",
+  "keymap": "default",
+  "commit": "ef8878fba5d3786e3f9c66436da63a560cd36ac9",
+  "layout": "LAYOUT_all",
+  "layers": [
+    [
+      "KC_ESC",             "KC_F1",   "KC_F2",   "KC_F3",   "KC_F4",   "KC_F5",   "KC_F6",   "KC_F7",   "KC_F8",   "KC_F9",   "KC_F10",  "KC_F11",  "KC_F12",                "KC_PSCR", "KC_SLCK", "KC_PAUS",
+      "KC_GRV",  "KC_1",    "KC_2",    "KC_3",    "KC_4",    "KC_5",    "KC_6",    "KC_7",    "KC_8",    "KC_9",    "KC_0",    "KC_MINS", "KC_EQL",  "KC_BSPC", "KC_BSPC",    "KC_INS",  "KC_HOME", "KC_PGUP",
+      "KC_TAB",  "KC_Q",    "KC_W",    "KC_E",    "KC_R",    "KC_T",    "KC_Y",    "KC_U",    "KC_I",    "KC_O",    "KC_P",    "KC_LBRC", "KC_RBRC", "KC_BSLS",               "KC_DEL",  "KC_END",  "KC_PGDN",
+      "KC_CAPS", "KC_A",    "KC_S",    "KC_D",    "KC_F",    "KC_G",    "KC_H",    "KC_J",    "KC_K",    "KC_L",    "KC_SCLN", "KC_QUOT", "KC_NUHS", "KC_ENT",
+      "KC_LSFT", "KC_NUBS", "KC_Z",    "KC_X",    "KC_C",    "KC_V",    "KC_B",    "KC_N",    "KC_M",    "KC_COMM", "KC_DOT",  "KC_SLSH", "KC_RSFT", "KC_TRNS",                          "KC_UP",
+      "KC_LCTL", "KC_LGUI", "KC_LALT",                                  "KC_SPC",                                   "KC_RALT", "MO(1)",   "KC_RGUI", "KC_RCTL",               "KC_LEFT", "KC_DOWN", "KC_RGHT"
+    ],
+    [
+      "KC_TRNS",            "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "RGB_TOG", "RGB_MOD", "RGB_HUD", "RGB_HUI", "RGB_SAD", "RGB_SAI", "RGB_VAD", "RGB_VAI",               "BL_TOGG", "BL_DEC",  "BL_INC",
+      "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS",    "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_VOLU",
+      "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "RESET",   "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS",               "KC_MPLY", "KC_MNXT", "KC_VOLD",
+      "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS",
+      "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS",                          "KC_TRNS",
+      "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS",                                  "KC_TRNS",                                  "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS",               "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS", "KC_TRNS"
+    ]
+  ]
+}
+```
+
+The white space in the `layers` arrays have no effect on the functionality of the keymap, but are used to make these files easier for humans to read.
+
+
+## Caveats :id=caveats
+
+### Layers can only be referenced by number :id=layer-references
+
+A common QMK convention is to name layers using a series of `#define`s, or an `enum` statement:
+
+```c
+enum layer_names {
+    _BASE,
+    _MEDIA,
+    _FN
+};
+```
+
+This works in C, but for Configurator, you *must* use the layer's numeric index – `MO(_FN)` would need to be `MO(2)` in the above example.
+
+### No support for custom code of any kind :id=custom-code
+
+Features that require adding functions to the keymap.c file, such as Tap Dance or Unicode, can not be compiled in Configurator **at all**. Even setting `TAP_DANCE_ENABLE = yes` in the `qmk_firmware` repository at the keyboard level will prevent Configurator from compiling **any** firmware for that keyboard. This is limited both by the API and the current spec of our JSON keymap format.
+
+### Limited Support for Custom keycodes :id=custom-keycodes
+
+There is a way to support custom keycodes: if the logic for a custom keycode is implemented at the keyboard level instead of the keymap level in qmk_firmware, that keycode *can* be used in Configurator and it *will* compile and work. Instead of using the following in your `keymap.c`:
+
+```c
+enum custom_keycodes {
+    MACRO_1 = SAFE_RANGE,
+    MACRO_2,
+    MACRO_3
+};
+...
+bool process_record_user(uint16_t keycode, keyrecord_t *record) {
+    switch(keycode) {
+        case MACRO_1:
+            if (record->event.pressed) {
+                SEND_STRING("This is macro #1.");
+            }
+            return false;
+        case MACRO_2:
+            if (record->event.pressed) {
+                SEND_STRING("This is macro #2.");
+            }
+            return false;
+        case MACRO_3:
+            if (record->event.pressed) {
+                SEND_STRING("This is macro #3.");
+            }
+            return false;
+    }
+    return true;
+};
+```
+
+... add the keycode `enum` block to your keyboard's header file (`<keyboard>.h`) as follows (note that the `enum` is named `keyboard_keycodes` here):
+
+```c
+enum keyboard_keycodes {
+    MACRO_1 = SAFE_RANGE,
+    MACRO_2,
+    MACRO_3,
+    NEW_SAFE_RANGE  // Important!
+};
+```
+
+... then the logic to your `<keyboard>.c` through `process_record_kb()`:
+
+```c
+bool process_record_kb(uint16_t keycode, keyrecord_t *record) {
+    switch(keycode) {
+        case MACRO_1:
+            if (record->event.pressed) {
+                SEND_STRING("This is macro #1.");
+            }
+            return false;
+        case MACRO_2:
+            if (record->event.pressed) {
+                SEND_STRING("This is macro #2.");
+            }
+            return false;
+        case MACRO_3:
+            if (record->event.pressed) {
+                SEND_STRING("This is macro #3.");
+            }
+            return false;
+    }
+    return process_record_user(keycode, record);
+};
+```
+
+Note the call to `process_record_user()` at the end. Additionally, users of the keyboard will need to use `NEW_SAFE_RANGE` instead of `SAFE_RANGE` if they wish to add their own custom keycodes at keymap level, beyond what is provided by the keyboard.
+
+
+## Additional Reading :id=additional-reading
+
+For QMK Configurator to support your keyboard, your keyboard must be present in the `master` branch of the `qmk_firmware` repository. For instructions on this, please see [Supporting Your Keyboard in QMK Configurator](reference_configurator_support.md).

docs/configurator_step_by_step.md

@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ I'll say that again because it's important:
 
 !> **MAKE SURE YOU SELECT THE RIGHT VERSION!**
 
-If your keyboard has been advertised to be powered by QMK but is not in the list, chances are a developer hasn't gotten to it yet or we haven't had a chance to merge it in yet. File an issue at [qmk_firmware](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/issues) requesting to support that particular keyboard, if there is no active [Pull Request](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pulls?q=is%3Aopen+is%3Apr+label%3Akeyboard) for it. There are also QMK powered keyboards that are in their manufacturer's own github accounts. Double check for that as well.  <!-- FIXME(skullydazed): This feels too wordy and I'm not sure we want to encourage these kinds of issues. Also, should we prompt them to bug the manufacutrer? -->
+If your keyboard has been advertised to be powered by QMK but is not in the list, chances are a developer hasn't gotten to it yet or we haven't had a chance to merge it in yet. File an issue at [qmk_firmware](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/issues) requesting to support that particular keyboard, if there is no active [Pull Request](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pulls?q=is%3Aopen+is%3Apr+label%3Akeyboard) for it. There are also QMK powered keyboards that are in their manufacturer's own GitHub accounts. Double check for that as well.  <!-- FIXME(skullydazed): This feels too wordy and I'm not sure we want to encourage these kinds of issues. Also, should we prompt them to bug the manufacutrer? -->
 
 ## Step 2: Select Your Keyboard Layout
 

docs/custom_quantum_functions.md

@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ bool process_record_user(uint16_t keycode, keyrecord_t *record) {
     case KC_ENTER:
       // Play a tone when enter is pressed
       if (record->event.pressed) {
-        PLAY_NOTE_ARRAY(tone_qwerty);
+        PLAY_SONG(tone_qwerty);
       }
       return true; // Let QMK send the enter press/release events
     default:
@@ -88,108 +88,6 @@ keyrecord_t record {
 }
 ```
 
-# LED Control
-
-QMK provides methods to read 5 of the LEDs defined in the HID spec:
-
-* Num Lock
-* Caps Lock
-* Scroll Lock
-* Compose
-* Kana
-
-There are two ways to get the lock LED state:
-
-* by implementing `bool led_update_kb(led_t led_state)` or `_user(led_t led_state)`; or
-* by calling `led_t host_keyboard_led_state()`
-
-!> `host_keyboard_led_state()` may already reflect a new value before `led_update_user()` is called.
-
-Two more deprecated functions exist that provide the LED state as a `uint8_t`:
-
-* `uint8_t led_set_kb(uint8_t usb_led)` and `_user(uint8_t usb_led)`
-* `uint8_t host_keyboard_leds()`
-
-## `led_update_user()`
-
-This function will be called when the state of one of those 5 LEDs changes. It receives the LED state as a struct parameter.
-
-By convention, return `true` from `led_update_user()` to get the `led_update_kb()` hook to run its code, and
-return `false` when you would prefer not to run the code in `led_update_kb()`.
-
-Some examples include:
-
-  - overriding the LEDs to use them for something else like layer indication
-    - return `false` because you do not want the `_kb()` function to run, as it would override your layer behavior.
-  - play a sound when an LED turns on or off.
-    - return `true` because you want the `_kb` function to run, and this is in addition to the default LED behavior.
-
-?> Because the `led_set_*` functions return `void` instead of `bool`, they do not allow for overriding the keyboard LED control, and thus it's recommended to use `led_update_*` instead.
-
-### Example `led_update_kb()` Implementation
-
-```c
-bool led_update_kb(led_t led_state) {
-    bool res = led_update_user(led_state);
-    if(res) {
-        // writePin sets the pin high for 1 and low for 0.
-        // In this example the pins are inverted, setting
-        // it low/0 turns it on, and high/1 turns the LED off.
-        // This behavior depends on whether the LED is between the pin
-        // and VCC or the pin and GND.
-        writePin(B0, !led_state.num_lock);
-        writePin(B1, !led_state.caps_lock);
-        writePin(B2, !led_state.scroll_lock);
-        writePin(B3, !led_state.compose);
-        writePin(B4, !led_state.kana);
-    }
-    return res;
-}
-```
-
-### Example `led_update_user()` Implementation
-
-This incomplete example would play a sound if Caps Lock is turned on or off. It returns `true`, because you also want the LEDs to maintain their state.
-
-```c
-#ifdef AUDIO_ENABLE
-  float caps_on[][2] = SONG(CAPS_LOCK_ON_SOUND);
-  float caps_off[][2] = SONG(CAPS_LOCK_OFF_SOUND);
-#endif
-
-bool led_update_user(led_t led_state) {
-    #ifdef AUDIO_ENABLE
-    static uint8_t caps_state = 0;
-    if (caps_state != led_state.caps_lock) {
-        led_state.caps_lock ? PLAY_SONG(caps_on) : PLAY_SONG(caps_off);
-        caps_state = led_state.caps_lock;
-    }
-    #endif
-    return true;
-}
-```
-
-### `led_update_*` Function Documentation
-
-* Keyboard/Revision: `bool led_update_kb(led_t led_state)`
-* Keymap: `bool led_update_user(led_t led_state)`
-
-## `host_keyboard_led_state()`
-
-Call this function to get the last received LED state as a `led_t`. This is useful for reading the LED state outside `led_update_*`, e.g. in [`matrix_scan_user()`](#matrix-scanning-code).
-
-## Setting Physical LED State
-
-Some keyboard implementations provide convenience methods for setting the state of the physical LEDs.
-
-### Ergodox Boards
-
-The Ergodox implementations provide `ergodox_right_led_1`/`2`/`3_on`/`off()` to turn individual LEDs on or off, as well as `ergodox_right_led_on`/`off(uint8_t led)` to turn them on or off by their index.
-
-In addition, it is possible to specify the brightness level of all LEDs with `ergodox_led_all_set(uint8_t n)`; of individual LEDs with `ergodox_right_led_1`/`2`/`3_set(uint8_t n)`; or by index with `ergodox_right_led_set(uint8_t led, uint8_t n)`.
-
-Ergodox boards also define `LED_BRIGHTNESS_LO` for the lowest brightness and `LED_BRIGHTNESS_HI` for the highest brightness (which is the default).
-
 # Keyboard Initialization Code
 
 There are several steps in the keyboard initialization process.  Depending on what you want to do, it will influence which function you should use.
@@ -287,6 +185,14 @@ This function gets called at every matrix scan, which is basically as often as t
 
 You should use this function if you need custom matrix scanning code. It can also be used for custom status output (such as LEDs or a display) or other functionality that you want to trigger regularly even when the user isn't typing.
 
+# Keyboard housekeeping
+
+* Keyboard/Revision: `void housekeeping_task_kb(void)`
+* Keymap: `void housekeeping_task_user(void)`
+
+This function gets called at the end of all QMK processing, before starting the next iteration. You can safely assume that QMK has dealt with the last matrix scan at the time that these functions are invoked -- layer states have been updated, USB reports have been sent, LEDs have been updated, and displays have been drawn.
+
+Similar to `matrix_scan_*`, these are called as often as the MCU can handle. To keep your board responsive, it's suggested to do as little as possible during these function calls, potentially throtting their behaviour if you do indeed require implementing something special.
 
 # Keyboard Idling/Wake Code
 
@@ -319,7 +225,7 @@ This runs code every time that the layers get changed.  This can be useful for l
 
 ### Example `layer_state_set_*` Implementation
 
-This example shows how to set the [RGB Underglow](feature_rgblight.md) lights based on the layer, using the Planck as an example
+This example shows how to set the [RGB Underglow](feature_rgblight.md) lights based on the layer, using the Planck as an example.
 
 ```c
 layer_state_t layer_state_set_user(layer_state_t state) {
@@ -343,6 +249,11 @@ layer_state_t layer_state_set_user(layer_state_t state) {
   return state;
 }
 ```
+
+Use the `IS_LAYER_ON_STATE(state, layer)` and `IS_LAYER_OFF_STATE(state, layer)` macros to check the status of a particular layer.
+
+Outside of `layer_state_set_*` functions, you can use the `IS_LAYER_ON(layer)` and `IS_LAYER_OFF(layer)` macros to check global layer state.
+
 ### `layer_state_set_*` Function Documentation
 
 * Keyboard/Revision: `layer_state_t layer_state_set_kb(layer_state_t state)`
@@ -438,7 +349,7 @@ bool process_record_user(uint16_t keycode, keyrecord_t *record) {
     case KC_ENTER:
         // Play a tone when enter is pressed
         if (record->event.pressed) {
-            PLAY_NOTE_ARRAY(tone_qwerty);
+            PLAY_SONG(tone_qwerty);
         }
         return true; // Let QMK send the enter press/release events
     case RGB_LYR:  // This allows me to use underglow as layer indication, or as normal
@@ -449,7 +360,7 @@ bool process_record_user(uint16_t keycode, keyrecord_t *record) {
                 layer_state_set(layer_state);   // then immediately update the layer color
             }
         }
-        return false; break;
+        return false;
     case RGB_MODE_FORWARD ... RGB_MODE_GRADIENT: // For any of the RGB codes (see quantum_keycodes.h, L400 for reference)
         if (record->event.pressed) { //This disables layer indication, as it's assumed that if you're changing this ... you want that disabled
             if (user_config.rgb_layer_change) {        // only if this is enabled
@@ -486,56 +397,3 @@ And you're done.  The RGB layer indication will only work if you want it to. And
 * Keymap: `void eeconfig_init_user(void)`, `uint32_t eeconfig_read_user(void)` and `void eeconfig_update_user(uint32_t val)`
 
 The `val` is the value of the data that you want to write to EEPROM.  And the `eeconfig_read_*` function return a 32 bit (DWORD) value from the EEPROM. 
-
-# Custom Tapping Term
-
-By default, the tapping term and related options (such as `IGNORE_MOD_TAP_INTERRUPT`) are defined globally, and are not configurable by key.  For most users, this is perfectly fine.  But in some cases, dual function keys would be greatly improved by different timeout behaviors than `LT` keys, or because some keys may be easier to hold than others.  Instead of using custom key codes for each, this allows for per key configurable timeout behaviors.
-
-There are two configurable options to control per-key timeout behaviors:
-
-- `TAPPING_TERM_PER_KEY`
-- `IGNORE_MOD_TAP_INTERRUPT_PER_KEY`
-
-You need to add `#define` lines to your `config.h` for each feature you want.
-
-```
-#define TAPPING_TERM_PER_KEY
-#define IGNORE_MOD_TAP_INTERRUPT_PER_KEY
-```
-
-
-## Example `get_tapping_term` Implementation
-
-To change the `TAPPING_TERM` based on the keycode, you'd want to add something like the following to your `keymap.c` file:
-
-```c
-uint16_t get_tapping_term(uint16_t keycode) {
-  switch (keycode) {
-    case SFT_T(KC_SPC):
-      return TAPPING_TERM + 1250;
-    case LT(1, KC_GRV):
-      return 130;
-    default:
-      return TAPPING_TERM;
-  }
-}
-```
-
-## Example `get_ignore_mod_tap_interrupt` Implementation
-
-To change the `IGNORE_MOD_TAP_INTERRUPT` value based on the keycode, you'd want to add something like the following to your `keymap.c` file:
-
-```c
-bool get_ignore_mod_tap_interrupt(uint16_t keycode) {
-  switch (keycode) {
-    case SFT_T(KC_SPC):
-      return true;
-    default:
-      return false;
-  }
-}
-```
-
-## `get_tapping_term` / `get_ignore_mod_tap_interrupt` Function Documentation
-
-Unlike many of the other functions here, there isn't a need (or even reason) to have a quantum or keyboard level function. Only user level functions are useful here, so no need to mark them as such.

docs/de/README.md

@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ QMK (*Quantum Mechanical Keyboard*) ist eine Open-Source-Community, welche die Q
 
 ## Bezugsquelle für QMK
 
-Wenn Du vorhast, deine Tastatur, Tastaturbelegung oder Features zu QMK beizusteuern, geht das am einfachsten, indem Du das [Repository auf Github](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware#fork-destination-box) forkst, die Änderungen in deinem lokalen Repo vornimmst und anschließend einen [Pull Request](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pulls) einreichst.
+Wenn Du vorhast, deine Tastatur, Tastaturbelegung oder Features zu QMK beizusteuern, geht das am einfachsten, indem Du das [Repository auf GitHub](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware#fork-destination-box) forkst, die Änderungen in deinem lokalen Repo vornimmst und anschließend einen [Pull Request](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pulls) einreichst.
 
 Ansonsten kannst Du es als [zip](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/zipball/master) oder [tar](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/tarball/master) herunterladen, oder es direkt via git klonen (`git clone git@github.com:qmk/qmk_firmware.git` bzw. `git clone https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware.git`).
 

docs/de/_summary.md

@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
   * [QMK CLI](de/cli.md)
   * [QMK CLI Konfiguration](de/cli_configuration.md)
   * [Zu QMK beitragen](de/contributing.md)
-  * [Anleitung für Github](de/getting_started_github.md)
+  * [Anleitung für GitHub](de/getting_started_github.md)
   * [Nach Hilfe fragen](de/getting_started_getting_help.md)
 
 * [Breaking Changes](de/breaking_changes.md)
@@ -98,6 +98,7 @@
   * [ISP Flashing Guide](de/isp_flashing_guide.md)
   * [ARM Debugging Guide](de/arm_debugging.md)
   * [I2C Driver](de/i2c_driver.md)
+  * [SPI Driver](de/spi_driver.md)
   * [GPIO Controls](de/internals_gpio_control.md)
   * [Proton C Conversion](de/proton_c_conversion.md)
 

docs/de/newbs_learn_more_resources.md

@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ Git Ressourcen:
 
 * [Gutes allgemeines Tutorial](https://www.codecademy.com/learn/learn-git) (auf Englisch)
 * [Git spielerisch anhand von Beispielen lernen](https://learngitbranching.js.org/) (auf Englisch)
-* [Mehr über den allgemeinen Umgang mit Github](getting_started_github.md)
+* [Mehr über den allgemeinen Umgang mit GitHub](getting_started_github.md)
 * [Mehr über Git im Bezug zu QMK](contributing.md)
 
 Mehr über die Arbeit mit der Befehlszeile:

docs/documentation_best_practices.md

@@ -61,4 +61,4 @@ This page describes my cool feature. You can use my cool feature to make coffee
 |KC_SUGAR||Order Sugar|
 ```
 
-Place your documentation into `docs/feature_<my_cool_feature>.md`, and add that file to the appropriate place in `docs/_sidebar.md`. If you have added any keycodes be sure to add them to `docs/keycodes.md` with a link back to your feature page.
+Place your documentation into `docs/feature_<my_cool_feature>.md`, and add that file to the appropriate place in `docs/_summary.md`. If you have added any keycodes be sure to add them to `docs/keycodes.md` with a link back to your feature page.

docs/driver_installation_zadig.md

@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ QMK presents itself to the host as a regular HID keyboard device, and as such re
 
 There are two notable exceptions: the Caterina bootloader, usually seen on Pro Micros, and the HalfKay bootloader shipped with PJRC Teensys, appear as a serial port and a generic HID device respectively, and so do not require a driver.
 
-We recommend the use of the [Zadig](https://zadig.akeo.ie/) utility. If you have set up the development environment with MSYS2 or WSL, the `qmk_install.sh` script will have asked if you want it to install the drivers for you.
+We recommend the use of the [Zadig](https://zadig.akeo.ie/) utility. If you have set up the development environment with MSYS2, the `qmk_install.sh` script will have already installed the drivers for you.
 
 ## Installation
 
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ Zadig will automatically detect the bootloader device. You may sometimes need to
 
 !> If Zadig lists one or more devices with the `HidUsb` driver, your keyboard is probably not in bootloader mode. The arrow will be colored orange and you will be asked to confirm modifying a system driver. **Do not** proceed if this is the case!
 
-If the arrow appears green, select the driver, and click **Install Driver**. The `libusb-win32` driver will usually work for AVR, and `WinUSB` for ARM, but if you still cannot flash the board, try installing a different driver from the list. For flashing a USBaspLoader device via command line with msys2, the `libusbk` driver is recommended, otherwise `libusb-win32` will work fine if you are using QMK Toolbox for flashing.
+If the arrow appears green, select the driver, and click **Install Driver**. The `libusb-win32` driver will usually work for AVR, and `WinUSB` for ARM, but if you still cannot flash the board, try installing a different driver from the list. USBAspLoader devices must use the `libusbK` driver.
 
 ![Zadig with a bootloader driver correctly installed](https://i.imgur.com/b8VgXzx.png)
 

docs/eeprom_driver.md

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-# EEPROM Driver Configuration
+# EEPROM Driver Configuration :id=eeprom-driver-configuration
 
 The EEPROM driver can be swapped out depending on the needs of the keyboard, or whether extra hardware is present.
 
@@ -6,15 +6,20 @@ Driver                             | Description
 -----------------------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 `EEPROM_DRIVER = vendor` (default) | Uses the on-chip driver provided by the chip manufacturer. For AVR, this is provided by avr-libc. This is supported on ARM for a subset of chips -- STM32F3xx, STM32F1xx, and STM32F072xB will be emulated by writing to flash. STM32L0xx and STM32L1xx will use the onboard dedicated true EEPROM. Other chips will generally act as "transient" below.
 `EEPROM_DRIVER = i2c`              | Supports writing to I2C-based 24xx EEPROM chips. See the driver section below.
+`EEPROM_DRIVER = spi`              | Supports writing to SPI-based 25xx EEPROM chips. See the driver section below.
 `EEPROM_DRIVER = transient`        | Fake EEPROM driver -- supports reading/writing to RAM, and will be discarded when power is lost.
 
-## Vendor Driver Configuration
+## Vendor Driver Configuration :id=vendor-eeprom-driver-configuration
+
+#### STM32 L0/L1 Configuration :id=stm32l0l1-eeprom-driver-configuration
 
 !> Resetting EEPROM using an STM32L0/L1 device takes up to 1 second for every 1kB of internal EEPROM used.
 
-No configurable options are available.
+`config.h` override                 | Description                                                                                                              | Default Value
+------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+`#define STM32_ONBOARD_EEPROM_SIZE` | The size of the EEPROM to use, in bytes. Erase times can be high, so it's configurable here, if not using the default value. | Minimum required to cover base _eeconfig_ data, or `1024` if VIA is enabled.
 
-## I2C Driver Configuration
+## I2C Driver Configuration :id=i2c-eeprom-driver-configuration
 
 Currently QMK supports 24xx-series chips over I2C. As such, requires a working i2c_master driver configuration. You can override the driver configuration via your config.h:
 
@@ -41,7 +46,21 @@ MB85RC256V FRAM  | `#define EEPROM_I2C_MB85RC256V` | <https://www.adafruit.com/p
 
 ?> If you find that the EEPROM is not cooperating, ensure you've correctly shifted up your EEPROM address by 1. For example, the datasheet might state the address as `0b01010000` -- the correct value of `EXTERNAL_EEPROM_I2C_BASE_ADDRESS` needs to be `0b10100000`.
 
-## Transient Driver configuration
+## SPI Driver Configuration :id=spi-eeprom-driver-configuration
+
+Currently QMK supports 25xx-series chips over SPI. As such, requires a working spi_master driver configuration. You can override the driver configuration via your config.h:
+
+`config.h` override                            | Description                                                                          | Default Value
+-----------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|--------------
+`#define EXTERNAL_EEPROM_SPI_SLAVE_SELECT_PIN` | SPI Slave select pin in order to inform that the EEPROM is currently being addressed | _none_
+`#define EXTERNAL_EEPROM_SPI_CLOCK_DIVISOR`    | Clock divisor used to divide the peripheral clock to derive the SPI frequency        | `64`
+`#define EXTERNAL_EEPROM_BYTE_COUNT`           | Total size of the EEPROM in bytes                                                    | 8192
+`#define EXTERNAL_EEPROM_PAGE_SIZE`            | Page size of the EEPROM in bytes, as specified in the datasheet                      | 32
+`#define EXTERNAL_EEPROM_ADDRESS_SIZE`         | The number of bytes to transmit for the memory location within the EEPROM            | 2
+
+!> There's no way to determine if there is an SPI EEPROM actually responding. Generally, this will result in reads of nothing but zero.
+
+## Transient Driver configuration :id=transient-eeprom-driver-configuration
 
 The only configurable item for the transient EEPROM driver is its size:
 

docs/es/README.md

@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ QMK (*Quantum Mechanical Keyboard*) es una comunidad open source que mantiene el
 
 ## Cómo conseguirlo
 
-Si estás pensando en contribuir con un keymap, teclado, or característica a QMK, la manera más sencilla es hacer un [fork del repositorio en Github](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware#fork-destination-box), y clonar tu repositorio localmente para hacer los cambios, subirlos, y abir un [Pull Request](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pulls) desde tu fork.
+Si estás pensando en contribuir con un keymap, teclado, or característica a QMK, la manera más sencilla es hacer un [fork del repositorio en GitHub](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware#fork-destination-box), y clonar tu repositorio localmente para hacer los cambios, subirlos, y abir un [Pull Request](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pulls) desde tu fork.
 
 De cualquier manera, también puedes descargarlo directamente en formatos ([zip](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/zipball/master), [tar](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/tarball/master)), o clonarlo via git (`git@github.com:qmk/qmk_firmware.git`), o https (`https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware.git`).
 

docs/es/_summary.md

@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
   * [QMK CLI](es/cli.md)
   * [Configuración de QMK CLI](es/cli_configuration.md)
   * [Contribuyendo a QMK](es/contributing.md)
-  * [Cómo usar Github](es/getting_started_github.md)
+  * [Cómo usar GitHub](es/getting_started_github.md)
   * [Obtener ayuda](es/getting_started_getting_help.md)
 
 * [Cambios incompatibles](es/breaking_changes.md)
@@ -98,6 +98,7 @@
   * [Guía de flasheado de ISP](es/isp_flashing_guide.md)
   * [Guía de depuración de ARM](es/arm_debugging.md)
   * [Driver I2C](es/i2c_driver.md)
+  * [Driver SPI](es/spi_driver.md)
   * [Controles GPIO](es/internals_gpio_control.md)
   * [Conversión Proton C](es/proton_c_conversion.md)
 

docs/es/hardware_avr.md

@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ El archivo `config.h` es donde configuras el hardware y el conjunto de caracter
 
 En la parte superior de `config.h` encontrarás ajustes relacionados con USB. Estos controlan la apariencia de tu teclado en el Sistema Operativo. Si no tienes una buena razón para cambiar debes dejar el `VENDOR_ID` como `0xFEED`. Para el `PRODUCT_ID` debes seleccionar un número que todavía no esté en uso.
 
-Cambia las líneas de `MANUFACTURER`, `PRODUCT`, y `DESCRIPTION` para reflejar con precisión tu teclado.
+Cambia las líneas de `MANUFACTURER` y `PRODUCT` para reflejar con precisión tu teclado.
 
 ```c
 #define VENDOR_ID       0xFEED
@@ -75,7 +75,6 @@ Cambia las líneas de `MANUFACTURER`, `PRODUCT`, y `DESCRIPTION` para reflejar c
 #define DEVICE_VER      0x0001
 #define MANUFACTURER    Tú
 #define PRODUCT         mi_teclado_fantastico
-#define DESCRIPTION     Un teclado personalizado
 ```
 
 ?> Windows y macOS mostrarán el `MANUFACTURER` y `PRODUCT` en la lista de dispositivos USB. `lsusb` en Linux toma estos de la lista mantenida por el [Repositorio de ID USB](http://www.linux-usb.org/usb-ids.html) por defecto. `lsusb -v` mostrará los valores reportados por el dispositivo, y también están presentes en los registros del núcleo después de conectarlo.

docs/es/newbs_best_practices.md

@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ Este documento procura instruir a los novatos en las mejores prácticas para ten
 
 En este documento suponemos un par de cosas:
 
-1. Tienes una cuenta de Github, y has hecho un [fork del repo qmk_firmware](getting_started_github.md) en tu cuenta.
+1. Tienes una cuenta de GitHub, y has hecho un [fork del repo qmk_firmware](getting_started_github.md) en tu cuenta.
 2. Has [configurado tu entorno de desarrollo](newbs_getting_started.md?id=environment-setup).
 
 

docs/es/newbs_building_firmware_configurator.md

@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ Lo diré otra vez porque es importante
 
 !> **ASEGÚRATE DE QUE SELECCIONAS LA VERSIÓN CORRECTA!**
 
-Si se ha anunciado que tu teclado funciona con QMK pero no está en la lista, es probable que un desarrollador no se haya encargado de él aún o que todavía no hemos tenido la oportunidad de incluirlo. Abre un issue en [qmk_firmware](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/issues) solicitando soportar ese teclado un particular, si no hay un [Pull Request](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pulls?q=is%3Aopen+is%3Apr+label%3Akeyboard) activo para ello. Hay también teclados que funcionan con QMK que están en las cuentas de github de sus manufacturantes. Acuérdate de comprobar esto también. 
+Si se ha anunciado que tu teclado funciona con QMK pero no está en la lista, es probable que un desarrollador no se haya encargado de él aún o que todavía no hemos tenido la oportunidad de incluirlo. Abre un issue en [qmk_firmware](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/issues) solicitando soportar ese teclado un particular, si no hay un [Pull Request](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pulls?q=is%3Aopen+is%3Apr+label%3Akeyboard) activo para ello. Hay también teclados que funcionan con QMK que están en las cuentas de GitHub de sus manufacturantes. Acuérdate de comprobar esto también.
 
 ## Eligiendo el layout de tu teclado
 

docs/es/newbs_learn_more_resources.md

@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ Recursos de Git:
 
 * [Excelente tutorial general](https://www.codecademy.com/learn/learn-git)
 * [Juego de Git para aprender usando ejemplos](https://learngitbranching.js.org/)
-* [Recursos de Git para aprender más sobre Github](getting_started_github.md)
+* [Recursos de Git para aprender más sobre GitHub](getting_started_github.md)
 * [Recursos de Git dirigidos específicamente a QMK](contributing.md)
 
 

docs/faq_build.md

@@ -13,68 +13,29 @@ An example of using `sudo`, when your controller is ATMega32u4:
 
 or just:
 
-    $ sudo make <keyboard>:<keymap>:dfu
+    $ sudo make <keyboard>:<keymap>:flash
 
 Note that running `make` with `sudo` is generally ***not*** a good idea, and you should use one of the former methods, if possible.
 
 ### Linux `udev` Rules
-On Linux, you'll need proper privileges to access the MCU. You can either use
-`sudo` when flashing firmware, or place these files in `/etc/udev/rules.d/`. Once added run the following:
-```console
+
+On Linux, you'll need proper privileges to communicate with the bootloader device. You can either use `sudo` when flashing firmware (not recommended), or place [this file](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/tree/master/util/udev/50-qmk.rules) into `/etc/udev/rules.d/`.
+
+Once added, run the following:
+
+```
 sudo udevadm control --reload-rules
 sudo udevadm trigger
 ```
 
-**/etc/udev/rules.d/50-atmel-dfu.rules:**
-```
-# Atmel ATMega32U4
-SUBSYSTEMS=="usb", ATTRS{idVendor}=="03eb", ATTRS{idProduct}=="2ff4", MODE:="0666"
-# Atmel USBKEY AT90USB1287
-SUBSYSTEMS=="usb", ATTRS{idVendor}=="03eb", ATTRS{idProduct}=="2ffb", MODE:="0666"
-# Atmel ATMega32U2
-SUBSYSTEMS=="usb", ATTRS{idVendor}=="03eb", ATTRS{idProduct}=="2ff0", MODE:="0666"
-```
-
-**/etc/udev/rules.d/52-tmk-keyboard.rules:**
-```
-# tmk keyboard products     https://github.com/tmk/tmk_keyboard
-SUBSYSTEMS=="usb", ATTRS{idVendor}=="feed", MODE:="0666"
-```
-**/etc/udev/rules.d/54-input-club-keyboard.rules:**
+**Note:** With older versions of ModemManager (< 1.12), filtering only works when not in strict mode. The following commands can update that setting:
 
 ```
-# Input Club keyboard bootloader
-SUBSYSTEMS=="usb", ATTRS{idVendor}=="1c11", MODE:="0666"
-```
-
-**/etc/udev/rules.d/55-caterina.rules:**
-```
-# ModemManager should ignore the following devices
-ATTRS{idVendor}=="2a03", ENV{ID_MM_DEVICE_IGNORE}="1"
-ATTRS{idVendor}=="2341", ENV{ID_MM_DEVICE_IGNORE}="1"
-```
-
-**Note:** ModemManager filtering only works when not in strict mode, the following commands can update that settings:
-```console
-sudo sed -i 's/--filter-policy=strict/--filter-policy=default/' /lib/systemd/system/ModemManager.service
+printf '[Service]\nExecStart=\nExecStart=/usr/sbin/ModemManager --filter-policy=default' | sudo tee /etc/systemd/system/ModemManager.service.d/policy.conf
 sudo systemctl daemon-reload
 sudo systemctl restart ModemManager
 ```
 
-**/etc/udev/rules.d/56-dfu-util.rules:**
-```
-# stm32duino
-SUBSYSTEMS=="usb", ATTRS{idVendor}=="1eaf", ATTRS{idProduct}=="0003", MODE:="0666"
-# Generic stm32
-SUBSYSTEMS=="usb", ATTRS{idVendor}=="0483", ATTRS{idProduct}=="df11", MODE:="0666"
-```
-
-**/etc/udev/rules.d/57-bootloadhid.rules:**
-```
-# bootloadHID
-SUBSYSTEMS=="usb", ATTRS{idVendor}=="16c0", ATTRS{idProduct}=="05df", MODE:="0666"
-```
-
 ### Serial device is not detected in bootloader mode on Linux
 Make sure your kernel has appropriate support for your device. If your device uses USB ACM, such as
 Pro Micro (Atmega32u4), make sure to include `CONFIG_USB_ACM=y`. Other devices may require `USB_SERIAL` and any of its sub options.
@@ -99,56 +60,6 @@ You can buy a really unique VID:PID here. I don't think you need this for person
 - http://www.obdev.at/products/vusb/license.html
 - http://www.mcselec.com/index.php?page=shop.product_details&flypage=shop.flypage&product_id=92&option=com_phpshop&Itemid=1
 
-## BOOTLOADER_SIZE for AVR
-Note that Teensy2.0++ bootloader size is 2048byte. Some Makefiles may have wrong comment.
-
-```
-# Boot Section Size in *bytes*
-#   Teensy halfKay   512
-#   Teensy++ halfKay 2048
-#   Atmel DFU loader 4096       (TMK Alt Controller)
-#   LUFA bootloader  4096
-#   USBaspLoader     2048
-OPT_DEFS += -DBOOTLOADER_SIZE=2048
-```
-
-## `avr-gcc: internal compiler error: Abort trap: 6 (program cc1)` on MacOS
-This is an issue with updating on brew, causing symlinks that avr-gcc depend on getting mangled.
-
-The solution is to remove and reinstall all affected modules.
-
-```
-brew rm avr-gcc
-brew rm avr-gcc@8
-brew rm dfu-programmer
-brew rm dfu-util
-brew rm gcc-arm-none-eabi
-brew rm arm-gcc-bin@8
-brew rm avrdude
-brew install avr-gcc@8
-brew install dfu-programmer
-brew install dfu-util
-brew install arm-gcc-bin@8
-brew install avrdude
-brew link --force avr-gcc@8
-brew link --force arm-gcc-bin@8
-
-```
-
-### `avr-gcc` and LUFA
-
-If you updated your `avr-gcc` and you see errors involving LUFA, for example:
-
-`lib/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/AudioClassDevice.h:380:5: error: 'const' attribute on function returning 'void'`
-
-For now, you need to rollback `avr-gcc` to 8 in Homebrew.
-
-```
-brew uninstall --force avr-gcc
-brew install avr-gcc@8
-brew link --force avr-gcc@8
-```
-
 ### I just flashed my keyboard and it does nothing/keypresses don't register - it's also ARM (rev6 planck, clueboard 60, hs60v2, etc...) (Feb 2019)
 Due to how EEPROM works on ARM based chips, saved settings may no longer be valid.  This affects the default layers, and *may*, under certain circumstances we are still figuring out, make the keyboard unusable.  Resetting the EEPROM will correct this.
 

docs/faq_debug.md

@@ -31,20 +31,6 @@ Check:
 - try using 'print' function instead of debug print. See **common/print.h**.
 - disconnect other devices with console function. See [Issue #97](https://github.com/tmk/tmk_keyboard/issues/97).
 
-## Linux or UNIX Like System Requires Super User Privilege
-Just use 'sudo' to execute *hid_listen* with privilege.
-```
-$ sudo hid_listen
-```
-
-Or add an *udev rule* for TMK devices with placing a file in rules directory. The directory may vary on each system.
-
-File: /etc/udev/rules.d/52-tmk-keyboard.rules(in case of Ubuntu)
-```
-# tmk keyboard products     https://github.com/tmk/tmk_keyboard
-SUBSYSTEMS=="usb", ATTRS{idVendor}=="feed", MODE:="0666"
-```
-
 ***
 
 # Miscellaneous
@@ -160,10 +146,3 @@ As of now root of its cause is not clear but some build options seem to be relat
 
 https://github.com/tmk/tmk_keyboard/issues/266
 https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=41989.msg1967778#msg1967778
-
-
-
-## FLIP Doesn't Work
-### `AtLibUsbDfu.dll` Not Found
-Remove current driver and reinstall one FLIP provides from DeviceManager.
-http://imgur.com/a/bnwzy

docs/feature_advanced_keycodes.md

@@ -2,23 +2,26 @@
 
 These allow you to combine a modifier with a keycode. When pressed, the keydown event for the modifier, then `kc` will be sent. On release, the keyup event for `kc`, then the modifier will be sent.
 
-|Key       |Aliases                        |Description                                         |
-|----------|-------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------|
-|`LCTL(kc)`|`C(kc)`                        |Hold Left Control and press `kc`                    |
-|`LSFT(kc)`|`S(kc)`                        |Hold Left Shift and press `kc`                      |
-|`LALT(kc)`|`A(kc)`                        |Hold Left Alt and press `kc`                        |
-|`LGUI(kc)`|`G(kc)`, `LCMD(kc)`, `LWIN(kc)`|Hold Left GUI and press `kc`                        |
-|`RCTL(kc)`|                               |Hold Right Control and press `kc`                   |
-|`RSFT(kc)`|                               |Hold Right Shift and press `kc`                     |
-|`RALT(kc)`|`ALGR(kc)`                     |Hold Right Alt and press `kc`                       |
-|`RGUI(kc)`|`RCMD(kc)`, `LWIN(kc)`         |Hold Right GUI and press `kc`                       |
-|`SGUI(kc)`|`SCMD(kc)`, `SWIN(kc)`         |Hold Left Shift and GUI and press `kc`              |
-|`LCA(kc)` |                               |Hold Left Control and Alt and press `kc`            |
-|`LCAG(kc)`|                               |Hold Left Control, Alt and GUI and press `kc`       |
-|`MEH(kc)` |                               |Hold Left Control, Shift and Alt and press `kc`     |
-|`HYPR(kc)`|                               |Hold Left Control, Shift, Alt and GUI and press `kc`|
+|Key       |Aliases                        |Description                                           |
+|----------|-------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------|
+|`LCTL(kc)`|`C(kc)`                        |Hold Left Control and press `kc`                      |
+|`LSFT(kc)`|`S(kc)`                        |Hold Left Shift and press `kc`                        |
+|`LALT(kc)`|`A(kc)`, `LOPT(kc)`            |Hold Left Alt and press `kc`                          |
+|`LGUI(kc)`|`G(kc)`, `LCMD(kc)`, `LWIN(kc)`|Hold Left GUI and press `kc`                          |
+|`RCTL(kc)`|                               |Hold Right Control and press `kc`                     |
+|`RSFT(kc)`|                               |Hold Right Shift and press `kc`                       |
+|`RALT(kc)`|`ROPT(kc)`, `ALGR(kc)`         |Hold Right Alt and press `kc`                         |
+|`RGUI(kc)`|`RCMD(kc)`, `LWIN(kc)`         |Hold Right GUI and press `kc`                         |
+|`SGUI(kc)`|`SCMD(kc)`, `SWIN(kc)`         |Hold Left Shift and GUI and press `kc`                |
+|`LCA(kc)` |                               |Hold Left Control and Alt and press `kc`              |
+|`LSA(kc)` |                               |Hold Left Shift and Left Alt and press `kc`           |
+|`RSA(kc)` |`SAGR(kc)`                     |Hold Right Shift and Right Alt (AltGr) and press `kc` |
+|`RCS(kc)` |                               |Hold Right Control and Right Shift and press `kc`     |
+|`LCAG(kc)`|                               |Hold Left Control, Alt and GUI and press `kc`         |
+|`MEH(kc)` |                               |Hold Left Control, Shift and Alt and press `kc`       |
+|`HYPR(kc)`|                               |Hold Left Control, Shift, Alt and GUI and press `kc`  |
 
-You can also chain them, for example `LCTL(LALT(KC_DEL))` makes a key that sends Control+Alt+Delete with a single keypress.
+You can also chain them, for example `LCTL(LALT(KC_DEL))` or `C(A(KC_DEL))` makes a key that sends Control+Alt+Delete with a single keypress.
 
 # Legacy Content :id=legacy-content
 

docs/feature_auto_shift.md

@@ -15,25 +15,31 @@ problem.
 When you tap a key, it stays depressed for a short period of time before it is
 then released. This depressed time is a different length for everyone. Auto Shift
 defines a constant `AUTO_SHIFT_TIMEOUT` which is typically set to twice your
-normal pressed state time. When you press a key, a timer starts and then stops
-when you release the key. If the time depressed is greater than or equal to the
-`AUTO_SHIFT_TIMEOUT`, then a shifted version of the key is emitted. If the time
-is less than the `AUTO_SHIFT_TIMEOUT` time, then the normal state is emitted.
+normal pressed state time. When you press a key, a timer starts, and if you
+have not released the key after the `AUTO_SHIFT_TIMEOUT` period, then a shifted
+version of the key is emitted. If the time is less than the `AUTO_SHIFT_TIMEOUT`
+time, or you press another key, then the normal state is emitted.
+
+If `AUTO_SHIFT_REPEAT` is defined, there is keyrepeat support. Holding the key
+down will repeat the shifted key, though this can be disabled with
+`AUTO_SHIFT_NO_AUTO_REPEAT`. If you want to repeat the normal key, then tap it
+once then immediately (within `TAPPING_TERM`) hold it down again (this works
+with the shifted value as well if auto-repeat is disabled).
 
 ## Are There Limitations to Auto Shift?
 
 Yes, unfortunately.
 
-1. Key repeat will cease to work. For example, before if you wanted 20 'a'
-   characters, you could press and hold the 'a' key for a second or two. This no
-   longer works with Auto Shift because it is timing your depressed time instead
-   of emitting a depressed key state to your operating system.
-2. You will have characters that are shifted when you did not intend on shifting, and
-   other characters you wanted shifted, but were not. This simply comes down to
-   practice. As we get in a hurry, we think we have hit the key long enough
-   for a shifted version, but we did not. On the other hand, we may think we are
-   tapping the keys, but really we have held it for a little longer than
-   anticipated.
+You will have characters that are shifted when you did not intend on shifting, and
+other characters you wanted shifted, but were not. This simply comes down to
+practice. As we get in a hurry, we think we have hit the key long enough for a
+shifted version, but we did not. On the other hand, we may think we are tapping
+the keys, but really we have held it for a little longer than anticipated.
+
+Additionally, with keyrepeat the desired shift state can get mixed up. It will
+always 'belong' to the last key pressed. For example, keyrepeating a capital
+and then tapping something lowercase (whether or not it's an Auto Shift key)
+will result in the capital's *key* still being held, but shift not.
 
 ## How Do I Enable Auto Shift?
 
@@ -103,6 +109,14 @@ Do not Auto Shift numeric keys, zero through nine.
 
 Do not Auto Shift alpha characters, which include A through Z.
 
+### AUTO_SHIFT_REPEAT (simple define)
+
+Enables keyrepeat.
+
+### AUTO_SHIFT_NO_AUTO_REPEAT (simple define)
+
+Disables automatically keyrepeating when `AUTO_SHIFT_TIMEOUT` is exceeded.
+
 ## Using Auto Shift Setup
 
 This will enable you to define three keys temporarily to increase, decrease and report your `AUTO_SHIFT_TIMEOUT`.
@@ -139,7 +153,7 @@ completely normal and with no intention of shifted keys.
    `KC_ASRP`. The keyboard will type by itself the value of your
    `AUTO_SHIFT_TIMEOUT`.
 7. Update `AUTO_SHIFT_TIMEOUT` in your `config.h` with the value reported.
-8. Remove `AUTO_SHIFT_SETUP` from your `config.h`.
+8. Add `AUTO_SHIFT_NO_SETUP` to your `config.h`.
 9. Remove the key bindings `KC_ASDN`, `KC_ASUP` and `KC_ASRP`.
 10. Compile and upload your new firmware.
 

docs/feature_backlight.md

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-# Backlighting
+# Backlighting :id=backlighting
 
 Many keyboards support backlit keys by way of individual LEDs placed through or underneath the keyswitches. This feature is distinct from both the [RGB underglow](feature_rgblight.md) and [RGB matrix](feature_rgb_matrix.md) features as it usually allows for only a single colour per switch, though you can obviously install multiple different single coloured LEDs on a keyboard.
 
@@ -6,103 +6,107 @@ QMK is able to control the brightness of these LEDs by switching them on and off
 
 The MCU can only supply so much current to its GPIO pins. Instead of powering the backlight directly from the MCU, the backlight pin is connected to a transistor or MOSFET that switches the power to the LEDs.
 
-## Feature Configuration
-
 Most keyboards have backlighting enabled by default if they support it, but if it is not working for you, check that your `rules.mk` includes the following:
 
 ```makefile
 BACKLIGHT_ENABLE = yes
 ```
 
-## Keycodes
-Once enabled the following keycodes below can be used to change the backlight level.
+## Keycodes :id=keycodes
 
-|Key      |Description                               |
-|---------|------------------------------------------|
-|`BL_TOGG`|Turn the backlight on or off              |
-|`BL_STEP`|Cycle through backlight levels            |
-|`BL_ON`  |Set the backlight to max brightness       |
-|`BL_OFF` |Turn the backlight off                    |
-|`BL_INC` |Increase the backlight level              |
-|`BL_DEC` |Decrease the backlight level              |
-|`BL_BRTG`|Toggle backlight breathing                |
+Once enabled, the following keycodes below can be used to change the backlight level.
 
-## Backlight Functions
+|Key      |Description                        |
+|---------|-----------------------------------|
+|`BL_TOGG`|Turn the backlight on or off       |
+|`BL_STEP`|Cycle through backlight levels     |
+|`BL_ON`  |Set the backlight to max brightness|
+|`BL_OFF` |Turn the backlight off             |
+|`BL_INC` |Increase the backlight level       |
+|`BL_DEC` |Decrease the backlight level       |
+|`BL_BRTG`|Toggle backlight breathing         |
 
-|Function  |Description                                                |
-|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------|
-|`backlight_toggle()`    |Turn the backlight on or off                 |
-|`backlight_enable()`    |Turn the backlight on                        |
-|`backlight_disable()`   |Turn the backlight off                       |
-|`backlight_step()`      |Cycle through backlight levels               |
-|`backlight_increase()`  |Increase the backlight level                 |
-|`backlight_decrease()`  |Decrease the backlight level                 |
-|`backlight_level(x)`    |Sets the backlight level to specified level  |
-|`get_backlight_level()` |Return the current backlight level           |
-|`is_backlight_enabled()`|Return whether the backlight is currently on |
+## Functions :id=functions
 
-### Backlight Breathing Functions
+These functions can be used to change the backlighting in custom code:
 
-|Function  |Description                                        |
-|----------|---------------------------------------------------|
-|`breathing_toggle()`  |Turn the backlight breathing on or off |
-|`breathing_enable()`  |Turns on backlight breathing           |
-|`breathing_disable()` |Turns off backlight breathing          |
+|Function                |Description                                 |
+|------------------------|--------------------------------------------|
+|`backlight_toggle()`    |Turn the backlight on or off                |
+|`backlight_enable()`    |Turn the backlight on                       |
+|`backlight_disable()`   |Turn the backlight off                      |
+|`backlight_step()`      |Cycle through backlight levels              |
+|`backlight_increase()`  |Increase the backlight level                |
+|`backlight_decrease()`  |Decrease the backlight level                |
+|`backlight_level(x)`    |Sets the backlight level to specified level |
+|`get_backlight_level()` |Return the current backlight level          |
+|`is_backlight_enabled()`|Return whether the backlight is currently on|
 
-## Driver Configuration
+If backlight breathing is enabled (see below), the following functions are also available:
+
+|Function             |Description                           |
+|---------------------|--------------------------------------|
+|`breathing_toggle()` |Turn the backlight breathing on or off|
+|`breathing_enable()` |Turns on backlight breathing          |
+|`breathing_disable()`|Turns off backlight breathing         |
+
+## Configuration :id=configuration
 
 To select which driver to use, configure your `rules.mk` with the following:
 
 ```makefile
-BACKLIGHT_DRIVER = software # Valid driver values are 'pwm,software,no'
+BACKLIGHT_DRIVER = software
 ```
 
-See below for help on individual drivers.
+Valid driver values are `pwm`, `software`, `custom` or `no`. See below for help on individual drivers.
 
-## Common Driver Configuration
+To configure the backlighting, `#define` these in your `config.h`:
 
-To change the behavior of the backlighting, `#define` these in your `config.h`:
+| Define                 | Default       | Description                                                                                                       |
+|------------------------|---------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| `BACKLIGHT_PIN`        | *Not defined* | The pin that controls the LED(s)                                                                                  |
+| `BACKLIGHT_LEVELS`     | `3`           | The number of brightness levels (maximum 31 excluding off)                                                        |
+| `BACKLIGHT_CAPS_LOCK`  | *Not defined* | Enable Caps Lock indicator using backlight (for keyboards without dedicated LED)                                  |
+| `BACKLIGHT_BREATHING`  | *Not defined* | Enable backlight breathing, if supported                                                                          |
+| `BREATHING_PERIOD`     | `6`           | The length of one backlight "breath" in seconds                                                                   |
+| `BACKLIGHT_ON_STATE`   | `1`           | The state of the backlight pin when the backlight is "on" - `1` for high, `0` for low                             |
+| `BACKLIGHT_LIMIT_VAL ` | `255`         | The maximum duty cycle of the backlight -- `255` allows for full brightness, any lower will decrease the maximum. |
 
-|Define               |Default      |Description                                                                           |
-|---------------------|-------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-|`BACKLIGHT_LEVELS`   |`3`          |The number of brightness levels (maximum 31 excluding off)                            |
-|`BACKLIGHT_CAPS_LOCK`|*Not defined*|Enable Caps Lock indicator using backlight (for keyboards without dedicated LED)      |
-|`BACKLIGHT_BREATHING`|*Not defined*|Enable backlight breathing, if supported                                              |
-|`BREATHING_PERIOD`   |`6`          |The length of one backlight "breath" in seconds                                       |
-|`BACKLIGHT_ON_STATE` |`0`          |The state of the backlight pin when the backlight is "on" - `1` for high, `0` for low |
+Unless you are designing your own keyboard, you generally should not need to change the `BACKLIGHT_PIN` or `BACKLIGHT_ON_STATE`.
 
-### Backlight On State
+### Backlight On State :id=backlight-on-state
 
 Most backlight circuits are driven by an N-channel MOSFET or NPN transistor. This means that to turn the transistor *on* and light the LEDs, you must drive the backlight pin, connected to the gate or base, *high*.
 Sometimes, however, a P-channel MOSFET, or a PNP transistor is used. In this case, when the transistor is on, the pin is driven *low* instead.
 
 This functionality is configured at the keyboard level with the `BACKLIGHT_ON_STATE` define.
 
-## AVR driver
+### AVR Driver :id=avr-driver
+
+The `pwm` driver is configured by default, however the equivalent setting within `rules.mk` would be:
 
-On AVR boards, the default driver currently sniffs the configuration to pick the best scenario. The driver is configured by default, however the equivalent setting within rules.mk would be:
 ```makefile
 BACKLIGHT_DRIVER = pwm
 ```
 
-### Caveats
+#### Caveats :id=avr-caveats
 
-Hardware PWM is supported according to the following table:
+On AVR boards, QMK automatically decides which driver to use according to the following table:
 
-|Backlight Pin|AT90USB64/128|ATmega16/32U4|ATmega16/32U2|ATmega32A|ATmega328P|
-|-------------|-------------|-------------|-------------|---------|----------|
-|`B1`         |             |             |             |         |Timer 1   |
-|`B2`         |             |             |             |         |Timer 1   |
-|`B5`         |Timer 1      |Timer 1      |             |         |          |
-|`B6`         |Timer 1      |Timer 1      |             |         |          |
-|`B7`         |Timer 1      |Timer 1      |Timer 1      |         |          |
-|`C4`         |Timer 3      |             |             |         |          |
-|`C5`         |Timer 3      |             |Timer 1      |         |          |
-|`C6`         |Timer 3      |Timer 3      |Timer 1      |         |          |
-|`D4`         |             |             |             |Timer 1  |          |
-|`D5`         |             |             |             |Timer 1  |          |
+|Backlight Pin|AT90USB64/128|ATmega16/32U4|ATmega16/32U2|ATmega32A|ATmega328/P|
+|-------------|-------------|-------------|-------------|---------|-----------|
+|`B1`         |             |             |             |         |Timer 1    |
+|`B2`         |             |             |             |         |Timer 1    |
+|`B5`         |Timer 1      |Timer 1      |             |         |           |
+|`B6`         |Timer 1      |Timer 1      |             |         |           |
+|`B7`         |Timer 1      |Timer 1      |Timer 1      |         |           |
+|`C4`         |Timer 3      |             |             |         |           |
+|`C5`         |Timer 3      |             |Timer 1      |         |           |
+|`C6`         |Timer 3      |Timer 3      |Timer 1      |         |           |
+|`D4`         |             |             |             |Timer 1  |           |
+|`D5`         |             |             |             |Timer 1  |           |
 
-All other pins will use software PWM. If the [Audio](feature_audio.md) feature is disabled or only using one timer, the backlight PWM can be triggered by a hardware timer:
+All other pins will use timer-assisted software PWM:
 
 |Audio Pin|Audio Timer|Software PWM Timer|
 |---------|-----------|------------------|
@@ -113,44 +117,9 @@ All other pins will use software PWM. If the [Audio](feature_audio.md) feature i
 |`B6`     |Timer 1    |Timer 3           |
 |`B7`     |Timer 1    |Timer 3           |
 
-When both timers are in use for Audio, the backlight PWM will not use a hardware timer, but will instead be triggered during the matrix scan. In this case, breathing is not supported, and the backlight might flicker, because the PWM computation may not be called with enough timing precision.
+When both timers are in use for Audio, the backlight PWM cannot use a hardware timer, and will instead be triggered during the matrix scan. In this case, breathing is not supported, and the backlight might flicker, because the PWM computation may not be called with enough timing precision.
 
-### AVR Configuration
-
-To change the behavior of the backlighting, `#define` these in your `config.h`:
-
-|Define               |Default      |Description                                                                                                  |
-|---------------------|-------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-|`BACKLIGHT_PIN`      |`B7`         |The pin that controls the LEDs. Unless you are designing your own keyboard, you shouldn't need to change this|
-|`BACKLIGHT_PINS`     |*Not defined*|experimental: see below for more information                                                                 |
-|`BACKLIGHT_LEVELS`   |`3`          |The number of brightness levels (maximum 31 excluding off)                                                   |
-|`BACKLIGHT_CAPS_LOCK`|*Not defined*|Enable Caps Lock indicator using backlight (for keyboards without dedicated LED)                             |
-|`BACKLIGHT_BREATHING`|*Not defined*|Enable backlight breathing, if supported                                                                     |
-|`BREATHING_PERIOD`   |`6`          |The length of one backlight "breath" in seconds                                                              |
-|`BACKLIGHT_ON_STATE` |`1`          |The state of the backlight pin when the backlight is "on" - `1` for high, `0` for low                        |
-
-### Backlight On State
-
-Most backlight circuits are driven by an N-channel MOSFET or NPN transistor. This means that to turn the transistor *on* and light the LEDs, you must drive the backlight pin, connected to the gate or base, *high*.
-Sometimes, however, a P-channel MOSFET, or a PNP transistor is used. In this case, when the transistor is on, the pin is driven *low* instead.
-
-This functionality is configured at the keyboard level with the `BACKLIGHT_ON_STATE` define.
-
-### Multiple backlight pins
-
-Most keyboards have only one backlight pin which control all backlight LEDs (especially if the backlight is connected to an hardware PWM pin).
-In software PWM, it is possible to define multiple backlight pins. All those pins will be turned on and off at the same time during the PWM duty cycle.
-This feature allows to set for instance the Caps Lock LED (or any other controllable LED) brightness at the same level as the other LEDs of the backlight. This is useful if you have mapped LCTRL in place of Caps Lock and you need the Caps Lock LED to be part of the backlight instead of being activated when Caps Lock is on.
-
-To activate multiple backlight pins, you need to add something like this to your user `config.h`:
-
-```c
-#define BACKLIGHT_LED_COUNT 2
-#undef BACKLIGHT_PIN
-#define BACKLIGHT_PINS { F5, B2 }
-```
-
-### Hardware PWM Implementation
+#### Hardware PWM Implementation :id=hardware-pwm-implementation
 
 When using the supported pins for backlighting, QMK will use a hardware timer configured to output a PWM signal. This timer will count up to `ICRx` (by default `0xFFFF`) before resetting to 0.
 The desired brightness is calculated and stored in the `OCRxx` register. When the counter reaches this value, the backlight pin will go low, and is pulled high again when the counter resets.
@@ -159,7 +128,7 @@ In this way `OCRxx` essentially controls the duty cycle of the LEDs, and thus th
 The breathing effect is achieved by registering an interrupt handler for `TIMER1_OVF_vect` that is called whenever the counter resets, roughly 244 times per second.
 In this handler, the value of an incrementing counter is mapped onto a precomputed brightness curve. To turn off breathing, the interrupt handler is simply disabled, and the brightness reset to the level stored in EEPROM.
 
-### Timer Assisted PWM Implementation
+#### Timer Assisted PWM Implementation :id=timer-assisted-implementation
 
 When `BACKLIGHT_PIN` is not set to a hardware backlight pin, QMK will use a hardware timer configured to trigger software interrupts. This time will count up to `ICRx` (by default `0xFFFF`) before resetting to 0.
 When resetting to 0, the CPU will fire an OVF (overflow) interrupt that will turn the LEDs on, starting the duty cycle.
@@ -168,81 +137,82 @@ In this way `OCRxx` essentially controls the duty cycle of the LEDs, and thus th
 
 The breathing effect is the same as in the hardware PWM implementation.
 
-## ARM Driver
+### ARM Driver :id=arm-configuration
+
+While still in its early stages, ARM backlight support aims to eventually have feature parity with AVR. The `pwm` driver is configured by default, however the equivalent setting within `rules.mk` would be:
 
-While still in its early stages, ARM backlight support aims to eventually have feature parity with AVR. The driver is configured by default, however the equivalent setting within rules.mk would be:
 ```makefile
 BACKLIGHT_DRIVER = pwm
 ```
 
-### Caveats
+#### ChibiOS Configuration :id=arm-configuration
+
+The following `#define`s apply only to ARM-based keyboards:
+
+|Define                 |Default|Description                        |
+|-----------------------|-------|-----------------------------------|
+|`BACKLIGHT_PWM_DRIVER` |`PWMD4`|The PWM driver to use              |
+|`BACKLIGHT_PWM_CHANNEL`|`3`    |The PWM channel to use             |
+|`BACKLIGHT_PAL_MODE`   |`2`    |The pin alternative function to use|
+
+See the ST datasheet for your particular MCU to determine these values. Unless you are designing your own keyboard, you generally should not need to change them.
+
+#### Caveats :id=arm-caveats
 
 Currently only hardware PWM is supported, not timer assisted, and does not provide automatic configuration.
 
-?> Backlight support for STMF072 has had limited testing, YMMV. If unsure, set `BACKLIGHT_ENABLE = no` in your rules.mk.
+### Software PWM Driver :id=software-pwm-driver
 
-### ARM Configuration
+In this mode, PWM is "emulated" while running other keyboard tasks. It offers maximum hardware compatibility without extra platform configuration. The tradeoff is the backlight might jitter when the keyboard is busy. To enable, add this to your `rules.mk`:
 
-To change the behavior of the backlighting, `#define` these in your `config.h`:
-
-|Define                  |Default      |Description                                                                                                  |
-|------------------------|-------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-|`BACKLIGHT_PIN`         |`B7`         |The pin that controls the LEDs. Unless you are designing your own keyboard, you shouldn't need to change this|
-|`BACKLIGHT_PWM_DRIVER`  |`PWMD4`      |The PWM driver to use, see ST datasheets for pin to PWM timer mapping. Unless you are designing your own keyboard, you shouldn't need to change this|
-|`BACKLIGHT_PWM_CHANNEL` |`3`          |The PWM channel to use, see ST datasheets for pin to PWM channel mapping. Unless you are designing your own keyboard, you shouldn't need to change this|
-|`BACKLIGHT_PAL_MODE`    |`2`          |The pin alternative function to use, see ST datasheets for pin AF mapping. Unless you are designing your own keyboard, you shouldn't need to change this|
-
-## Software PWM Driver :id=software-pwm-driver
-
-Emulation of PWM while running other keyboard tasks, it offers maximum hardware compatibility without extra platform configuration. The tradeoff is the backlight might jitter when the keyboard is busy. To enable, add this to your rules.mk:
 ```makefile
 BACKLIGHT_DRIVER = software
 ```
 
-### Software PWM Configuration
-
-To change the behavior of the backlighting, `#define` these in your `config.h`:
-
-|Define           |Default      |Description                                                                                                  |
-|-----------------|-------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-|`BACKLIGHT_PIN`  |`B7`         |The pin that controls the LEDs. Unless you are designing your own keyboard, you shouldn't need to change this|
-|`BACKLIGHT_PINS` |*Not defined*|experimental: see below for more information                                                                 |
-
-### Multiple backlight pins
+#### Multiple Backlight Pins :id=multiple-backlight-pins
 
 Most keyboards have only one backlight pin which control all backlight LEDs (especially if the backlight is connected to an hardware PWM pin).
-In software PWM, it is possible to define multiple backlight pins. All those pins will be turned on and off at the same time during the PWM duty cycle.
-This feature allows to set for instance the Caps Lock LED (or any other controllable LED) brightness at the same level as the other LEDs of the backlight. This is useful if you have mapped LCTRL in place of Caps Lock and you need the Caps Lock LED to be part of the backlight instead of being activated when Caps Lock is on.
+In software PWM, it is possible to define multiple backlight pins, which will be turned on and off at the same time during the PWM duty cycle.
 
-To activate multiple backlight pins, you need to add something like this to your user `config.h`:
+This feature allows to set, for instance, the Caps Lock LED's (or any other controllable LED) brightness at the same level as the other LEDs of the backlight. This is useful if you have mapped Control in place of Caps Lock and you need the Caps Lock LED to be part of the backlight instead of being activated when Caps Lock is on, as it is usually wired to a separate pin from the backlight.
+
+To activate multiple backlight pins, add something like this to your `config.h`, instead of `BACKLIGHT_PIN`:
 
 ```c
-#undef BACKLIGHT_PIN
 #define BACKLIGHT_PINS { F5, B2 }
 ```
 
-## Custom Driver
+### Custom Driver :id=custom-driver
 
-To enable, add this to your rules.mk:
+If none of the above drivers apply to your board (for example, you are using a separate IC to control the backlight), you can implement a custom backlight driver using this simple API provided by QMK. To enable, add this to your `rules.mk`:
 
 ```makefile
 BACKLIGHT_DRIVER = custom
 ```
 
-When implementing the custom driver API, the provided keyboard hooks are as follows:
+Then implement any of these hooks:
 
 ```c
 void backlight_init_ports(void) {
-    // Optional - Run on startup
-    //          - usually you want to configure pins here
+    // Optional - runs on startup
+    //   Usually you want to configure pins here
 }
 void backlight_set(uint8_t level) {
-    // Optional - Run on level change
-    //          - usually you want to respond to the new value
+    // Optional - runs on level change
+    //   Usually you want to respond to the new value
 }
 
 void backlight_task(void) {
-    // Optional - Run periodically
-    //          - long running actions here can cause performance issues
+    // Optional - runs periodically
+    //   Note that this is called in the main keyboard loop,
+    //   so long running actions here can cause performance issues
 }
 ```
+
+## Example Schematic
+
+In this typical example, the backlight LEDs are all connected in parallel towards an N-channel MOSFET. Its gate pin is wired to one of the microcontroller's GPIO pins through a 470Ω resistor to avoid ringing.
+A pulldown resistor is also placed between the gate pin and ground to keep it at a defined state when it is not otherwise being driven by the MCU.
+The values of these resistors are not critical - see [this Electronics StackExchange question](https://electronics.stackexchange.com/q/68748) for more information.
+
+![Backlight example circuit](https://i.imgur.com/BmAvoUC.png)

docs/feature_bluetooth.md

@@ -2,11 +2,10 @@
 
 ## Bluetooth Known Supported Hardware
 
-Currently Bluetooth support is limited to AVR based chips. For Bluetooth 2.1, QMK has support for RN-42 modules and the Bluefruit EZ-Key, the latter of which is not produced anymore. For more recent BLE protocols, currently only the Adafruit Bluefruit SPI Friend is directly supported. BLE is needed to connect to iOS devices. Note iOS does not support mouse input.
+Currently Bluetooth support is limited to AVR based chips. For Bluetooth 2.1, QMK has support for RN-42 modules. For more recent BLE protocols, currently only the Adafruit Bluefruit SPI Friend is directly supported. BLE is needed to connect to iOS devices. Note iOS does not support mouse input.
 
 |Board                                                           |Bluetooth Protocol          |Connection Type |rules.mk                   |Bluetooth Chip|
 |----------------------------------------------------------------|----------------------------|----------------|---------------------------|--------------|
-|[Adafruit EZ-Key HID](https://www.adafruit.com/product/1535)   |Bluetooth Classic           | UART           |`BLUETOOTH = AdafruitEZKey` |              |
 |Roving Networks RN-42 (Sparkfun Bluesmirf)                       |Bluetooth Classic           | UART           |`BLUETOOTH = RN42`          | RN-42        |
 |[Bluefruit LE SPI Friend](https://www.adafruit.com/product/2633)|Bluetooth Low Energy        | SPI            |`BLUETOOTH = AdafruitBLE`   | nRF51822      |
 
@@ -24,16 +23,15 @@ Currently The only bluetooth chipset supported by QMK is the Adafruit Bluefruit
 
 A Bluefruit UART friend can be converted to an SPI friend, however this [requires](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/issues/2274) some reflashing and soldering directly to the MDBT40 chip.
 
-## Adafruit EZ-Key hid
-This requires [some hardware changes](https://www.reddit.com/r/MechanicalKeyboards/comments/3psx0q/the_planck_keyboard_with_bluetooth_guide_and/?ref=search_posts), but can be enabled via the Makefile. The firmware will still output characters via USB, so be aware of this when charging via a computer. It would make sense to have a switch on the Bluefruit to turn it off at will.
-
 
 <!-- FIXME: Document bluetooth support more completely. -->
 ## Bluetooth Rules.mk Options
-Use only one of these
+
+The currently supported Bluetooth chipsets do not support [N-Key Rollover (NKRO)](reference_glossary.md#n-key-rollover-nkro), so `rules.mk` must contain `NKRO_ENABLE = no`.
+
+Use only one of these to enable Bluetooth:
 * BLUETOOTH_ENABLE = yes (Legacy Option)
 * BLUETOOTH = RN42
-* BLUETOOTH = AdafruitEZKey
 * BLUETOOTH = AdafruitBLE
 
 ## Bluetooth Keycodes

docs/feature_combo.md

@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ combo_t key_combos[COMBO_COUNT] = {
   [XV_PASTE] = COMBO_ACTION(paste_combo),
 };
 
-void process_combo_event(uint8_t combo_index, bool pressed) {
+void process_combo_event(uint16_t combo_index, bool pressed) {
   switch(combo_index) {
     case ZC_COPY:
       if (pressed) {

docs/feature_debounce_type.md

@@ -1,42 +1,151 @@
-# Debounce algorithm
+# Contact bounce / contact chatter
+
+Mechanical switches often don't have a clean single transition between pressed and unpressed states.
+
+In an ideal world, when you press a switch, you would expect the digital pin to see something like this:
+(X axis showing time
+```
+voltage                   +----------------------
+ ^                        |
+ |                        |
+ |      ------------------+
+          ----> time
+```
+
+However in the real world you will actually see contact bounce, which will look like multiple 1->0 and 0->1 transitions,
+until the value finally settles.
+```
+                  +-+ +--+ +-------------
+                  | | |  | |
+                  | | |  | |
++-----------------+ +-+  +-+
+```
+The time it takes for the switch to settle might vary with switch type, age, and even pressing technique.
+
+If the device chooses not to mitigate contact bounce, then often actions that happen when the switch is pressed are repeated
+multiple times.
+
+There are many ways to handle contact bounce ("Debouncing"). Some include employing additional hardware, for example an RC filter,
+while there are various ways to do debouncing in software too, often called debounce algorithms. This page discusses software
+debouncing methods available in QMK.
+
+While technically not considered contact bounce/contact chatter, some switch technologies are susceptible to noise, meaning,
+while the key is not changing state, sometimes short random 0->1 or 1->0 transitions might be read by the digital circuit, for example:
+```
+                  +-+
+                  | |
+                  | |
++-----------------+ +--------------------
+```
+
+Many debounce methods (but not all) will also make the device resistant to noise. If you are working with a technology that is
+susceptible to noise, you must choose a debounce method that will also mitigate noise for you.
+
+## Types of debounce algorithms
+
+1) Unit of time: Timestamp (milliseconds) vs Cycles (scans)
+   * Debounce algorithms often have a 'debounce time' parameter, that specifies the maximum settling time of the switch contacts.
+     This time might be measured in various units:
+     * Cycles-based debouncing waits n cycles (scans), decreasing count by one each matrix_scan
+     * Timestamp-based debouncing stores the millisecond timestamp a change occurred, and does substraction to figure out time elapsed.
+   * Timestamp-based debouncing is usually superior, especially in the case of noise-resistant devices because settling times of physical
+     switches is specified in units of time, and should not depend on the matrix scan-rate of the keyboard.
+   * Cycles-based debouncing is sometimes considered inferior, because the settling time that it is able to compensate for depends on the
+     performance of the matrix scanning code. If you use cycles-based debouncing, and you significantly improve the performance of your scanning
+     code, you might end up with less effective debouncing. A situation in which cycles-based debouncing might be preferable is when
+     noise is present, and the scanning algorithm is slow, or variable speed. Even if your debounce algorithm is fundamentally noise-resistant,
+     if the scanning is slow, and you are using a timestamp-based algorithm, you might end up making a debouncing decision based on only two
+     sampled values, which will limit the noise-resistance of the algorithm.
+   * Currently all built-in debounce algorithms support timestamp-based debouncing only. In the future we might
+     implement cycles-based debouncing, and it will be selectable via a ```config.h``` macro.
+
+2) Symmetric vs Asymmetric
+   * Symmetric - apply the same debouncing algorithm, to both key-up and key-down events.
+     * Recommended naming convention: ```sym_*```
+   * Asymmetric - apply different debouncing algorithms to key-down and key-up events. E.g. Eager key-down, Defer key-up.
+     * Recommended naming convention: ```asym_*``` followed by details of the type of algorithm in use, in order, for key-down and then key-up
+
+3) Eager vs Defer
+   * Eager - any key change is reported immediately. All further inputs for DEBOUNCE ms are ignored.
+     * Eager algorithms are not noise-resistant.
+     * Recommended naming conventions:
+        * ```sym_eager_*```
+        * ```asym_eager_*_*```: key-down is using eager algorithm
+        * ```asym_*_eager_*```: key-up is using eager algorithm
+   * Defer - wait for no changes for DEBOUNCE ms before reporting change.
+     * Defer algorithms are noise-resistant
+     * Recommended naming conventions:
+        * ```sym_defer_*```
+        * ```asym_defer_*_*```: key-down is using defer algorithm
+        * ```asym_*_defer_*```: key-up is using defer algorithm
+
+4) Global vs Per-Key vs Per-Row
+   * Global - one timer for all keys. Any key change state affects global timer
+     * Recommended naming convention: ```*_g```
+   * Per-key - one timer per key
+     * Recommended naming convention: ```*_pk```
+   * Per-row - one timer per row
+     * Recommended naming convention: ```*_pr```
+   * Per-key and per-row algorithms consume more resources (in terms of performance,
+     and ram usage), but fast typists might prefer them over global.
+
+## Debounce algorithms supported by QMK
 
 QMK supports multiple debounce algorithms through its debounce API.
-
-The logic for which debounce method called is below. It checks various defines that you have set in rules.mk
+The logic for which debounce method called is below. It checks various defines that you have set in ```rules.mk```
 
 ```
 DEBOUNCE_DIR:= $(QUANTUM_DIR)/debounce
-DEBOUNCE_TYPE?= sym_g
+DEBOUNCE_TYPE?= sym_defer_g
 ifneq ($(strip $(DEBOUNCE_TYPE)), custom)
     QUANTUM_SRC += $(DEBOUNCE_DIR)/$(strip $(DEBOUNCE_TYPE)).c
 endif
 ```
 
-# Debounce selection
+### Debounce selection
 
 | DEBOUNCE_TYPE    | Description                                          | What else is needed           |
 | -------------    | ---------------------------------------------------  | ----------------------------- |
-| Not defined      | Use the default algorithm, currently sym_g           | Nothing                       |
+| Not defined      | Use the default algorithm, currently sym_defer_g     | Nothing                       |
 | custom           | Use your own debounce code                           | ```SRC += debounce.c``` add your own debounce.c and implement necessary functions |
-| anything_else    | Use another algorithm from quantum/debounce/*        | Nothing                       |
+| Anything Else    | Use another algorithm from quantum/debounce/*        | Nothing                       |
 
 **Regarding split keyboards**:
 The debounce code is compatible with split keyboards.
 
-# Use your own debouncing code
-* Set ```DEBOUNCE_TYPE = custom```.
-* Add ```SRC += debounce.c```
+### Selecting an included debouncing method
+Keyboards may select one of the already implemented debounce methods, by adding to ```rules.mk``` the following line:
+```
+DEBOUNCE_TYPE = <name of algorithm>
+```
+Where name of algorithm is one of:
+* ```sym_defer_g``` - debouncing per keyboard. On any state change, a global timer is set. When ```DEBOUNCE``` milliseconds of no changes has occurred, all input changes are pushed.
+  * This is the current default algorithm. This is the highest performance algorithm with lowest memory usage, and it's also noise-resistant.
+* ```sym_eager_pr``` - debouncing per row. On any state change, response is immediate, followed by locking the row ```DEBOUNCE``` milliseconds of no further input for that row. 
+For use in keyboards where refreshing ```NUM_KEYS``` 8-bit counters is computationally expensive / low scan rate, and fingers usually only hit one row at a time. This could be
+appropriate for the ErgoDox models; the matrix is rotated 90°, and hence its "rows" are really columns, and each finger only hits a single "row" at a time in normal use.
+* ```sym_eager_pk``` - debouncing per key. On any state change, response is immediate, followed by ```DEBOUNCE``` milliseconds of no further input for that key
+* ```sym_defer_pk``` - debouncing per key. On any state change, a per-key timer is set. When ```DEBOUNCE``` milliseconds of no changes have occurred on that key, the key status change is pushed.
+
+### A couple algorithms that could be implemented in the future:
+* ```sym_defer_pr```
+* ```sym_eager_g```
+* ```asym_eager_defer_pk```
+
+### Use your own debouncing code
+You have the option to implement you own debouncing algorithm. To do this:
+* Set ```DEBOUNCE_TYPE = custom``` in ```rules.mk```.
+* Add ```SRC += debounce.c``` in ```rules.mk```
 * Add your own ```debounce.c```. Look at current implementations in ```quantum/debounce``` for examples.
 * Debouncing occurs after every raw matrix scan.
 * Use num_rows rather than MATRIX_ROWS, so that split keyboards are supported correctly.
+* If the algorithm might be applicable to other keyboards, please consider adding it to ```quantum/debounce```
 
-# Changing between included debouncing methods
-You can either use your own code, by including your own debounce.c, or switch to another included one.
-Included debounce methods are:
-* eager_pr - debouncing per row. On any state change, response is immediate, followed by locking the row ```DEBOUNCE``` milliseconds of no further input for that row. 
-For use in keyboards where refreshing ```NUM_KEYS``` 8-bit counters is computationally expensive / low scan rate, and fingers usually only hit one row at a time. This could be
-appropriate for the ErgoDox models; the matrix is rotated 90°, and hence its "rows" are really columns, and each finger only hits a single "row" at a time in normal use.
-* eager_pk - debouncing per key. On any state change, response is immediate, followed by ```DEBOUNCE``` milliseconds of no further input for that key
-* sym_g - debouncing per keyboard. On any state change, a global timer is set. When ```DEBOUNCE``` milliseconds of no changes has occured, all input changes are pushed.
+### Old names
+The following old names for existing algorithms will continue to be supported, however it is recommended to use the new names instead.
 
+* sym_g - old name for sym_defer_g
+* eager_pk - old name for sym_eager_pk
+* sym_pk - old name for sym_defer_pk
+* eager_pr - old name for sym_eager_pr
 

docs/feature_dip_switch.md

@@ -7,9 +7,17 @@ DIP switches are supported by adding this to your `rules.mk`:
 and this to your `config.h`:
 
 ```c
+// Connects each switch in the dip switch to the GPIO pin of the MCU
 #define DIP_SWITCH_PINS { B14, A15, A10, B9 }
 ```
 
+or
+
+```c
+// Connect each switch in the DIP switch to an unused intersections in the key matrix.
+#define DIP_SWITCH_MATRIX_GRID { {0,6}, {1,6}, {2,6} } // List of row and col pairs
+```
+
 ## Callbacks
 
 The callback functions can be inserted into your `<keyboard>.c`:
@@ -87,4 +95,10 @@ void dip_switch_update_mask_user(uint32_t state) {
 
 ## Hardware
 
+### Connects each switch in the dip switch to the GPIO pin of the MCU
+
 One side of the DIP switch should be wired directly to the pin on the MCU, and the other side to ground.  It should not matter which side is connected to which, as it should be functionally the same. 
+
+### Connect each switch in the DIP switch to an unused intersections in the key matrix.
+
+As with the keyswitch, a diode and DIP switch connect the ROW line to the COL line.

docs/feature_dynamic_macros.md

@@ -18,11 +18,11 @@ That should be everything necessary.
 
 To start recording the macro, press either `DYN_REC_START1` or `DYN_REC_START2`. 
 
-To finish the recording, press the `DYN_REC_STOP` layer button. 
+To finish the recording, press the `DYN_REC_STOP` layer button. You can also press `DYN_REC_START1` or `DYN_REC_START2` again to stop the recording.
 
 To replay the macro, press either `DYN_MACRO_PLAY1` or `DYN_MACRO_PLAY2`.
 
-It is possible to replay a macro as part of a macro. It's ok to replay macro 2 while recording macro 1 and vice versa but never create recursive macros i.e. macro 1 that replays macro 1. If you do so and the keyboard will get unresponsive, unplug the keyboard and plug it again.  You can disable this completly by defining `DYNAMIC_MACRO_NO_NESTING`  in your `config.h` file.
+It is possible to replay a macro as part of a macro. It's ok to replay macro 2 while recording macro 1 and vice versa but never create recursive macros i.e. macro 1 that replays macro 1. If you do so and the keyboard will get unresponsive, unplug the keyboard and plug it again.  You can disable this completely by defining `DYNAMIC_MACRO_NO_NESTING`  in your `config.h` file.
 
 ?> For the details about the internals of the dynamic macros, please read the comments in the `process_dynamic_macro.h` and `process_dynamic_macro.c` files.
 

docs/feature_encoders.md

@@ -26,19 +26,26 @@ If your encoder's clockwise directions are incorrect, you can swap the A & B pad
 #define ENCODER_DIRECTION_FLIP
 ```
 
-Additionally, the resolution can be specified in the same file (the default & suggested is 4):
+Additionally, the resolution, which defines how many pulses the encoder registers between each detent, can be defined with:
 
 ```c
 #define ENCODER_RESOLUTION 4
 ```
 
+It can also be defined per-encoder, by instead defining:
+
+```c
+#define ENCODER_RESOLUTIONS { 4, 2 }
+```
+
 ## Split Keyboards
 
-If you are using different pinouts for the encoders on each half of a split keyboard, you can define the pinout for the right half like this:
+If you are using different pinouts for the encoders on each half of a split keyboard, you can define the pinout (and optionally, resolutions) for the right half like this:
 
 ```c
 #define ENCODERS_PAD_A_RIGHT { encoder1a, encoder2a }
 #define ENCODERS_PAD_B_RIGHT { encoder1b, encoder2b }
+#define ENCODER_RESOLUTIONS_RIGHT { 2, 4 }
 ```
 
 ## Callbacks
@@ -61,7 +68,7 @@ void encoder_update_user(uint8_t index, bool clockwise) {
         } else {
             tap_code(KC_PGUP);
         }
-        } else if (index == 1) { /* Second encoder */  
+    } else if (index == 1) { /* Second encoder */
         if (clockwise) {
             tap_code(KC_DOWN);
         } else {

docs/feature_haptic_feedback.md

@@ -42,14 +42,21 @@ First you will need a build a circuit to drive the solenoid through a mosfet as
 [Wiring diagram provided by Adafruit](https://playground.arduino.cc/uploads/Learning/solenoid_driver.pdf)
 
 
-| Settings                 | Default       | Description                                           |
-|--------------------------|---------------|-------------------------------------------------------|
-|`SOLENOID_PIN`            | *Not defined* |Configures the pin that the Solenoid is connected to.  |
-|`SOLENOID_DEFAULT_DWELL`  | `12` ms       |Configures the default dwell time for the solenoid.    |
-|`SOLENOID_MIN_DWELL`      | `4` ms        |Sets the lower limit for the dwell.                    |
-|`SOLENOID_MAX_DWELL`      | `100` ms      |Sets the upper limit for the dwell.                    |
+| Settings                   | Default              | Description                                           |
+|----------------------------|----------------------|-------------------------------------------------------|
+|`SOLENOID_PIN`              | *Not defined*        |Configures the pin that the Solenoid is connected to.  |
+|`SOLENOID_DEFAULT_DWELL`    | `12` ms              |Configures the default dwell time for the solenoid.    |
+|`SOLENOID_MIN_DWELL`        | `4` ms               |Sets the lower limit for the dwell.                    |
+|`SOLENOID_MAX_DWELL`        | `100` ms             |Sets the upper limit for the dwell.                    |
+|`SOLENOID_DWELL_STEP_SIZE`  | `1` ms               |The step size to use when `HPT_DWL*` keycodes are sent |
+|`SOLENOID_DEFAULT_BUZZ`     | `0` (disabled)       |On HPT_RST buzz is set "on" if this is "1"             |
+|`SOLENOID_BUZZ_ACTUATED`    | `SOLENOID_MIN_DWELL` |Actuated-time when the solenoid is in buzz mode        |
+|`SOLENOID_BUZZ_NONACTUATED` | `SOLENOID_MIN_DWELL` |Non-Actuated-time when the solenoid is in buzz mode    |
 
-?> Dwell time is how long the "plunger" stays activated.  The dwell time changes how the solenoid sounds.
+* If solenoid buzz is off, then dwell time is how long the "plunger" stays activated. The dwell time changes how the solenoid sounds.
+* If solenoid buzz is on, then dwell time sets the length of the buzz, while `SOLENOID_BUZZ_ACTUATED` and `SOLENOID_BUZZ_NONACTUATED` set the (non-)actuation times withing the buzz period.
+* With the current implementation, for any of the above time settings, the precision of these settings may be affected by how fast the keyboard is able to scan the matrix.
+  Therefore, if the keyboards scanning routine is slow, it may be preferable to set `SOLENOID_DWELL_STEP_SIZE` to a value slightly smaller than the time it takes to scan the keyboard.
 
 Beware that some pins may be powered during bootloader (ie. A13 on the STM32F303 chip) and will result in the solenoid kept in the on state through the whole flashing process. This may overheat and damage the solenoid. If you find that the pin the solenoid is connected to is triggering the solenoid during bootloader/DFU, select another pin.
 

docs/feature_hd44780.md

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 # HD44780 LCD Displays
 
-This is an integration of Peter Fleury's LCD library. This page will explain the basics. [For in depth documentation visit his page.](http://homepage.hispeed.ch/peterfleury/doxygen/avr-gcc-libraries/group__pfleury__lcd.html)
+This is an integration of Peter Fleury's LCD library. This page will explain the basics. [For in depth documentation visit his page.](http://www.peterfleury.epizy.com/doxygen/avr-gcc-libraries/group__pfleury__lcd.html)
 
 You can enable support for HD44780 Displays by setting the `HD44780_ENABLE` flag in your keyboards `rules.mk` to yes.
 
@@ -50,8 +50,8 @@ LCD_DISP_ON_CURSOR_BLINK : display on, cursor on flashing
 ````
 This is best done in your keyboards `matrix_init_kb` or your keymaps `matrix_init_user`.  
 It is advised to clear the display before use.  
-To do so call `lcd_clrsrc()`.
+To do so call `lcd_clrscr()`.
 
 To now print something to your Display you first call `lcd_gotoxy(column, line)`. To go to the start of the first line you would call `lcd_gotoxy(0, 0)` and then print a string with `lcd_puts("example string")`.
 
-There are more methods available to control the display. [For in depth documentation please visit the linked page.](http://homepage.hispeed.ch/peterfleury/doxygen/avr-gcc-libraries/group__pfleury__lcd.html)
+There are more methods available to control the display. [For in depth documentation please visit the linked page.](http://www.peterfleury.epizy.com/doxygen/avr-gcc-libraries/group__pfleury__lcd.html)

docs/feature_joystick.md

@@ -0,0 +1,153 @@
+## Joystick
+
+The keyboard can be made to be recognized as a joystick HID device by the operating system.
+
+This is enabled by adding `JOYSTICK_ENABLE` to `rules.mk`. You can set this value to `analog`, `digital`, or `no`.
+
+!> Joystick support is not currently available on V-USB devices.
+
+The joystick feature provides two services:
+ * reading analog input devices (eg. potentiometers)
+ * sending gamepad HID reports
+
+Both services can be used without the other, depending on whether you just want to read a device but not send gamepad reports (for volume control for instance)
+or send gamepad reports based on values computed by the keyboard.
+
+### Analog Input
+
+To use analog input you must first enable it in `rules.mk`:
+
+```makefile
+JOYSTICK_ENABLE = analog
+```
+
+An analog device such as a potentiometer found on a gamepad's analog axes is based on a [voltage divider](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Voltage_divider).
+It is composed of three connectors linked to the ground, the power input and power output (usually the middle one). The power output holds the voltage that varies based on the position of the cursor,
+which value will be read using your MCU's [ADC](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Analog-to-digital_converter).
+Depending on which pins are already used by your keyboard's matrix, the rest of the circuit can get a little bit more complicated,
+feeding the power input and ground connection through pins and using diodes to avoid bad interactions with the matrix scanning procedures.
+
+### Configuring the Joystick
+
+By default, two axes and eight buttons are defined. This can be changed in your `config.h`:
+
+```c
+// Max 32
+#define JOYSTICK_BUTTON_COUNT 16
+// Max 6: X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz
+#define JOYSTICK_AXES_COUNT 3
+```
+
+When defining axes for your joystick, you have to provide a definition array. You can do this from your keymap.c file.
+A joystick will either be read from an input pin that allows the use of the ADC, or can be virtual, so that its value is provided by your code.
+You have to define an array of type ''joystick_config_t'' and of proper size.
+
+There are three ways for your circuit to work with the ADC, that relies on the use of 1, 2 or 3 pins of the MCU:
+ * 1 pin: your analog device is directly connected to your device GND and VCC. The only pin used is the ADC pin of your choice.
+ * 2 pins: your analog device is powered through a pin that allows toggling it on or off. The other pin is used to read the input value through the ADC.
+ * 3 pins: both the power input and ground are connected to pins that must be set to a proper state before reading and restored afterwards.
+
+The configuration of each axis is performed using one of four macros:
+ * `JOYSTICK_AXIS_VIRTUAL`: no ADC reading must be performed, that value will be provided by keyboard/keymap-level code
+ * `JOYSTICK_AXIS_IN(INPUT_PIN, LOW, REST, HIGH)`: a voltage will be read on the provided pin, which must be an ADC-capable pin.
+ * `JOYSTICK_AXIS_IN_OUT(INPUT_PIN, OUTPUT_PIN, LOW, REST, HIGH)`: the provided `OUTPUT_PIN` will be set high before `INPUT_PIN` is read.
+ * `JOYSTICK_AXIS_IN_OUT_GROUND(INPUT_PIN, OUTPUT_PIN, GROUND_PIN, LOW, REST, HIGH)`: the `OUTPUT_PIN` will be set high and `GROUND_PIN` will be set low before reading from `INPUT_PIN`.
+
+In any case where an ADC reading takes place (when `INPUT_PIN` is provided), additional `LOW`, `REST` and `HIGH` parameters are used.
+These implement the calibration of the analog device by defining the range of read values that will be mapped to the lowest, resting position and highest possible value for the axis (-127 to 127).
+In practice, you have to provide the lowest/highest raw ADC reading, and the raw reading at resting position, when no deflection is applied. You can provide inverted `LOW` and `HIGH` to invert the axis.
+
+For instance, an axes configuration can be defined in the following way:
+
+```c
+//joystick config
+joystick_config_t joystick_axes[JOYSTICK_AXES_COUNT] = {
+    [0] = JOYSTICK_AXIS_IN_OUT_GROUND(A4, B0, A7, 900, 575, 285),
+    [1] = JOYSTICK_AXIS_VIRTUAL
+};
+```
+
+When the ADC reads 900 or higher, the returned axis value will be -127, whereas it will be 127 when the ADC reads 285 or lower. Zero is returned when 575 is read.
+
+In this example, the first axis will be read from the `A4` pin while `B0` is set high and `A7` is set low, using `analogReadPin()`, whereas the second axis will not be read.
+
+In order to give a value to the second axis, you can do so in any customizable entry point: as an action, in `process_record_user()` or in `matrix_scan_user()`, or even in `joystick_task()` which is called even when no key has been pressed.
+You assign a value by writing to `joystick_status.axes[axis_index]` a signed 8-bit value (ranging from -127 to 127). Then it is necessary to assign the flag `JS_UPDATED` to `joystick_status.status` in order for an updated HID report to be sent.
+
+The following example writes two axes based on keypad presses, with `KC_P5` as a precision modifier:
+
+```c
+#ifdef ANALOG_JOYSTICK_ENABLE
+static uint8_t precision_val = 70;
+static uint8_t axesFlags = 0;
+enum axes {
+    Precision = 1,
+    Axis1High = 2,
+    Axis1Low = 4,
+    Axis2High = 8,
+    Axis2Low = 16
+};
+#endif
+
+bool process_record_user(uint16_t keycode, keyrecord_t *record) {
+    switch(keycode) {
+#ifdef ANALOG_JOYSTICK_ENABLE
+        // virtual joystick
+#    if JOYSTICK_AXES_COUNT > 1
+        case KC_P8:
+            if (record->event.pressed) {
+                axesFlags |= Axis2Low;
+            } else {
+                axesFlags &= ~Axis2Low;
+            }
+            joystick_status.status |= JS_UPDATED;
+            break;
+        case KC_P2:
+            if (record->event.pressed) {
+                axesFlags |= Axis2High;
+            } else {
+                axesFlags &= ~Axis2High;
+            }
+            joystick_status.status |= JS_UPDATED;
+            break;
+#    endif
+        case KC_P4:
+            if (record->event.pressed) {
+                axesFlags |= Axis1Low;
+            } else {
+                axesFlags &= ~Axis1Low;
+            }
+            joystick_status.status |= JS_UPDATED;
+            break;
+        case KC_P6:
+            if (record->event.pressed) {
+                axesFlags |= Axis1High;
+            } else {
+                axesFlags &= ~Axis1High;
+            }
+            joystick_status.status |= JS_UPDATED;
+            break;
+        case KC_P5:
+            if (record->event.pressed) {
+                axesFlags |= Precision;
+            } else {
+                axesFlags &= ~Precision;
+            }
+            joystick_status.status |= JS_UPDATED;
+            break;
+#endif
+    }
+    return true;
+}
+```
+
+### Axis Resolution
+
+By default, the resolution of each axis is 8 bit, giving a range of -127 to +127. If you need higher precision, you can increase it by defining eg. `JOYSTICK_AXES_RESOLUTION 12` in your `config.h`. The resolution must be between 8 and 16.
+
+Note that the supported AVR MCUs have a 10-bit ADC, and 12-bit for most STM32 MCUs.
+
+### Triggering Joystick Buttons
+
+Joystick buttons are normal Quantum keycodes, defined as `JS_BUTTON0` to `JS_BUTTON31`, depending on the number of buttons you have configured.
+To trigger a joystick button, just add the corresponding keycode to your keymap.

docs/feature_layers.md

@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ These functions allow you to activate layers in various ways. Note that layers a
 
 ### Caveats :id=caveats
 
-Currently, `LT()` and `MT()` are limited to the [Basic Keycode set](keycodes_basic.md), meaning you can't use keycodes like `LCTL()`, `KC_TILD`, or anything greater than `0xFF`. Specifically, dual function keys like `LT` and `MT` use a 16 bit keycode. 4 bits are used for the function identifier, the next 12 are divided into the parameters. Layer Tap uses 4 bits for the layer (and is why it's limited to layers 0-16, actually), while Mod Tap does the same, 4 bits for the identifier, 4 bits for which mods are used, and all of them use 8 bits for the keycode. Because of this, the keycode used is limited to `0xFF` (0-255), which are the basic keycodes only. 
+Currently, `LT()` and `MT()` are limited to the [Basic Keycode set](keycodes_basic.md), meaning you can't use keycodes like `LCTL()`, `KC_TILD`, or anything greater than `0xFF`. Specifically, dual function keys like `LT` and `MT` use a 16 bit keycode. 4 bits are used for the function identifier, the next 12 are divided into the parameters. Layer Tap uses 4 bits for the layer (and is why it's limited to layers 0-15, actually), while Mod Tap does the same, 4 bits for the identifier, 4 bits for which mods are used, and all of them use 8 bits for the keycode. Because of this, the keycode used is limited to `0xFF` (0-255), which are the basic keycodes only. 
 
 Expanding this would be complicated, at best. Moving to a 32-bit keycode would solve a lot of this, but would double the amount of space that the keymap matrix uses. And it could potentially cause issues, too. If you need to apply modifiers to your tapped keycode, [Tap Dance](feature_tap_dance.md#example-5-using-tap-dance-for-advanced-mod-tap-and-layer-tap-keys) can be used to accomplish this.
 
@@ -74,10 +74,9 @@ There are a number of functions (and variables) related to how you can use or ma
 | [`update_tri_layer(x, y, z)`](ref_functions.md#update_tri_layerx-y-z) | Checks if layers `x` and `y` are both on, and sets `z` based on that (on if both on, otherwise off). |
 | [`update_tri_layer_state(state, x, y, z)`](ref_functions.md#update_tri_layer_statestate-x-y-z) | Does the same as `update_tri_layer(x, y, z)`, but from `layer_state_set_*` functions. |
 
+In addition to the functions that you can call, there are a number of callback functions that get called every time the layer changes. This passes the layer state to the function, where it can be read or modified.
 
-In additional to the functions that you can call, there are a number of callback functions that get called every time the layer changes. This passed the layer state to the function, which can be read or modified.
-
-|Callbacks                                     |Description                                                                                    |
+|Callback                                             |Description                                                                             |
 |-----------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
 | `layer_state_set_kb(layer_state_t state)`           | Callback for layer functions, for keyboard.                                            |
 | `layer_state_set_user(layer_state_t state)`         | Callback for layer functions, for users.                                               |
@@ -86,9 +85,9 @@ In additional to the functions that you can call, there are a number of callback
 
 ?> For additional details on how you can use these callbacks, check out the [Layer Change Code](custom_quantum_functions.md#layer-change-code) document.
 
-|Check functions                                                  |Description                                                                   |
-|-------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| `layer_state_cmp(cmp_layer_state, layer)` | This checks the `cmp_layer_state` to see if the specific `layer` is enabled. This is meant for use with the layer callbacks. |
-| `layer_state_is(layer)`                   | This checks the layer state to see if the specific `layer` is enabled. (calls `layer_state_cmp` for the global layer state). |
+It is also possible to check the state of a particular layer using the following functions and macros.
 
-!> There is `IS_LAYER_ON(layer)` as well, however the `layer_state_cmp` function has some additional handling to ensure that on layer 0 that it returns the correct value. Otherwise, if you check to see if layer 0 is on, you may get an incorrect value returned. 
+|Function                         |Description                                                                                      |Aliases
+|---------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| `layer_state_is(layer)`         | Checks if the specified `layer` is enabled globally.                                            | `IS_LAYER_ON(layer)`, `IS_LAYER_OFF(layer)`                           |
+| `layer_state_cmp(state, layer)` | Checks `state` to see if the specified `layer` is enabled. Intended for use in layer callbacks. | `IS_LAYER_ON_STATE(state, layer)`, `IS_LAYER_OFF_STATE(state, layer)` |

docs/feature_leader_key.md

@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ If you've ever used Vim, you know what a Leader key is. If not, you're about to
 That's what `KC_LEAD` does. Here's an example:
 
 1. Pick a key on your keyboard you want to use as the Leader key. Assign it the keycode `KC_LEAD`. This key would be dedicated just for this -- it's a single action key, can't be used for anything else.
-2. Include the line `#define LEADER_TIMEOUT 300` in your `config.h`. This sets the timeout for the `KC_LEAD` key.  Specifically, when you press the `KC_LEAD` key, you only have a certain amount of time to complete the Leader Key sequence.  The `300` here sets that to 300ms, and you can increase this value to give you more time to hit the sequence. But any keys pressed during this timeout are intercepted and not sent, so you may want to keep this value low. .  
+2. Include the line `#define LEADER_TIMEOUT 300` in your `config.h`. This sets the timeout for the `KC_LEAD` key.  Specifically, when you press the `KC_LEAD` key, you only have a certain amount of time to complete the Leader Key sequence.  The `300` here sets that to 300ms, and you can increase this value to give you more time to hit the sequence. But any keys pressed during this timeout are intercepted and not sent, so you may want to keep this value low.  
    * By default, this timeout is how long after pressing `KC_LEAD` to complete your entire sequence. This may be very low for some people. So you may want to increase this timeout.  Optionally, you may want to enable the `LEADER_PER_KEY_TIMING` option, which resets the timeout after each key is tapped.  This allows you to maintain a low value here, but still be able to use the longer sequences.   To enable this option, add `#define LEADER_PER_KEY_TIMING` to your `config.h`.
 3. Within your `matrix_scan_user` function, add something like this:
 

docs/feature_led_indicators.md

@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+# LED Indicators
+
+QMK provides methods to read 5 of the LEDs defined in the HID spec:
+
+* Num Lock
+* Caps Lock
+* Scroll Lock
+* Compose
+* Kana
+
+There are three ways to get the lock LED state:
+* by specifying configuration options within `config.h`
+* by implementing `bool led_update_kb(led_t led_state)` or `_user(led_t led_state)`; or
+* by calling `led_t host_keyboard_led_state()`
+
+!> `host_keyboard_led_state()` may already reflect a new value before `led_update_user()` is called.
+
+Two more deprecated functions exist that provide the LED state as a `uint8_t`:
+
+* `uint8_t led_set_kb(uint8_t usb_led)` and `_user(uint8_t usb_led)`
+* `uint8_t host_keyboard_leds()`
+
+## Configuration Options
+
+To configure the indicators, `#define` these in your `config.h`:
+
+|Define               |Default      |Description                                |
+|---------------------|-------------|-------------------------------------------|
+|`LED_NUM_LOCK_PIN`   |*Not defined*|The pin that controls the `Num Lock` LED   |
+|`LED_CAPS_LOCK_PIN`  |*Not defined*|The pin that controls the `Caps Lock` LED  |
+|`LED_SCROLL_LOCK_PIN`|*Not defined*|The pin that controls the `Scroll Lock` LED|
+|`LED_COMPOSE_PIN`    |*Not defined*|The pin that controls the `Compose` LED    |
+|`LED_KANA_PIN`       |*Not defined*|The pin that controls the `Kana` LED       |
+|`LED_PIN_ON_STATE`   |`1`          |The state of the indicator pins when the LED is "on" - `1` for high, `0` for low|
+
+Unless you are designing your own keyboard, you generally should not need to change the above config options.
+
+## `led_update_*()`
+
+When the configuration options do not provide enough flexibility, the API hooks provided allow custom control of the LED behavior. These functions will be called when the state of one of those 5 LEDs changes. It receives the LED state as a struct parameter.
+
+By convention, return `true` from `led_update_user()` to get the `led_update_kb()` hook to run its code, and
+return `false` when you would prefer not to run the code in `led_update_kb()`.
+
+Some examples include:
+
+  - overriding the LEDs to use them for something else like layer indication
+    - return `false` because you do not want the `_kb()` function to run, as it would override your layer behavior.
+  - play a sound when an LED turns on or off.
+    - return `true` because you want the `_kb` function to run, and this is in addition to the default LED behavior.
+
+?> Because the `led_set_*` functions return `void` instead of `bool`, they do not allow for overriding the keyboard LED control, and thus it's recommended to use `led_update_*` instead.
+
+### Example `led_update_kb()` Implementation
+
+```c
+bool led_update_kb(led_t led_state) {
+    bool res = led_update_user(led_state);
+    if(res) {
+        // writePin sets the pin high for 1 and low for 0.
+        // In this example the pins are inverted, setting
+        // it low/0 turns it on, and high/1 turns the LED off.
+        // This behavior depends on whether the LED is between the pin
+        // and VCC or the pin and GND.
+        writePin(B0, !led_state.num_lock);
+        writePin(B1, !led_state.caps_lock);
+        writePin(B2, !led_state.scroll_lock);
+        writePin(B3, !led_state.compose);
+        writePin(B4, !led_state.kana);
+    }
+    return res;
+}
+```
+
+### Example `led_update_user()` Implementation
+
+This incomplete example would play a sound if Caps Lock is turned on or off. It returns `true`, because you also want the LEDs to maintain their state.
+
+```c
+#ifdef AUDIO_ENABLE
+  float caps_on[][2] = SONG(CAPS_LOCK_ON_SOUND);
+  float caps_off[][2] = SONG(CAPS_LOCK_OFF_SOUND);
+#endif
+
+bool led_update_user(led_t led_state) {
+    #ifdef AUDIO_ENABLE
+    static uint8_t caps_state = 0;
+    if (caps_state != led_state.caps_lock) {
+        led_state.caps_lock ? PLAY_SONG(caps_on) : PLAY_SONG(caps_off);
+        caps_state = led_state.caps_lock;
+    }
+    #endif
+    return true;
+}
+```
+
+### `led_update_*` Function Documentation
+
+* Keyboard/Revision: `bool led_update_kb(led_t led_state)`
+* Keymap: `bool led_update_user(led_t led_state)`
+
+## `host_keyboard_led_state()`
+
+Call this function to get the last received LED state as a `led_t`. This is useful for reading the LED state outside `led_update_*`, e.g. in [`matrix_scan_user()`](#matrix-scanning-code).
+
+## Setting Physical LED State
+
+Some keyboard implementations provide convenience methods for setting the state of the physical LEDs.
+
+### Ergodox Boards
+
+The Ergodox implementations provide `ergodox_right_led_1`/`2`/`3_on`/`off()` to turn individual LEDs on or off, as well as `ergodox_right_led_on`/`off(uint8_t led)` to turn them on or off by their index.
+
+In addition, it is possible to specify the brightness level of all LEDs with `ergodox_led_all_set(uint8_t n)`; of individual LEDs with `ergodox_right_led_1`/`2`/`3_set(uint8_t n)`; or by index with `ergodox_right_led_set(uint8_t led, uint8_t n)`.
+
+Ergodox boards also define `LED_BRIGHTNESS_LO` for the lowest brightness and `LED_BRIGHTNESS_HI` for the highest brightness (which is the default).

docs/feature_led_matrix.md

@@ -10,7 +10,8 @@ If you want to use RGB LED's you should use the [RGB Matrix Subsystem](feature_r
 
 There is basic support for addressable LED matrix lighting with the I2C IS31FL3731 RGB controller. To enable it, add this to your `rules.mk`:
 
-    LED_MATRIX_ENABLE = IS31FL3731
+    LED_MATRIX_ENABLE = yes
+    LED_MATRIX_DRIVER = IS31FL3731
     
 You can use between 1 and 4 IS31FL3731 IC's. Do not specify `LED_DRIVER_ADDR_<N>` defines for IC's that are not present on your keyboard. You can define the following items in `config.h`:
 

docs/feature_macros.md

@@ -6,34 +6,34 @@ Macros allow you to send multiple keystrokes when pressing just one key. QMK has
 
 ## The New Way: `SEND_STRING()` & `process_record_user`
 
-Sometimes you just want a key to type out words or phrases. For the most common situations we've provided `SEND_STRING()`, which will type out your string (i.e. a sequence of characters) for you. All ASCII characters that are easily translated to a keycode are supported (e.g. `\n\t`).
+Sometimes you want a key to type out words or phrases. For the most common situations, we've provided `SEND_STRING()`, which will type out a string (i.e. a sequence of characters) for you. All ASCII characters that are easily translatable to a keycode are supported (e.g. `qmk 123\n\t`).
 
 Here is an example `keymap.c` for a two-key keyboard:
 
 ```c
 enum custom_keycodes {
-  QMKBEST = SAFE_RANGE,
+    QMKBEST = SAFE_RANGE,
 };
 
 bool process_record_user(uint16_t keycode, keyrecord_t *record) {
-  switch (keycode) {
+    switch (keycode) {
     case QMKBEST:
-      if (record->event.pressed) {
-        // when keycode QMKBEST is pressed
-        SEND_STRING("QMK is the best thing ever!");
-      } else {
-        // when keycode QMKBEST is released
-      }
-      break;
-
-  }
-  return true;
+        if (record->event.pressed) {
+            // when keycode QMKBEST is pressed
+            SEND_STRING("QMK is the best thing ever!");
+        } else {
+            // when keycode QMKBEST is released
+        }
+        break;
+    }
+    return true;
 };
 
 const uint16_t PROGMEM keymaps[][MATRIX_ROWS][MATRIX_COLS] = {
-  [0] = {
-    {QMKBEST, KC_ESC}
-  }
+    [0] = {
+        {QMKBEST, KC_ESC},
+        // ...
+    },
 };
 ```
 
@@ -49,42 +49,45 @@ You can do that by adding another keycode and adding another case to the switch
 
 ```c
 enum custom_keycodes {
-  QMKBEST = SAFE_RANGE,
-  QMKURL,
-  MY_OTHER_MACRO
+    QMKBEST = SAFE_RANGE,
+    QMKURL,
+    MY_OTHER_MACRO,
 };
 
 bool process_record_user(uint16_t keycode, keyrecord_t *record) {
-  switch (keycode) {
+    switch (keycode) {
     case QMKBEST:
-      if (record->event.pressed) {
-        // when keycode QMKBEST is pressed
-        SEND_STRING("QMK is the best thing ever!");
-      } else {
-        // when keycode QMKBEST is released
-      }
-      break;
+        if (record->event.pressed) {
+            // when keycode QMKBEST is pressed
+            SEND_STRING("QMK is the best thing ever!");
+        } else {
+            // when keycode QMKBEST is released
+        }
+        break;
+
     case QMKURL:
-      if (record->event.pressed) {
-        // when keycode QMKURL is pressed
-        SEND_STRING("https://qmk.fm/\n");
-      } else {
-        // when keycode QMKURL is released
-      }
-      break;
+        if (record->event.pressed) {
+            // when keycode QMKURL is pressed
+            SEND_STRING("https://qmk.fm/\n");
+        } else {
+            // when keycode QMKURL is released
+        }
+        break;
+
     case MY_OTHER_MACRO:
-      if (record->event.pressed) {
-                SEND_STRING(SS_LCTL("ac")); // selects all and copies
-      }
-      break;
-  }
-  return true;
+        if (record->event.pressed) {
+           SEND_STRING(SS_LCTL("ac")); // selects all and copies
+        }
+        break;
+    }
+    return true;
 };
 
 const uint16_t PROGMEM keymaps[][MATRIX_ROWS][MATRIX_COLS] = {
-  [0] = {
-    {MY_CUSTOM_MACRO, MY_OTHER_MACRO}
-  }
+    [0] = {
+        {MY_CUSTOM_MACRO, MY_OTHER_MACRO},
+        // ...
+    },
 };
 ```
 
@@ -161,11 +164,11 @@ There's also a couple of mod shortcuts you can use:
 
 * `SS_LCTL(string)`
 * `SS_LSFT(string)`
-* `SS_LALT(string)`
+* `SS_LALT(string)` or `SS_LOPT(string)`
 * `SS_LGUI(string)`, `SS_LCMD(string)` or `SS_LWIN(string)`
 * `SS_RCTL(string)`
 * `SS_RSFT(string)`
-* `SS_RALT(string)` or `SS_ALGR(string)`
+* `SS_RALT(string)`, `SS_ROPT(string)` or `SS_ALGR(string)`
 * `SS_RGUI(string)`, `SS_RCMD(string)` or `SS_RWIN(string)`
 
 These press the respective modifier, send the supplied string and then release the modifier.

docs/feature_mouse_keys.md

@@ -39,10 +39,11 @@ In your keymap you can use the following keycodes to map key presses to mouse ac
 
 ## Configuring mouse keys
 
-Mouse keys supports two different modes to move the cursor:
+Mouse keys supports three different modes to move the cursor:
 
 * **Accelerated (default):** Holding movement keys accelerates the cursor until it reaches its maximum speed.
 * **Constant:** Holding movement keys moves the cursor at constant speeds.
+* **Combined:** Holding movement keys accelerates the cursor until it reaches its maximum speed, but holding acceleration and movement keys simultaneously moves the cursor at constant speeds.
 
 The same principle applies to scrolling.
 
@@ -120,3 +121,26 @@ Use the following settings if you want to adjust cursor movement or scrolling:
 |`MK_W_INTERVAL_1`    |120          |Time between scroll steps (`KC_ACL1`)      |
 |`MK_W_OFFSET_2`      |1            |Scroll steps per scroll action (`KC_ACL2`) |
 |`MK_W_INTERVAL_2`    |20           |Time between scroll steps (`KC_ACL2`)      |
+
+### Combined mode
+
+This mode functions like **Accelerated** mode, however, you can hold `KC_ACL0`, `KC_ACL1` and `KC_ACL2`
+to momentarily (while held) set the cursor and scroll speeds to constant speeds. When no acceleration
+keys are held, this mode is identical to **Accelerated** mode, and can be modified using all of the
+relevant settings.
+
+* **KC_ACL0:** This acceleration sets your cursor to the slowest possible speed. This is useful for very
+small and detailed movements of the cursor.
+* **KC_ACL1:** This acceleration sets your cursor to half the maximum (user defined) speed.
+* **KC_ACL2:** This acceleration sets your cursor to the maximum (computer defined) speed. This is
+useful for moving the cursor large distances without much accuracy.
+
+To use constant speed mode, you must at least define `MK_COMBINED` in your keymap’s `config.h` file:
+
+```c
+#define MK_COMBINED
+```
+
+## Use with PS/2 Mouse and Pointing Device
+
+Mouse keys button state is shared with [PS/2 mouse](feature_ps2_mouse.md) and [pointing device](feature_pointing_device.md) so mouse keys button presses can be used for clicks and drags.

docs/feature_oled_driver.md

@@ -72,6 +72,43 @@ static void render_logo(void) {
 }
 ```
 
+## Buffer Read Example
+For some purposes, you may need to read the current state of the OLED display
+buffer. The `oled_read_raw` function can be used to safely read bytes from the
+buffer.
+
+In this example, calling `fade_display` in the `oled_task_user` function will
+slowly fade away whatever is on the screen by turning random pixels black over
+time.
+```c
+//Setup some mask which can be or'd with bytes to turn off pixels
+const uint8_t single_bit_masks[8] = {127, 191, 223, 239, 247, 251, 253, 254};
+
+static void fade_display(void) {
+    //Define the reader structure
+    oled_buffer_reader_t reader;
+    uint8_t buff_char;
+    if (random() % 30 == 0) {
+        srand(timer_read());
+        // Fetch a pointer for the buffer byte at index 0. The return structure
+        // will have the pointer and the number of bytes remaining from this
+        // index position if we want to perform a sequential read by
+        // incrementing the buffer pointer
+        reader = oled_read_raw(0);
+        //Loop over the remaining buffer and erase pixels as we go
+        for (uint16_t i = 0; i < reader.remaining_element_count; i++) {
+            //Get the actual byte in the buffer by dereferencing the pointer
+            buff_char = *reader.current_element;
+            if (buff_char != 0) {
+                oled_write_raw_byte(buff_char & single_bit_masks[rand() % 8], i);
+            }
+            //increment the pointer to fetch a new byte during the next loop
+            reader.current_element++;
+        }
+    }
+}
+```
+
 ## Other Examples
 
 In split keyboards, it is very common to have two OLED displays that each render different content and are oriented or flipped differently. You can do this by switching which content to render by using the return value from `is_keyboard_master()` or `is_keyboard_left()` found in `split_util.h`, e.g:
@@ -103,8 +140,8 @@ void oled_task_user(void) {
 |---------------------------|-----------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
 |`OLED_DISPLAY_ADDRESS`     |`0x3C`           |The i2c address of the OLED Display                                                                                       |
 |`OLED_FONT_H`              |`"glcdfont.c"`   |The font code file to use for custom fonts                                                                                |
-|`OLED_FONT_START`          |`0`              |The starting characer index for custom fonts                                                                              |
-|`OLED_FONT_END`            |`223`            |The ending characer index for custom fonts                                                                                |
+|`OLED_FONT_START`          |`0`              |The starting character index for custom fonts                                                                             |
+|`OLED_FONT_END`            |`223`            |The ending character index for custom fonts                                                                               |
 |`OLED_FONT_WIDTH`          |`6`              |The font width                                                                                                            |
 |`OLED_FONT_HEIGHT`         |`8`              |The font height (untested)                                                                                                |
 |`OLED_TIMEOUT`             |`60000`          |Turns off the OLED screen after 60000ms of keyboard inactivity. Helps reduce OLED Burn-in. Set to 0 to disable.           |
@@ -112,6 +149,8 @@ void oled_task_user(void) {
 |`OLED_SCROLL_TIMEOUT_RIGHT`|*Not defined*    |Scroll timeout direction is right when defined, left when undefined.                                                      |
 |`OLED_IC`                  |`OLED_IC_SSD1306`|Set to `OLED_IC_SH1106` if you're using the SH1106 OLED controller.                                                       |
 |`OLED_COLUMN_OFFSET`       |`0`              |(SH1106 only.) Shift output to the right this many pixels.<br />Useful for 128x64 displays centered on a 132x64 SH1106 IC.|
+|`OLED_BRIGHTNESS`          |`255`            |The default brightness level of the OLED, from 0 to 255.                                                                  |
+|`OLED_UPDATE_INTERVAL`     |`0`              |Set the time interval for updating the OLED display in ms. This will improve the matrix scan rate.                        |
 
  ## 128x64 & Custom sized OLED Displays
 
@@ -238,6 +277,10 @@ void oled_write_P(const char *data, bool invert);
 // Remapped to call 'void oled_write_ln(const char *data, bool invert);' on ARM
 void oled_write_ln_P(const char *data, bool invert);
 
+// Returns a pointer to the requested start index in the buffer plus remaining
+// buffer length as struct
+oled_buffer_reader_t oled_read_raw(uint16_t start_index);
+
 // Writes a string to the buffer at current cursor position
 void oled_write_raw(const char *data, uint16_t size);
 
@@ -247,6 +290,10 @@ void oled_write_raw_byte(const char data, uint16_t index);
 // Writes a PROGMEM string to the buffer at current cursor position
 void oled_write_raw_P(const char *data, uint16_t size);
 
+// Sets a specific pixel on or off
+// Coordinates start at top-left and go right and down for positive x and y
+void oled_write_pixel(uint8_t x, uint8_t y, bool on);
+
 // Can be used to manually turn on the screen if it is off
 // Returns true if the screen was on or turns on
 bool oled_on(void);
@@ -255,6 +302,16 @@ bool oled_on(void);
 // Returns true if the screen was off or turns off
 bool oled_off(void);
 
+// Returns true if the oled is currently on, false if it is
+// not
+bool is_oled_on(void);
+
+// Sets the brightness level of the display
+uint8_t oled_set_brightness(uint8_t level);
+
+// Gets the current brightness level of the display
+uint8_t oled_get_brightness(void);
+
 // Basically it's oled_render, but with timeout management and oled_task_user calling!
 void oled_task(void);
 

docs/feature_pointing_device.md

@@ -21,26 +21,28 @@ Keep in mind that a report_mouse_t (here "mouseReport") has the following proper
 * `mouseReport.h` - this is a signed int from -127 to 127 (not 128, this is defined in USB HID spec) representing horizontal scrolling (+ right, - left).
 * `mouseReport.buttons` - this is a uint8_t in which the last 5 bits are used.  These bits represent the mouse button state - bit 3 is mouse button 5, and bit 7 is mouse button 1.
 
-When the mouse report is sent, the x, y, v, and h values are set to 0 (this is done in "pointing_device_send()", which can be overridden to avoid this behavior).  This way, button states persist, but movement will only occur once.  For further customization, both `pointing_device_init` and `pointing_device_task` can be overridden.
+Once you have made the necessary changes to the mouse report, you need to send it:
+
+* `pointing_device_send()` - Sends the mouse report to the host and zeroes out the report. 
+
+When the mouse report is sent, the x, y, v, and h values are set to 0 (this is done in `pointing_device_send()`, which can be overridden to avoid this behavior).  This way, button states persist, but movement will only occur once.  For further customization, both `pointing_device_init` and `pointing_device_task` can be overridden.
 
 In the following example, a custom key is used to click the mouse and scroll 127 units vertically and horizontally, then undo all of that when released - because that's a totally useful function.  Listen, this is an example:
 
 ```c
 case MS_SPECIAL:
-	report_mouse_t currentReport = pointing_device_get_report();
-    if (record->event.pressed)
-    {
+    report_mouse_t currentReport = pointing_device_get_report();
+    if (record->event.pressed) {
         currentReport.v = 127;
-		currentReport.h = 127;
-		currentReport.buttons |= MOUSE_BTN1; //this is defined in report.h
-    }
-    else
-    {
+        currentReport.h = 127;
+        currentReport.buttons |= MOUSE_BTN1;  // this is defined in report.h
+    } else {
         currentReport.v = -127;
         currentReport.h = -127;
         currentReport.buttons &= ~MOUSE_BTN1;
     }
-	pointing_device_set_report(currentReport);
+    pointing_device_set_report(currentReport);
+    pointing_device_send();
     break;
 ```
 

docs/feature_ps2_mouse.md

@@ -266,6 +266,25 @@ To reverse the scroll axes you can put:
 
 into config.h.
 
+### Rotate Mouse Axes :id=rotate-mouse-axes
+
+Transform the output of the device with a clockwise rotation of 90, 180, or 270
+degrees.
+
+When compensating for device orientation, rotate the output the same amount in
+the opposite direction.  E.g. if the normal device orientation is considered to
+be North-facing, compensate as follows:
+
+```c
+#define PS2_MOUSE_ROTATE 270 /* Compensate for East-facing device orientation. */
+```
+```c
+#define PS2_MOUSE_ROTATE 180 /* Compensate for South-facing device orientation. */
+```
+```c
+#define PS2_MOUSE_ROTATE 90 /* Compensate for West-facing device orientation. */
+```
+
 ### Debug Settings :id=debug-settings
 
 To debug the mouse, add `debug_mouse = true` or enable via bootmagic.
@@ -275,3 +294,13 @@ To debug the mouse, add `debug_mouse = true` or enable via bootmagic.
 #define PS2_MOUSE_DEBUG_HID
 #define PS2_MOUSE_DEBUG_RAW
 ```
+
+### Movement Hook :id=movement-hook
+
+Process mouse movement in the keymap before it is sent to the host.  Example
+uses include filtering noise, adding acceleration, and automatically activating
+a layer.  To use, define the following function in your keymap:
+
+```c
+void ps2_mouse_moved_user(report_mouse_t *mouse_report);
+```

docs/feature_rawhid.md

@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+# Raw HID
+
+Raw HID allows for bidirectional communication between QMK and the host computer over an HID interface. This has many potential use cases, such as switching keymaps on the fly or changing RGB LED colors and modes.
+
+There are two main components to getting raw HID working with your keyboard.
+
+## Keyboard firmware
+
+The implementation is fairly straightforward for the firmware.
+In your `rules.mk` add:
+
+```make
+RAW_ENABLE = yes
+```
+
+In your `keymap.c` include `"raw_hid.h"` and implement the following:
+
+```C
+void raw_hid_receive(uint8_t *data, uint8_t length) {
+    // Your code goes here. data is the packet received from host.
+}
+```
+
+The `"raw_hid.h"` header also declares `void raw_hid_send(uint8_t *data, uint8_t length);` which allows sending packets from keyboard to host. As an example, it can also be used for debugging when building your host application by returning all data back to the host.
+
+```C
+void raw_hid_receive(uint8_t *data, uint8_t length) {
+    raw_hid_send(data, length);
+}
+```
+
+`raw_hid_receive` can receive variable size packets from host with maximum length `RAW_EPSIZE`. `raw_hid_send` on the other hand can send packets to host of exactly `RAW_EPSIZE` length, therefore it should be used with data of length `RAW_EPSIZE`.
+
+Make sure to flash raw enabled firmware before proceeding with working on the host side.
+
+## Host (Windows/macOS/Linux)
+
+This is the more complicated part as it will require some digging.
+
+To connect your host computer to your keyboard with raw HID you need four pieces of information about your keyboard:
+
+1. Vendor ID
+2. Product ID
+3. Usage Page
+4. Usage
+
+The first two can easily be found in your keyboard's `config.h` in the keyboard's main directory under `VENDOR_ID` and `PRODUCT_ID`.
+
+The final two can be overridden in your keyboard's `config.h` in the keyboard's main directory by redefining the values: `#define RAW_USAGE_PAGE 0xFF60` and `#define RAW_USAGE_ID 0x61`.
+
+By default, **Usage Page** is `0xFF60` and **Usage** is `0x61`.
+
+### Building your host
+
+You can build your host using any language that has an available HID implementation library if you don't wish to make your own. The ones we know of for popular languages are:
+
+* Node: [node-hid](https://github.com/node-hid/node-hid).
+* C: [hidapi](https://github.com/libusb/hidapi).
+* Java: [purejavahidapi](https://github.com/nyholku/purejavahidapi) and [hid4java](https://github.com/gary-rowe/hid4java).
+* Python: [pyhidapi](https://pypi.org/project/hid/).
+
+This is not an exhaustive cross-platform list but should get you started. There are no special requirements for using raw HID so any HID library should work.
+
+Now that you have all four pieces of information required to open HID interface to your keyboard. All you need to do is use your library's available functions to open the device with its ID parameters.
+
+Note that Vendor ID and Product ID are not actually required to open the device. They are used only to filter to a specific device out of the many HID devices you have plugged in. Many libraries will give you the option to open the device using Product Name or Manufacturer Name instead, `node-hid` being a prime example. This will create issues for devices with builtin USB Hub or any extra HID interfaces where you will have multiple interfaces with the same name or from the same manufacturer. The Vendor ID together with Product ID create a unique designation to a single interface and will not exhibit this problem. Therefore, even if your library doesn't require you to, it is best to use them to avoid issues.
+Unlike Vendor ID and Product ID though, Usage Page and Usage are necessary for successful communication.
+
+It should go without saying that regardless of the library you're using, you should always make sure to close the interface when finished. Depending on the operating system and your particular environment there may be issues connecting to it again afterwards with another client or another instance of the same client if it's not explicitly closed.

docs/feature_rgb_matrix.md

@@ -11,7 +11,8 @@ If you want to use single color LED's you should use the [LED Matrix Subsystem](
 There is basic support for addressable RGB matrix lighting with the I2C IS31FL3731 RGB controller. To enable it, add this to your `rules.mk`:
 
 ```makefile
-RGB_MATRIX_ENABLE = IS31FL3731
+RGB_MATRIX_ENABLE = yes
+RGB_MATRIX_DRIVER = IS31FL3731
 ```
 
 Configure the hardware via your `config.h`:
@@ -62,7 +63,8 @@ Where `Cx_y` is the location of the LED in the matrix defined by [the datasheet]
 There is basic support for addressable RGB matrix lighting with the I2C IS31FL3733 RGB controller. To enable it, add this to your `rules.mk`:
 
 ```makefile
-RGB_MATRIX_ENABLE = IS31FL3733
+RGB_MATRIX_ENABLE = yes
+RGB_MATRIX_DRIVER = IS31FL3733
 ```
 
 Configure the hardware via your `config.h`:
@@ -112,7 +114,8 @@ Where `X_Y` is the location of the LED in the matrix defined by [the datasheet](
 There is basic support for addressable RGB matrix lighting with a WS2811/WS2812{a,b,c} addressable LED strand. To enable it, add this to your `rules.mk`:
 
 ```makefile
-RGB_MATRIX_ENABLE = WS2812
+RGB_MATRIX_ENABLE = yes
+RGB_MATRIX_DRIVER = WS2812
 ```
 
 Configure the hardware via your `config.h`:
@@ -129,7 +132,7 @@ Configure the hardware via your `config.h`:
 From this point forward the configuration is the same for all the drivers. The `led_config_t` struct provides a key electrical matrix to led index lookup table, what the physical position of each LED is on the board, and what type of key or usage the LED if the LED represents. Here is a brief example:
 
 ```c
-const led_config_t g_led_config = { {
+led_config_t g_led_config = { {
   // Key Matrix to LED Index
   {   5, NO_LED, NO_LED,   0 },
   { NO_LED, NO_LED, NO_LED, NO_LED },
@@ -159,15 +162,16 @@ As mentioned earlier, the center of the keyboard by default is expected to be `{
 
 ## Flags :id=flags
 
-|Define                              |Description                                |
-|------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------|
-|`#define HAS_FLAGS(bits, flags)`    |Returns true if `bits` has all `flags` set.|
-|`#define HAS_ANY_FLAGS(bits, flags)`|Returns true if `bits` has any `flags` set.|
-|`#define LED_FLAG_NONE      0x00`   |If this LED has no flags.                  |
-|`#define LED_FLAG_ALL       0xFF`   |If this LED has all flags.                 |
-|`#define LED_FLAG_MODIFIER  0x01`   |If the Key for this LED is a modifier.     |
-|`#define LED_FLAG_UNDERGLOW 0x02`   |If the LED is for underglow.               |
-|`#define LED_FLAG_KEYLIGHT  0x04`   |If the LED is for key backlight.           |
+|Define                      |Value |Description                                      |
+|----------------------------|------|-------------------------------------------------|
+|`HAS_FLAGS(bits, flags)`    |*n/a* |Evaluates to `true` if `bits` has all `flags` set|
+|`HAS_ANY_FLAGS(bits, flags)`|*n/a* |Evaluates to `true` if `bits` has any `flags` set|
+|`LED_FLAG_NONE`             |`0x00`|If this LED has no flags                         |
+|`LED_FLAG_ALL`              |`0xFF`|If this LED has all flags                        |
+|`LED_FLAG_MODIFIER`         |`0x01`|If the LED is on a modifier key                  |
+|`LED_FLAG_UNDERGLOW`        |`0x02`|If the LED is for underglow                      |
+|`LED_FLAG_KEYLIGHT`         |`0x04`|If the LED is for key backlight                  |
+|`LED_FLAG_INDICATOR`        |`0x08`|If the LED is for keyboard state indication      |
 
 ## Keycodes :id=keycodes
 
@@ -186,8 +190,16 @@ All RGB keycodes are currently shared with the RGBLIGHT system:
 |`RGB_VAD`          |          |Decrease value (brightness), increase value when Shift is held                        |
 |`RGB_SPI`          |          |Increase effect speed (does not support eeprom yet), decrease speed when Shift is held|
 |`RGB_SPD`          |          |Decrease effect speed (does not support eeprom yet), increase speed when Shift is held|
+|`RGB_MODE_PLAIN`   |`RGB_M_P `|Static (no animation) mode                                                            |
+|`RGB_MODE_BREATHE` |`RGB_M_B` |Breathing animation mode                                                              |
+|`RGB_MODE_RAINBOW` |`RGB_M_R` |Full gradient scrolling left to right (uses the `RGB_MATRIX_CYCLE_LEFT_RIGHT` mode)   |
+|`RGB_MODE_SWIRL`   |`RGB_M_SW`|Full gradient spinning pinwheel around center of keyboard (uses `RGB_MATRIX_CYCLE_PINWHEEL` mode) |
 
-* `RGB_MODE_*` keycodes will generally work, but are not currently mapped to the correct effects for the RGB Matrix system
+* `RGB_MODE_*` keycodes will generally work, but not all of the modes are currently mapped to the correct effects for the RGB Matrix system.
+
+`RGB_MODE_PLAIN`, `RGB_MODE_BREATHE`, `RGB_MODE_RAINBOW`, and `RGB_MATRIX_SWIRL` are the only ones that are mapped properly. The rest don't have a direct equivalent, and are not mapped. 
+
+!> By default, if you have both the [RGB Light](feature_rgblight.md) and the RGB Matrix feature enabled, these keycodes will work for both features, at the same time. You can disable the keycode functionality by defining the `*_DISABLE_KEYCODES` option for the specific feature.
 
 ## RGB Matrix Effects :id=rgb-matrix-effects
 
@@ -374,7 +386,8 @@ These are defined in [`rgblight_list.h`](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/blo
 ```c
 #define RGB_MATRIX_KEYPRESSES // reacts to keypresses
 #define RGB_MATRIX_KEYRELEASES // reacts to keyreleases (instead of keypresses)
-#define RGB_DISABLE_AFTER_TIMEOUT 0 // number of ticks to wait until disabling effects
+#define RGB_DISABLE_TIMEOUT 0 // number of milliseconds to wait until rgb automatically turns off
+#define RGB_DISABLE_AFTER_TIMEOUT 0 // OBSOLETE: number of ticks to wait until disabling effects
 #define RGB_DISABLE_WHEN_USB_SUSPENDED false // turn off effects when suspended
 #define RGB_MATRIX_LED_PROCESS_LIMIT (DRIVER_LED_TOTAL + 4) / 5 // limits the number of LEDs to process in an animation per task run (increases keyboard responsiveness)
 #define RGB_MATRIX_LED_FLUSH_LIMIT 16 // limits in milliseconds how frequently an animation will update the LEDs. 16 (16ms) is equivalent to limiting to 60fps (increases keyboard responsiveness)
@@ -384,6 +397,7 @@ These are defined in [`rgblight_list.h`](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/blo
 #define RGB_MATRIX_STARTUP_SAT 255 // Sets the default saturation value, if none has been set
 #define RGB_MATRIX_STARTUP_VAL RGB_MATRIX_MAXIMUM_BRIGHTNESS // Sets the default brightness value, if none has been set
 #define RGB_MATRIX_STARTUP_SPD 127 // Sets the default animation speed, if none has been set
+#define RGB_MATRIX_DISABLE_KEYCODES // disables control of rgb matrix by keycodes (must use code functions to control the feature)
 ```
 
 ## EEPROM storage :id=eeprom-storage
@@ -411,8 +425,8 @@ Where `28` is an unused index from `eeconfig.h`.
 |`rgb_matrix_toggle_noeeprom()`              |Toggle effect range LEDs between on and off (not written to EEPROM) |
 |`rgb_matrix_enable()`                       |Turn effect range LEDs on, based on their previous state |
 |`rgb_matrix_enable_noeeprom()`              |Turn effect range LEDs on, based on their previous state (not written to EEPROM) |
-|`rgb_matrix_disable()`                      |Turn effect range LEDs off |
-|`rgb_matrix_disable_noeeprom()`             |Turn effect range LEDs off (not written to EEPROM) |
+|`rgb_matrix_disable()`                      |Turn effect range LEDs off, based on their previous state |
+|`rgb_matrix_disable_noeeprom()`             |Turn effect range LEDs off, based on their previous state (not written to EEPROM) |
 
 ### Change Effect Mode :id=change-effect-mode
 |Function                                    |Description  |
@@ -420,29 +434,45 @@ Where `28` is an unused index from `eeconfig.h`.
 |`rgb_matrix_mode(mode)`                     |Set the mode, if RGB animations are enabled |
 |`rgb_matrix_mode_noeeprom(mode)`            |Set the mode, if RGB animations are enabled (not written to EEPROM) |
 |`rgb_matrix_step()`                         |Change the mode to the next RGB animation in the list of enabled RGB animations |
+|`rgb_matrix_step_noeeprom()`                |Change the mode to the next RGB animation in the list of enabled RGB animations (not written to EEPROM) |
 |`rgb_matrix_step_reverse()`                 |Change the mode to the previous RGB animation in the list of enabled RGB animations |
-|`rgb_matrix_increase_speed()`               |Increases the speed of the animations |
-|`rgb_matrix_decrease_speed()`               |Decreases the speed of the animations |
+|`rgb_matrix_step_reverse_noeeprom()`        |Change the mode to the previous RGB animation in the list of enabled RGB animations (not written to EEPROM) |
+|`rgb_matrix_increase_speed()`               |Increase the speed of the animations |
+|`rgb_matrix_increase_speed_noeeprom()`      |Increase the speed of the animations (not written to EEPROM) |
+|`rgb_matrix_decrease_speed()`               |Decrease the speed of the animations |
+|`rgb_matrix_decrease_speed_noeeprom()`      |Decrease the speed of the animations (not written to EEPROM) |
+|`rgb_matrix_set_speed(speed)`               |Set the speed of the animations to the given value where `speed` is between 0 and 255 |
+|`rgb_matrix_set_speed_noeeprom(speed)`      |Set the speed of the animations to the given value where `speed` is between 0 and 255 (not written to EEPROM) |
 
 ### Change Color :id=change-color
 |Function                                    |Description  |
 |--------------------------------------------|-------------|
 |`rgb_matrix_increase_hue()`                 |Increase the hue for effect range LEDs. This wraps around at maximum hue |
+|`rgb_matrix_increase_hue_noeeprom()`        |Increase the hue for effect range LEDs. This wraps around at maximum hue (not written to EEPROM) |
 |`rgb_matrix_decrease_hue()`                 |Decrease the hue for effect range LEDs. This wraps around at minimum hue |
+|`rgb_matrix_decrease_hue_noeeprom()`        |Decrease the hue for effect range LEDs. This wraps around at minimum hue (not written to EEPROM) |
 |`rgb_matrix_increase_sat()`                 |Increase the saturation for effect range LEDs. This wraps around at maximum saturation |
+|`rgb_matrix_increase_sat_noeeprom()`        |Increase the saturation for effect range LEDs. This wraps around at maximum saturation (not written to EEPROM) |
 |`rgb_matrix_decrease_sat()`                 |Decrease the saturation for effect range LEDs. This wraps around at minimum saturation |
+|`rgb_matrix_decrease_sat_noeeprom()`        |Decrease the saturation for effect range LEDs. This wraps around at minimum saturation (not written to EEPROM) |
 |`rgb_matrix_increase_val()`                 |Increase the value for effect range LEDs. This wraps around at maximum value |
+|`rgb_matrix_increase_val_noeeprom()`        |Increase the value for effect range LEDs. This wraps around at maximum value (not written to EEPROM) |
 |`rgb_matrix_decrease_val()`                 |Decrease the value for effect range LEDs. This wraps around at minimum value |
+|`rgb_matrix_decrease_val_noeeprom()`        |Decrease the value for effect range LEDs. This wraps around at minimum value (not written to EEPROM) |
 |`rgb_matrix_sethsv(h, s, v)`                |Set LEDs to the given HSV value where `h`/`s`/`v` are between 0 and 255 |
 |`rgb_matrix_sethsv_noeeprom(h, s, v)`       |Set LEDs to the given HSV value where `h`/`s`/`v` are between 0 and 255 (not written to EEPROM) |
 
 ### Query Current Status :id=query-current-status
-|Function               |Description      |
-|-----------------------|-----------------|
-|`rgb_matrix_get_mode()`  |Get current mode |
-|`rgb_matrix_get_hue()`   |Get current hue  |
-|`rgb_matrix_get_sat()`   |Get current sat  |
-|`rgb_matrix_get_val()`   |Get current val  |
+|Function                         |Description                |
+|---------------------------------|---------------------------|
+|`rgb_matrix_is_enabled()`        |Gets current on/off status |
+|`rgb_matrix_get_mode()`          |Gets current mode          |
+|`rgb_matrix_get_hue()`           |Gets current hue           |
+|`rgb_matrix_get_sat()`           |Gets current sat           |
+|`rgb_matrix_get_val()`           |Gets current val           |
+|`rgb_matrix_get_hsv()`           |Gets hue, sat, and val and returns a [`HSV` structure](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/blob/7ba6456c0b2e041bb9f97dbed265c5b8b4b12192/quantum/color.h#L56-L61)|
+|`rgb_matrix_get_speed()`         |Gets current speed         |
+|`rgb_matrix_get_suspend_state()` |Gets current suspend state |
 
 ## Callbacks :id=callbacks
 
@@ -455,6 +485,14 @@ void rgb_matrix_indicators_kb(void) {
 }
 ```
 
+In addition, there are the advanced indicator functions.  These are aimed at those with heavily customized displays, where rendering every LED per cycle is expensive.  Such as some of the "drashna" layouts.  This includes a special macro to help make this easier to use: `RGB_MATRIX_INDICATOR_SET_COLOR(i, r, g, b)`.
+
+```c
+void rgb_matrix_indicators_advanced_user(uint8_t led_min, uint8_t led_max) {
+    RGB_MATRIX_INDICATOR_SET_COLOR(index, red, green, blue);
+}
+```
+
 ### Suspended state :id=suspended-state
 To use the suspend feature, make sure that `#define RGB_DISABLE_WHEN_USB_SUSPENDED true` is added to the `config.h` file. 
 

docs/feature_rgblight.md

@@ -41,6 +41,8 @@ Changing the **Hue** cycles around the circle.<br>
 Changing the **Saturation** moves between the inner and outer sections of the wheel, affecting the intensity of the color.<br>
 Changing the **Value** sets the overall brightness.<br>
 
+![QMK Color Wheel with HSV Values](https://i.imgur.com/vkYVo66.jpg)
+
 ## Keycodes
 
 |Key                |Aliases   |Description                                                         |
@@ -64,6 +66,9 @@ Changing the **Value** sets the overall brightness.<br>
 |`RGB_MODE_GRADIENT`|`RGB_M_G` |Static gradient animation mode                                      |
 |`RGB_MODE_RGBTEST` |`RGB_M_T` |Red, Green, Blue test animation mode                                |
 
+!> By default, if you have both the RGB Light and the [RGB Matrix](feature_rgb_matrix.md) feature enabled, these keycodes will work for both features, at the same time. You can disable the keycode functionality by defining the `*_DISABLE_KEYCODES` option for the specific feature.
+
+
 ## Configuration
 
 Your RGB lighting can be configured by placing these `#define`s in your `config.h`:
@@ -76,6 +81,7 @@ Your RGB lighting can be configured by placing these `#define`s in your `config.
 |`RGBLIGHT_LIMIT_VAL` |`255`        |The maximum brightness level                                                 |
 |`RGBLIGHT_SLEEP`     |*Not defined*|If defined, the RGB lighting will be switched off when the host goes to sleep|
 |`RGBLIGHT_SPLIT`     |*Not defined*|If defined, synchronization functionality for split keyboards is added|
+|`RGBLIGHT_DISABLE_KEYCODES`|*not defined*|If defined, disables the ability to control RGB Light from the keycodes. You must use code functions to control the feature| 
 
 ## Effects and Animations
 
@@ -94,6 +100,7 @@ if `RGBLIGHT_EFFECT_xxxx` or `RGBLIGHT_ANIMATIONS` is defined, you also have a n
 |`RGBLIGHT_MODE_STATIC_GRADIENT`| 0,1,..,9        |Static gradient                        |
 |`RGBLIGHT_MODE_RGB_TEST`     | *None*            |RGB Test                               |
 |`RGBLIGHT_MODE_ALTERNATING`  | *None*            |Alternating                            |
+|`RGBLIGHT_MODE_TWINKLE`      | 0,1,2,3,4,5       |Twinkle                                |
 
 Check out [this video](https://youtube.com/watch?v=VKrpPAHlisY) for a demonstration.
 
@@ -103,8 +110,8 @@ Note: For versions older than 0.6.117, The mode numbers were written directly. I
 
 Use these defines to add or remove animations from the firmware. When you are running low on flash space, it can be helpful to disable animations you are not using.
 
-|Define                              |Default      |Description                                                                          |
-|------------------------------------|-------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+|Define                              |Default      |Description                                                              |
+|------------------------------------|-------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
 |`RGBLIGHT_ANIMATIONS`               |*Not defined*|Enable all additional animation modes.                                   |
 |`RGBLIGHT_EFFECT_ALTERNATING`       |*Not defined*|Enable alternating animation mode.                                       |
 |`RGBLIGHT_EFFECT_BREATHING`         |*Not defined*|Enable breathing animation mode.                                         |
@@ -115,22 +122,25 @@ Use these defines to add or remove animations from the firmware. When you are ru
 |`RGBLIGHT_EFFECT_RGB_TEST`          |*Not defined*|Enable RGB test animation mode.                                          |
 |`RGBLIGHT_EFFECT_SNAKE`             |*Not defined*|Enable snake animation mode.                                             |
 |`RGBLIGHT_EFFECT_STATIC_GRADIENT`   |*Not defined*|Enable static gradient mode.                                             |
+|`RGBLIGHT_EFFECT_TWINKLE`           |*Not defined*|Enable twinkle animation mode.                                           |
 
 ### Effect and Animation Settings
 
 The following options are used to tweak the various animations:
 
-|Define                              |Default      |Description                                                                          |
-|------------------------------------|-------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+|Define                              |Default      |Description                                                                                    |
+|------------------------------------|-------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
 |`RGBLIGHT_EFFECT_BREATHE_CENTER`    |*Not defined*|If defined, used to calculate the curve for the breathing animation. Valid values are 1.0 to 2.7 |
-|`RGBLIGHT_EFFECT_BREATHE_MAX`       |`255`        |The maximum brightness for the breathing mode. Valid values are 1 to 255             |
-|`RGBLIGHT_EFFECT_CHRISTMAS_INTERVAL`|`1000`       |How long to wait between light changes for the "Christmas" animation, in milliseconds|
-|`RGBLIGHT_EFFECT_CHRISTMAS_STEP`    |`2`          |The number of LEDs to group the red/green colors by for the "Christmas" animation    |
-|`RGBLIGHT_EFFECT_KNIGHT_LED_NUM`    |`RGBLED_NUM` |The number of LEDs to have the "Knight" animation travel                             |
-|`RGBLIGHT_EFFECT_KNIGHT_LENGTH`     |`3`          |The number of LEDs to light up for the "Knight" animation                            |
-|`RGBLIGHT_EFFECT_KNIGHT_OFFSET`     |`0`          |The number of LEDs to start the "Knight" animation from the start of the strip by    |
-|`RGBLIGHT_RAINBOW_SWIRL_RANGE`      |`255`        |Range adjustment for the rainbow swirl effect to get different swirls                |
-|`RGBLIGHT_EFFECT_SNAKE_LENGTH`      |`4`          |The number of LEDs to light up for the "Snake" animation                             |
+|`RGBLIGHT_EFFECT_BREATHE_MAX`       |`255`        |The maximum brightness for the breathing mode. Valid values are 1 to 255                       |
+|`RGBLIGHT_EFFECT_CHRISTMAS_INTERVAL`|`40`         |How long (in milliseconds) to wait between animation steps for the "Christmas" animation       |
+|`RGBLIGHT_EFFECT_CHRISTMAS_STEP`    |`2`          |The number of LEDs to group the red/green colors by for the "Christmas" animation              |
+|`RGBLIGHT_EFFECT_KNIGHT_LED_NUM`    |`RGBLED_NUM` |The number of LEDs to have the "Knight" animation travel                                       |
+|`RGBLIGHT_EFFECT_KNIGHT_LENGTH`     |`3`          |The number of LEDs to light up for the "Knight" animation                                      |
+|`RGBLIGHT_EFFECT_KNIGHT_OFFSET`     |`0`          |The number of LEDs to start the "Knight" animation from the start of the strip by              |
+|`RGBLIGHT_RAINBOW_SWIRL_RANGE`      |`255`        |Range adjustment for the rainbow swirl effect to get different swirls                          |
+|`RGBLIGHT_EFFECT_SNAKE_LENGTH`      |`4`          |The number of LEDs to light up for the "Snake" animation                                       |
+|`RGBLIGHT_EFFECT_TWINKLE_LIFE`      |`75`         |Adjusts how quickly each LED brightens and dims when twinkling (in animation steps)            |
+|`RGBLIGHT_EFFECT_TWINKLE_PROBABILITY`|`1/127`     |Adjusts how likely each LED is to twinkle (on each animation step)                             |
 
 ### Example Usage to Reduce Memory Footprint
   1. Remove `RGBLIGHT_ANIMATIONS` from `config.h`.
@@ -168,6 +178,9 @@ const uint8_t RGBLED_SNAKE_INTERVALS[] PROGMEM = {100, 50, 20};
 // How long (in milliseconds) to wait between animation steps for each of the "Knight" animations
 const uint8_t RGBLED_KNIGHT_INTERVALS[] PROGMEM = {127, 63, 31};
 
+// How long (in milliseconds) to wait between animation steps for each of the "Twinkle" animations
+const uint8_t RGBLED_TWINKLE_INTERVALS[] PROGMEM = {50, 25, 10};
+
 // These control which hues are selected for each of the "Static gradient" modes
 const uint8_t RGBLED_GRADIENT_RANGES[] PROGMEM = {255, 170, 127, 85, 64};
 ```
@@ -177,6 +190,10 @@ const uint8_t RGBLED_GRADIENT_RANGES[] PROGMEM = {255, 170, 127, 85, 64};
 By including `#define RGBLIGHT_LAYERS` in your `config.h` file you can enable lighting layers. These make
 it easy to use your underglow LEDs as status indicators to show which keyboard layer is currently active, or the state of caps lock, all without disrupting any animations. [Here's a video](https://youtu.be/uLGE1epbmdY) showing an example of what you can do.
 
+### Defining Lighting Layers :id=defining-lighting-layers
+
+By default, 8 layers are possible. This can be expanded to as many as 32 by overriding the definition of `RGBLIGHT_MAX_LAYERS` in `config.h` (e.g. `#define RGBLIGHT_MAX_LAYERS 32`). Please note, if you use a split keyboard, you will need to flash both sides of the split after changing this. Also, increasing the maximum will increase the firmware size, and will slow sync on split keyboards.
+
 To define a layer, we modify `keymap.c` to list out LED ranges and the colors we want to overlay on them using an array of `rgblight_segment_t` using the `RGBLIGHT_LAYER_SEGMENTS` macro. We can define multiple layers and enable/disable them independently:
 
 ```c
@@ -211,8 +228,12 @@ void keyboard_post_init_user(void) {
     rgblight_layers = my_rgb_layers;
 }
 ```
+Note: For split keyboards with two controllers, both sides need to be flashed when updating the contents of rgblight_layers.
 
-Finally, we enable and disable the lighting layers whenever the state of the keyboard changes:
+### Enabling and disabling lighting layers :id=enabling-lighting-layers
+
+Everything above just configured the definition of each lighting layer.
+We can now enable and disable the lighting layers whenever the state of the keyboard changes:
 
 ```c
 layer_state_t layer_state_set_user(layer_state_t state) {
@@ -228,7 +249,44 @@ bool led_update_user(led_t led_state) {
 }
 ```
 
-Note: For split keyboards with two controllers, both sides need to be flashed when updating the contents of rgblight_layers.
+### Lighting layer blink :id=lighting-layer-blink
+
+By including `#define RGBLIGHT_LAYER_BLINK` in your `config.h` file you can turn a lighting
+layer on for a specified duration. Once the specified number of milliseconds has elapsed
+the layer will be turned off. This is useful, e.g., if you want to acknowledge some
+action (e.g. toggling some setting):
+
+```c
+const rgblight_segment_t PROGMEM _yes_layer[] = RGBLIGHT_LAYER_SEGMENTS( {9, 6, HSV_GREEN} );
+const rgblight_segment_t PROGMEM _no_layer[] = RGBLIGHT_LAYER_SEGMENTS( {9, 6, HSV_RED} );
+
+const rgblight_segment_t* const PROGMEM _rgb_layers[] =
+    RGBLIGHT_LAYERS_LIST( _yes_layer, _no_layer );
+
+void keyboard_post_init_user(void) {
+    rgblight_layers = _rgb_layers;
+}
+
+// Note we user post_process_record_user because we want the state
+// after the flag has been flipped...
+void post_process_record_user(uint16_t keycode, keyrecord_t *record) {
+    switch (keycode) {
+        case DEBUG:
+            rgblight_blink_layer(debug_enable ? 0 : 1, 500);
+            break;
+
+        case NK_TOGG:
+        case NK_ON:
+        case NK_OFF:
+            rgblight_blink_layer(keymap_config.nkro ? 0 : 1, 500);
+            break;
+    }
+}
+```
+
+### Overriding RGB Lighting on/off status
+
+Normally lighting layers are not shown when RGB Lighting is disabled (e.g. with `RGB_TOG` keycode). If you would like lighting layers to work even when the RGB Lighting is otherwise off, add `#define RGBLIGHT_LAYERS_OVERRIDE_RGB_OFF` to your `config.h`.
 
 ## Functions
 
@@ -321,6 +379,17 @@ rgblight_sethsv(HSV_GREEN, 2); // led 2
 |`rgblight_sethsv(h, s, v)`                  |Set effect range LEDs to the given HSV value where `h`/`s`/`v` are between 0 and 255 |
 |`rgblight_sethsv_noeeprom(h, s, v)`         |Set effect range LEDs to the given HSV value where `h`/`s`/`v` are between 0 and 255 (not written to EEPROM) |
 
+#### Speed functions
+|Function                                    |Description  |
+|--------------------------------------------|-------------|
+|`rgblight_increase_speed()`                 |Increases the animation speed |
+|`rgblight_increase_speed_noeeprom()`        |Increases the animation speed (not written to EEPROM) |
+|`rgblight_decrease_speed()`                 |Decreases the animation speed |
+|`rgblight_decrease_speed_noeeprom()`        |Decreases the animation speed (not written to EEPROM) |
+|`rgblight_set_speed()`                      |Sets the speed. Value is between 0 and 255 |
+|`rgblight_set_speed_noeeprom()`             |Sets the speed. Value is between 0 and 255 (not written to EEPROM) |
+
+
 #### layer functions
 |Function                                    |Description  |
 |--------------------------------------------|-------------|
@@ -328,12 +397,14 @@ rgblight_sethsv(HSV_GREEN, 2); // led 2
 |`rgblight_set_layer_state(i, is_on)`        |Enable or disable lighting layer `i` based on value of `bool is_on` |
 
 #### query
-|Function               |Description      |
-|-----------------------|-----------------|
-|`rgblight_get_mode()`  |Get current mode |
-|`rgblight_get_hue()`   |Get current hue  |
-|`rgblight_get_sat()`   |Get current sat  |
-|`rgblight_get_val()`   |Get current val  |
+|Function               |Description                |
+|-----------------------|---------------------------|
+|`rgblight_is_enabled()`|Gets current on/off status |
+|`rgblight_get_mode()`  |Gets current mode          |
+|`rgblight_get_hue()`   |Gets current hue           |
+|`rgblight_get_sat()`   |Gets current sat           |
+|`rgblight_get_val()`   |Gets current val           |
+|`rgblight_get_speed()` |Gets current speed         |
 
 ## Colors
 

docs/feature_sequencer.md

@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+# Sequencer
+
+Since QMK has experimental support for MIDI, you can now turn your keyboard into a [step sequencer](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Music_sequencer#Step_sequencers)!
+
+!> **IMPORTANT:** This feature is highly experimental, it has only been tested on a Planck EZ so far. Also, the scope will be limited to support the drum machine use-case to start with.
+
+## Enable the step sequencer
+
+Add the following line to your `rules.mk`:
+
+```make
+SEQUENCER_ENABLE = yes
+```
+
+By default the sequencer has 16 steps, but you can override this setting in your `config.h`:
+
+```c
+#define SEQUENCER_STEPS 32
+```
+
+## Tracks
+
+You can program up to 8 independent tracks with the step sequencer. Select the tracks you want to edit, enable or disable some steps, and start the sequence!
+
+## Resolutions
+
+While the tempo defines the absolute speed at which the sequencer goes through the steps, the resolution defines the granularity of these steps (from coarser to finer).
+
+|Resolution   |Description            |
+|----------   |-----------            |
+|`SQ_RES_2`   |Every other beat       |
+|`SQ_RES_2T`  |Every 1.5 beats        |
+|`SQ_RES_4`   |Every beat             |
+|`SQ_RES_4T`  |Three times per 2 beats|
+|`SQ_RES_8`   |Twice per beat         |
+|`SQ_RES_8T`  |Three times per beat   |
+|`SQ_RES_16`  |Four times per beat    |
+|`SQ_RES_16T` |Six times per beat     |
+|`SQ_RES_32`  |Eight times per beat   |
+
+## Keycodes
+
+|Keycode  |Description                                        |
+|-------  |-----------                                        |
+|`SQ_ON`  |Start the step sequencer                           |
+|`SQ_OFF` |Stop the step sequencer                            |
+|`SQ_TOG` |Toggle the step sequencer playback                 |
+|`SQ_SALL`|Enable all the steps                               |
+|`SQ_SCLR`|Disable all the steps                              |
+|`SQ_S(n)`|Toggle the step `n`                                |
+|`SQ_TMPD`|Decrease the tempo                                 |
+|`SQ_TMPU`|Increase the tempo                                 |
+|`SQ_R(n)`|Set the resolution to n                            |
+|`SQ_RESD`|Change to the slower resolution                    |
+|`SQ_RESU`|Change to the faster resolution                    |
+|`SQ_T(n)`|Set `n` as the only active track or deactivate all |
+
+## Functions
+
+|Function                                                             |Description                                            |
+|--------                                                             |-----------                                            |
+|`bool is_sequencer_on(void);`                                        |Return whether the sequencer is playing                |
+|`void sequencer_toggle(void);`                                       |Toggle the step sequencer playback                     |
+|`void sequencer_on(void);`                                           |Start the step sequencer                               |
+|`void sequencer_off(void);`                                          |Stop the step sequencer                                |
+|`bool is_sequencer_step_on(uint8_t step);`                           |Return whether the step is currently enabled           |
+|`void sequencer_set_step(uint8_t step, bool value);`                 |Enable or disable the step                             |
+|`void sequencer_set_step_on();`                                      |Enable the step                                        |
+|`void sequencer_set_step_off();`                                     |Disable the step                                       |
+|`void sequencer_toggle_step(uint8_t step);`                          |Toggle the step                                        |
+|`void sequencer_set_all_steps(bool value);`                          |Enable or disable all the steps                        |
+|`void sequencer_set_all_steps_on();`                                 |Enable all the steps                                   |
+|`void sequencer_set_all_steps_off();`                                |Disable all the steps                                  |
+|`uint8_t sequencer_get_tempo(void);`                                 |Return the current tempo                               |
+|`void sequencer_set_tempo(uint8_t tempo);`                           |Set the tempo to `tempo` (between 1 and 255)           |
+|`void sequencer_increase_tempo(void);`                               |Increase the tempo                                     |
+|`void sequencer_decrease_tempo(void);`                               |Decrease the tempo                                     |
+|`sequencer_resolution_t sequencer_get_resolution(void);`             |Return the current resolution                          |
+|`void sequencer_set_resolution(sequencer_resolution_t resolution);`  |Set the resolution to `resolution`                     |
+|`void sequencer_increase_resolution(void);`                          |Change to the faster resolution                        |
+|`void sequencer_decrease_resolution(void);`                          |Change to the slower resolution                        |
+|`bool is_sequencer_track_active(uint8_t track);`                     |Return whether the track is active                     |
+|`void sequencer_set_track_activation(uint8_t track, bool value);`    |Activate or deactivate the `track`                     |
+|`void sequencer_toggle_track_activation(uint8_t track);`             |Toggle the `track`                                     |
+|`void sequencer_activate_track(uint8_t track);`                      |Activate the `track`                                   |
+|`void sequencer_deactivate_track(uint8_t track);`                    |Deactivate the `track`                                 |
+|`void sequencer_toggle_single_active_track(uint8_t track);`          |Set `track` as the only active track or deactivate all |
+

docs/feature_split_keyboard.md

@@ -8,9 +8,20 @@ QMK Firmware has a generic implementation that is usable by any board, as well a
 
 For this, we will mostly be talking about the generic implementation used by the Let's Split and other keyboards. 
 
-!> ARM is not yet supported for Split Keyboards.  Progress is being made, but we are not quite there, yet. 
+!> ARM is not yet fully supported for Split Keyboards and has many limitations. Progress is being made, but we have not yet reached 100% feature parity.
 
 
+## Compatibility Overview
+
+| Transport                    | AVR                | ARM                |
+|------------------------------|--------------------|--------------------|
+| ['serial'](serial_driver.md) | :heavy_check_mark: | :white_check_mark: <sup>1</sup> |
+| I2C                          | :heavy_check_mark: |                    |
+
+Notes:
+
+1. Both hardware and software limitations are detailed within the [driver documentation](serial_driver.md).
+
 ## Hardware Configuration
 
 This assumes that you're using two Pro Micro-compatible controllers, and are using TRRS jacks to connect to two halves. 
@@ -37,11 +48,12 @@ However, USB cables, SATA cables, and even just 4 wires have been known to be us
 
 ### Serial Wiring
 
-The 3 wires of the TRS/TRRS cable need to connect GND, VCC, and D0 (aka PDO or pin 3) between the two Pro Micros. 
+The 3 wires of the TRS/TRRS cable need to connect GND, VCC, and D0/D1/D2/D3 (aka PD0/PD1/PD2/PD3) between the two Pro Micros. 
 
 ?> Note that the pin used here is actually set by `SOFT_SERIAL_PIN` below.
 
-![serial wiring](https://i.imgur.com/C3D1GAQ.png)
+<img alt="sk-pd0-connection-mono" src="https://user-images.githubusercontent.com/2170248/92296488-28e9ad80-ef70-11ea-98be-c40cb48a0319.JPG" width="48%"/>
+<img alt="sk-pd2-connection-mono" src="https://user-images.githubusercontent.com/2170248/92296490-2d15cb00-ef70-11ea-801f-5ace313013e6.JPG" width="48%"/>
 
 ### I<sup>2</sup>C Wiring
 
@@ -49,7 +61,7 @@ The 4 wires of the TRRS cable need to connect GND, VCC, and SCL and SDA (aka PD0
 
 The pull-up resistors may be placed on either half. If you wish to use the halves independently, it is also possible to use 4 resistors and have the pull-ups in both halves.
 
-![I2C wiring](https://i.imgur.com/Hbzhc6E.png)
+<img alt="sk-i2c-connection-mono" src="https://user-images.githubusercontent.com/2170248/92297182-92b98580-ef77-11ea-9d7d-d6033914af43.JPG" width="50%"/>
 
 ## Firmware Configuration
 
@@ -79,6 +91,24 @@ You can configure the firmware to read a pin on the controller to determine hand
 
 This will read the specified pin. If it's high, then the controller assumes it is the left hand, and if it's low, it's assumed to be the right side. 
 
+#### Handedness by Matrix Pin
+
+You can configure the firmware to read key matrix pins on the controller to determine handedness.  To do this, add the following to your `config.h` file:
+
+```c
+#define SPLIT_HAND_MATRIX_GRID D0, F1
+```
+
+The first pin is the output pin and the second is the input pin.
+
+Some keyboards have unused intersections in the key matrix. This setting uses one of these unused intersections to determine the handness.
+
+Normally, when a diode is connected to an intersection, it is judged to be left. If you add the following definition, it will be judged to be right.
+
+```c
+#define SPLIT_HAND_MATRIX_GRID_LOW_IS_RIGHT
+```
+
 #### Handedness by EEPROM
 
 This method sets the keyboard's handedness by setting a flag in the persistent storage (`EEPROM`).  This is checked when the controller first starts up, and determines what half the keyboard is, and how to orient the keyboard layout. 
@@ -207,6 +237,26 @@ This sets the maximum timeout when detecting master/slave when using `SPLIT_USB_
 ```
 This sets the poll frequency when detecting master/slave when using `SPLIT_USB_DETECT`
 
+## Hardware Considerations and Mods
+
+While most any Pro Micro can be used, micro controllers like the AVR Teensys and most (if not all) ARM boards require the Split USB Detect.
+
+However, with the Teensy 2.0 and Teensy++ 2.0, there is a simple hardware mod that you can perform to add VBUS detection, so you don't need the Split USB detection option.
+
+You'll only need a few things:
+
+* A knife (x-acto knife, ideally)
+* A solder station or hot air station
+* An appropriate Schottky diode, such as the [PMEG2005EH](https://www.digikey.com/en/products/detail/nexperia-usa-inc/PMEG2005EH,115/1589924)
+
+You'll need to cut the small trace between the 5V and center pads on the back of the Teensy.
+
+Once you have done that, you will want to solder the diode from the 5V pad to the center pad.
+
+You may need to use the 5V pad from the regulator block above as the pads were too small and placed too closely together to place the Schottky diode properly.
+
+![Teensy++ 2.0](https://i.imgur.com/BPEC5n5.png)
+
 ## Additional Resources
 
 Nicinabox has a [very nice and detailed guide](https://github.com/nicinabox/lets-split-guide) for the Let's Split keyboard, that covers most everything you need to know, including troubleshooting information. 

docs/feature_stenography.md

@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ On the display tab click 'Open stroke display'. With Plover disabled you should
 
 ## Interfacing with the code :id=interfacing-with-the-code
 
-The steno code has three interceptible hooks. If you define these functions, they will be called at certain points in processing; if they return true, processing continues, otherwise it's assumed you handled things.
+The steno code has three interceptable hooks. If you define these functions, they will be called at certain points in processing; if they return true, processing continues, otherwise it's assumed you handled things.
 
 ```c
 bool send_steno_chord_user(steno_mode_t mode, uint8_t chord[6]);

docs/feature_swap_hands.md

@@ -28,3 +28,4 @@ Note that the array indices are reversed same as the matrix and the values are o
 |`SH_MOFF`  |Momentarily turns off swap.                                              |
 |`SH_TG`    |Toggles swap on and off with every key press.                            |
 |`SH_TT`    |Toggles with a tap; momentary when held.                                 |
+|`SH_OS`    |One shot swap hands: toggles while pressed or until next key press.      |

docs/feature_tap_dance.md

@@ -1,31 +1,24 @@
 # Tap Dance: A Single Key Can Do 3, 5, or 100 Different Things
 
-## Introduction
+## Introduction :id=introduction
+
 Hit the semicolon key once, send a semicolon. Hit it twice, rapidly -- send a colon. Hit it three times, and your keyboard's LEDs do a wild dance. That's just one example of what Tap Dance can do. It's one of the nicest community-contributed features in the firmware, conceived and created by [algernon](https://github.com/algernon) in [#451](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pull/451). Here's how algernon describes the feature:
 
 With this feature one can specify keys that behave differently, based on the amount of times they have been tapped, and when interrupted, they get handled before the interrupter.
 
-## Explanatory Comparison with `ACTION_FUNCTION_TAP`
-`ACTION_FUNCTION_TAP` can offer similar functionality to Tap Dance, but it's worth noting some important differences. To do this, let's explore a certain setup! We want one key to send `Space` on single-tap, but `Enter` on double-tap.
+## How to Use Tap Dance :id=how-to-use
 
-With `ACTION_FUNCTION_TAP`, it is quite a rain-dance to set this up, and has the problem that when the sequence is interrupted, the interrupting key will be sent first. Thus, `SPC a` will result in `a SPC` being sent, if `SPC` and `a` are both typed within `TAPPING_TERM`. With the Tap Dance feature, that'll come out correctly as `SPC a` (even if both `SPC` and `a` are typed within the `TAPPING_TERM`.
-
-To achieve this correct handling of interrupts, the implementation of Tap Dance hooks into two parts of the system: `process_record_quantum()`, and the matrix scan. These two parts are explained below, but for now the point to note is that we need the latter to be able to time out a tap sequence even when a key is not being pressed. That way, `SPC` alone will time out and register after `TAPPING_TERM` time.
-
-## How to Use Tap Dance
-But enough of the generalities; lets look at how to actually use Tap Dance!
-
-First, you will need `TAP_DANCE_ENABLE=yes` in your `rules.mk`, because the feature is disabled by default. This adds a little less than 1k to the firmware size. 
+First, you will need `TAP_DANCE_ENABLE = yes` in your `rules.mk`, because the feature is disabled by default. This adds a little less than 1k to the firmware size. 
 
 Optionally, you might want to set a custom `TAPPING_TERM` time by adding something like this in you `config.h`:
 
-```
+```c
 #define TAPPING_TERM 175
 ```
 
-The `TAPPING_TERM` time is the maximum time allowed between taps of your Tap Dance key, and is measured in milliseconds. For example, if you used the above `#define` statement and set up a Tap Dance key that sends `Space` on single-tap and `Enter` on double-tap, then this key will send `ENT` only if you tap this key twice in less than 175ms. If you tap the key, wait more than 175ms, and tap the key again you'll end up sending `SPC SPC` instead. 
+The `TAPPING_TERM` time is the maximum time allowed between taps of your Tap Dance key, and is measured in milliseconds. For example, if you used the above `#define` statement and set up a Tap Dance key that sends `Space` on single-tap and `Enter` on double-tap, then this key will send `ENT` only if you tap this key twice in less than 175ms. If you tap the key, wait more than 175ms, and tap the key again you'll end up sending `SPC SPC` instead.
 
-Next, you will want to define some tap-dance keys, which is easiest to do with the `TD()` macro, that - similar to `F()` - takes a number, which will later be used as an index into the `tap_dance_actions` array. 
+Next, you will want to define some tap-dance keys, which is easiest to do with the `TD()` macro, that takes a number which will later be used as an index into the `tap_dance_actions` array.
 
 After this, you'll want to use the `tap_dance_actions` array to specify what actions shall be taken when a tap-dance key is in action. Currently, there are five possible options:
 
@@ -35,7 +28,9 @@ After this, you'll want to use the `tap_dance_actions` array to specify what act
 * `ACTION_TAP_DANCE_LAYER_TOGGLE(kc, layer)`: Sends the `kc` keycode when tapped once, or toggles the state of `layer`. (this functions like the `TG` layer keycode).
 * `ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN(fn)`: Calls the specified function - defined in the user keymap - with the final tap count of the tap dance action.
 * `ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN_ADVANCED(on_each_tap_fn, on_dance_finished_fn, on_dance_reset_fn)`: Calls the first specified function - defined in the user keymap - on every tap, the second function when the dance action finishes (like the previous option), and the last function when the tap dance action resets.
-* `ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN_ADVANCED_TIME(on_each_tap_fn, on_dance_finished_fn, on_dance_reset_fn, tap_specific_tapping_term)`: This functions identically to the `ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN_ADVANCED` function, but uses a custom tapping term for it, instead of the predefined `TAPPING_TERM`.
+* ~~`ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN_ADVANCED_TIME(on_each_tap_fn, on_dance_finished_fn, on_dance_reset_fn, tap_specific_tapping_term)`~~: This functions identically to the `ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN_ADVANCED` function, but uses a custom tapping term for it, instead of the predefined `TAPPING_TERM`.
+    * This is deprecated in favor of the Per Key Tapping Term functionality, as outlined [here](custom_quantum_functions.md#Custom_Tapping_Term). You'd want to check for the specific `TD()` macro that you want to use (such as `TD(TD_ESC_CAPS)`) instead of using this specific Tap Dance function.
+
 
 The first option is enough for a lot of cases, that just want dual roles. For example, `ACTION_TAP_DANCE_DOUBLE(KC_SPC, KC_ENT)` will result in `Space` being sent on single-tap, `Enter` otherwise. 
 
@@ -43,11 +38,12 @@ The first option is enough for a lot of cases, that just want dual roles. For ex
 
 Similar to the first option, the second option is good for simple layer-switching cases.
 
-For more complicated cases, use the third or fourth options (examples of each are listed below). 
+For more complicated cases, use the third or fourth options (examples of each are listed below).
 
 Finally, the fifth option is particularly useful if your non-Tap-Dance keys start behaving weirdly after adding the code for your Tap Dance keys. The likely problem is that you changed the `TAPPING_TERM` time to make your Tap Dance keys easier for you to use, and that this has changed the way your other keys handle interrupts.
 
-## Implementation Details
+## Implementation Details :id=implementation
+
 Well, that's the bulk of it! You should now be able to work through the examples below, and to develop your own Tap Dance functionality. But if you want a deeper understanding of what's going on behind the scenes, then read on for the explanation of how it all works!
 
 The main entry point is `process_tap_dance()`, called from `process_record_quantum()`, which is run for every keypress, and our handler gets to run early. This function checks whether the key pressed is a tap-dance key. If it is not, and a tap-dance was in action, we handle that first, and enqueue the newly pressed key. If it is a tap-dance key, then we check if it is the same as the already active one (if there's one active, that is). If it is not, we fire off the old one first, then register the new one. If it was the same, we increment the counter and reset the timer.
@@ -58,9 +54,9 @@ Our next stop is `matrix_scan_tap_dance()`. This handles the timeout of tap-danc
 
 For the sake of flexibility, tap-dance actions can be either a pair of keycodes, or a user function. The latter allows one to handle higher tap counts, or do extra things, like blink the LEDs, fiddle with the backlighting, and so on. This is accomplished by using an union, and some clever macros.
 
-# Examples
+## Examples :id=examples
 
-## Simple Example
+### Simple Example :id=simple-example
 
 Here's a simple example for a single definition:
 
@@ -69,23 +65,26 @@ Here's a simple example for a single definition:
 3. In your `keymap.c` file, define the variables and definitions, then add to your keymap:
 
 ```c
-//Tap Dance Declarations
+// Tap Dance declarations
 enum {
-  TD_ESC_CAPS = 0
+    TD_ESC_CAPS,
 };
 
-//Tap Dance Definitions
+// Tap Dance definitions
 qk_tap_dance_action_t tap_dance_actions[] = {
-  //Tap once for Esc, twice for Caps Lock
-  [TD_ESC_CAPS]  = ACTION_TAP_DANCE_DOUBLE(KC_ESC, KC_CAPS)
-// Other declarations would go here, separated by commas, if you have them
+    // Tap once for Escape, twice for Caps Lock
+    [TD_ESC_CAPS] = ACTION_TAP_DANCE_DOUBLE(KC_ESC, KC_CAPS),
 };
 
-//In Layer declaration, add tap dance item in place of a key code
-TD(TD_ESC_CAPS)
+// Add tap dance item in place of a key code
+const uint16_t PROGMEM keymaps[][MATRIX_ROWS][MATRIX_COLS] = {
+    // ...
+    TD(TD_ESC_CAPS)
+    // ...
+};
 ```
 
-## Complex Examples
+### Complex Examples :id=complex-examples
 
 This section details several complex tap dance examples.
 All the enums used in the examples are declared like this:
@@ -93,104 +92,105 @@ All the enums used in the examples are declared like this:
 ```c
 // Enums defined for all examples:
 enum {
- CT_SE = 0,
- CT_CLN,
- CT_EGG,
- CT_FLSH,
- X_TAP_DANCE
+    CT_SE,
+    CT_CLN,
+    CT_EGG,
+    CT_FLSH,
+    X_TAP_DANCE
 };
 ```
-### Example 1: Send `:` on Single Tap, `;` on Double Tap
+
+#### Example 1: Send `:` on Single Tap, `;` on Double Tap :id=example-1
+
 ```c
-void dance_cln_finished (qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data) {
-  if (state->count == 1) {
-    register_code (KC_RSFT);
-    register_code (KC_SCLN);
-  } else {
-    register_code (KC_SCLN);
-  }
+void dance_cln_finished(qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data) {
+    if (state->count == 1) {
+        register_code16(KC_COLN);
+    } else {
+        register_code(KC_SCLN);
+    }
 }
 
-void dance_cln_reset (qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data) {
-  if (state->count == 1) {
-    unregister_code (KC_RSFT);
-    unregister_code (KC_SCLN);
-  } else {
-    unregister_code (KC_SCLN);
-  }
+void dance_cln_reset(qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data) {
+    if (state->count == 1) {
+        unregister_code16(KC_COLN);
+    } else {
+        unregister_code(KC_SCLN);
+    }
 }
 
-//All tap dance functions would go here. Only showing this one.
+// All tap dance functions would go here. Only showing this one.
 qk_tap_dance_action_t tap_dance_actions[] = {
- [CT_CLN] = ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN_ADVANCED (NULL, dance_cln_finished, dance_cln_reset)
+    [CT_CLN] = ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN_ADVANCED(NULL, dance_cln_finished, dance_cln_reset),
 };
 ```
-### Example 2: Send "Safety Dance!" After 100 Taps
+
+#### Example 2: Send "Safety Dance!" After 100 Taps :id=example-2
+
 ```c
-void dance_egg (qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data) {
-  if (state->count >= 100) {
-    SEND_STRING ("Safety dance!");
-    reset_tap_dance (state);
-  }
+void dance_egg(qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data) {
+    if (state->count >= 100) {
+        SEND_STRING("Safety dance!");
+        reset_tap_dance(state);
+    }
 }
 
 qk_tap_dance_action_t tap_dance_actions[] = {
- [CT_EGG] = ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN (dance_egg)
+    [CT_EGG] = ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN(dance_egg),
 };
 ```
 
-### Example 3: Turn LED Lights On Then Off, One at a Time
+#### Example 3: Turn LED Lights On Then Off, One at a Time :id=example-3
 
 ```c
-// on each tap, light up one led, from right to left
-// on the forth tap, turn them off from right to left
+// On each tap, light up one LED, from right to left
+// On the fourth tap, turn them off from right to left
 void dance_flsh_each(qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data) {
-  switch (state->count) {
-  case 1:
-    ergodox_right_led_3_on();
-    break;
-  case 2:
-    ergodox_right_led_2_on();
-    break;
-  case 3:
-    ergodox_right_led_1_on();
-    break;
-  case 4:
-    ergodox_right_led_3_off();
-    _delay_ms(50);
-    ergodox_right_led_2_off();
-    _delay_ms(50);
-    ergodox_right_led_1_off();
-  }
+    switch (state->count) {
+        case 1:
+            ergodox_right_led_3_on();
+            break;
+        case 2:
+            ergodox_right_led_2_on();
+            break;
+        case 3:
+            ergodox_right_led_1_on();
+            break;
+        case 4:
+            ergodox_right_led_3_off();
+            wait_ms(50);
+            ergodox_right_led_2_off();
+            wait_ms(50);
+            ergodox_right_led_1_off();
+    }
 }
 
-// on the fourth tap, set the keyboard on flash state
+// On the fourth tap, set the keyboard on flash state
 void dance_flsh_finished(qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data) {
-  if (state->count >= 4) {
-    reset_keyboard();
-    reset_tap_dance(state);
-  }
+    if (state->count >= 4) {
+        reset_keyboard();
+    }
 }
 
-// if the flash state didn't happen, then turn off LEDs, left to right
+// If the flash state didn't happen, then turn off LEDs, left to right
 void dance_flsh_reset(qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data) {
-  ergodox_right_led_1_off();
-  _delay_ms(50);
-  ergodox_right_led_2_off();
-  _delay_ms(50);
-  ergodox_right_led_3_off();
+    ergodox_right_led_1_off();
+    wait_ms(50);
+    ergodox_right_led_2_off();
+    wait_ms(50);
+    ergodox_right_led_3_off();
 }
 
-//All tap dances now put together. Example 3 is "CT_FLASH"
+// All tap dances now put together. Example 3 is "CT_FLASH"
 qk_tap_dance_action_t tap_dance_actions[] = {
-  [CT_SE]  = ACTION_TAP_DANCE_DOUBLE (KC_SPC, KC_ENT)
- ,[CT_CLN] = ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN_ADVANCED (NULL, dance_cln_finished, dance_cln_reset)
- ,[CT_EGG] = ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN (dance_egg)
- ,[CT_FLSH] = ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN_ADVANCED (dance_flsh_each, dance_flsh_finished, dance_flsh_reset)
+    [CT_SE] = ACTION_TAP_DANCE_DOUBLE(KC_SPC, KC_ENT),
+    [CT_CLN] = ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN_ADVANCED(NULL, dance_cln_finished, dance_cln_reset),
+    [CT_EGG] = ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN(dance_egg),
+    [CT_FLSH] = ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN_ADVANCED(dance_flsh_each, dance_flsh_finished, dance_flsh_reset)
 };
 ```
 
-### Example 4: 'Quad Function Tap-Dance'
+#### Example 4: 'Quad Function Tap-Dance' :id=example-4
 
 By [DanielGGordon](https://github.com/danielggordon)
 
@@ -201,40 +201,37 @@ Below is a specific example:
 *  Double Tap = Send `Escape`
 *  Double Tap and Hold = Send `Alt`
 
-## Setup
-
 You will need a few things that can be used for 'Quad Function Tap-Dance'. 
 
 You'll need to add these to the top of your `keymap.c` file, before your keymap. 
 
 ```c
 typedef struct {
-  bool is_press_action;
-  int state;
+    bool is_press_action;
+    uint8_t state;
 } tap;
 
 enum {
-  SINGLE_TAP = 1,
-  SINGLE_HOLD = 2,
-  DOUBLE_TAP = 3,
-  DOUBLE_HOLD = 4,
-  DOUBLE_SINGLE_TAP = 5, //send two single taps
-  TRIPLE_TAP = 6,
-  TRIPLE_HOLD = 7
+    SINGLE_TAP = 1,
+    SINGLE_HOLD,
+    DOUBLE_TAP,
+    DOUBLE_HOLD,
+    DOUBLE_SINGLE_TAP, // Send two single taps
+    TRIPLE_TAP,
+    TRIPLE_HOLD
 };
 
-//Tap dance enums
+// Tap dance enums
 enum {
-  X_CTL = 0,
-  SOME_OTHER_DANCE
+    X_CTL,
+    SOME_OTHER_DANCE
 };
 
-int cur_dance (qk_tap_dance_state_t *state);
-
-//for the x tap dance. Put it here so it can be used in any keymap
-void x_finished (qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data);
-void x_reset (qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data);
+uint8_t cur_dance(qk_tap_dance_state_t *state);
 
+// For the x tap dance. Put it here so it can be used in any keymap
+void x_finished(qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data);
+void x_reset(qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data);
 ```
 
 Now, at the bottom of your `keymap.c` file, you'll need to add the following: 
@@ -267,65 +264,62 @@ Now, at the bottom of your `keymap.c` file, you'll need to add the following:
  * For the third point, there does exist the 'DOUBLE_SINGLE_TAP', however this is not fully tested
  *
  */
-int cur_dance (qk_tap_dance_state_t *state) {
-  if (state->count == 1) {
-    if (state->interrupted || !state->pressed)  return SINGLE_TAP;
-    //key has not been interrupted, but they key is still held. Means you want to send a 'HOLD'.
-    else return SINGLE_HOLD;
-  }
-  else if (state->count == 2) {
-    /*
-     * DOUBLE_SINGLE_TAP is to distinguish between typing "pepper", and actually wanting a double tap
-     * action when hitting 'pp'. Suggested use case for this return value is when you want to send two
-     * keystrokes of the key, and not the 'double tap' action/macro.
-    */
-    if (state->interrupted) return DOUBLE_SINGLE_TAP;
-    else if (state->pressed) return DOUBLE_HOLD;
-    else return DOUBLE_TAP;
-  }
-  //Assumes no one is trying to type the same letter three times (at least not quickly).
-  //If your tap dance key is 'KC_W', and you want to type "www." quickly - then you will need to add
-  //an exception here to return a 'TRIPLE_SINGLE_TAP', and define that enum just like 'DOUBLE_SINGLE_TAP'
-  if (state->count == 3) {
-    if (state->interrupted || !state->pressed)  return TRIPLE_TAP;
-    else return TRIPLE_HOLD;
-  }
-  else return 8; //magic number. At some point this method will expand to work for more presses
+uint8_t cur_dance(qk_tap_dance_state_t *state) {
+    if (state->count == 1) {
+        if (state->interrupted || !state->pressed) return SINGLE_TAP;
+        // Key has not been interrupted, but the key is still held. Means you want to send a 'HOLD'.
+        else return SINGLE_HOLD;
+    } else if (state->count == 2) {
+        // DOUBLE_SINGLE_TAP is to distinguish between typing "pepper", and actually wanting a double tap
+        // action when hitting 'pp'. Suggested use case for this return value is when you want to send two
+        // keystrokes of the key, and not the 'double tap' action/macro.
+        if (state->interrupted) return DOUBLE_SINGLE_TAP;
+        else if (state->pressed) return DOUBLE_HOLD;
+        else return DOUBLE_TAP;
+    }
+
+    // Assumes no one is trying to type the same letter three times (at least not quickly).
+    // If your tap dance key is 'KC_W', and you want to type "www." quickly - then you will need to add
+    // an exception here to return a 'TRIPLE_SINGLE_TAP', and define that enum just like 'DOUBLE_SINGLE_TAP'
+    if (state->count == 3) {
+        if (state->interrupted || !state->pressed) return TRIPLE_TAP;
+        else return TRIPLE_HOLD;
+    } else return 8; // Magic number. At some point this method will expand to work for more presses
 }
 
-//instanalize an instance of 'tap' for the 'x' tap dance.
+// Create an instance of 'tap' for the 'x' tap dance.
 static tap xtap_state = {
-  .is_press_action = true,
-  .state = 0
+    .is_press_action = true,
+    .state = 0
 };
 
-void x_finished (qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data) {
-  xtap_state.state = cur_dance(state);
-  switch (xtap_state.state) {
-    case SINGLE_TAP: register_code(KC_X); break;
-    case SINGLE_HOLD: register_code(KC_LCTRL); break;
-    case DOUBLE_TAP: register_code(KC_ESC); break;
-    case DOUBLE_HOLD: register_code(KC_LALT); break;
-    case DOUBLE_SINGLE_TAP: register_code(KC_X); unregister_code(KC_X); register_code(KC_X);
-    //Last case is for fast typing. Assuming your key is `f`:
-    //For example, when typing the word `buffer`, and you want to make sure that you send `ff` and not `Esc`.
-    //In order to type `ff` when typing fast, the next character will have to be hit within the `TAPPING_TERM`, which by default is 200ms.
-  }
+void x_finished(qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data) {
+    xtap_state.state = cur_dance(state);
+    switch (xtap_state.state) {
+        case SINGLE_TAP: register_code(KC_X); break;
+        case SINGLE_HOLD: register_code(KC_LCTRL); break;
+        case DOUBLE_TAP: register_code(KC_ESC); break;
+        case DOUBLE_HOLD: register_code(KC_LALT); break;
+        // Last case is for fast typing. Assuming your key is `f`:
+        // For example, when typing the word `buffer`, and you want to make sure that you send `ff` and not `Esc`.
+        // In order to type `ff` when typing fast, the next character will have to be hit within the `TAPPING_TERM`, which by default is 200ms.
+        case DOUBLE_SINGLE_TAP: tap_code(KC_X); register_code(KC_X);
+    }
 }
 
-void x_reset (qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data) {
-  switch (xtap_state.state) {
-    case SINGLE_TAP: unregister_code(KC_X); break;
-    case SINGLE_HOLD: unregister_code(KC_LCTRL); break;
-    case DOUBLE_TAP: unregister_code(KC_ESC); break;
-    case DOUBLE_HOLD: unregister_code(KC_LALT);
-    case DOUBLE_SINGLE_TAP: unregister_code(KC_X);
-  }
-  xtap_state.state = 0;
+void x_reset(qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data) {
+    switch (xtap_state.state) {
+        case SINGLE_TAP: unregister_code(KC_X); break;
+        case SINGLE_HOLD: unregister_code(KC_LCTRL); break;
+        case DOUBLE_TAP: unregister_code(KC_ESC); break;
+        case DOUBLE_HOLD: unregister_code(KC_LALT);
+        case DOUBLE_SINGLE_TAP: unregister_code(KC_X);
+    }
+    xtap_state.state = 0;
 }
 
 qk_tap_dance_action_t tap_dance_actions[] = {
-  [X_CTL]     = ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN_ADVANCED(NULL,x_finished, x_reset)
+    [X_CTL] = ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN_ADVANCED(NULL, x_finished, x_reset)
 };
 ```
 
@@ -335,90 +329,91 @@ If you want to implement this in your userspace, then you may want to check out
 
 > In this configuration "hold" takes place **after** tap dance timeout (see `ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN_ADVANCED_TIME`). To achieve instant hold, remove `state->interrupted` checks in conditions. As a result you may use comfortable longer tapping periods to have more time for taps and not to wait too long for holds (try starting with doubled `TAPPING_TERM`).
 
-### Example 5: Using tap dance for advanced mod-tap and layer-tap keys :id=example-5-using-tap-dance-for-advanced-mod-tap-and-layer-tap-keys
+#### Example 5: Using tap dance for advanced mod-tap and layer-tap keys :id=example-5
 
 Tap dance can be used to emulate `MT()` and `LT()` behavior when the tapped code is not a basic keycode. This is useful to send tapped keycodes that normally require `Shift`, such as parentheses or curly braces—or other modified keycodes, such as `Control + X`.
 
 Below your layers and custom keycodes, add the following:
 
 ```c
-// tapdance keycodes
+// Tap Dance keycodes
 enum td_keycodes {
-  ALT_LP // Our example key: `LALT` when held, `(` when tapped. Add additional keycodes for each tapdance.
+    ALT_LP // Our example key: `LALT` when held, `(` when tapped. Add additional keycodes for each tapdance.
 };
 
-// define a type containing as many tapdance states as you need
+// Define a type containing as many tapdance states as you need
 typedef enum {
-  SINGLE_TAP,
-  SINGLE_HOLD,
-  DOUBLE_SINGLE_TAP
+    SINGLE_TAP,
+    SINGLE_HOLD,
+    DOUBLE_SINGLE_TAP
 } td_state_t;
 
-// create a global instance of the tapdance state type
+// Create a global instance of the tapdance state type
 static td_state_t td_state;
 
-// declare your tapdance functions:
+// Declare your tapdance functions:
 
-// function to determine the current tapdance state
-int cur_dance (qk_tap_dance_state_t *state);
+// Function to determine the current tapdance state
+uint8_t cur_dance(qk_tap_dance_state_t *state);
 
 // `finished` and `reset` functions for each tapdance keycode
-void altlp_finished (qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data);
-void altlp_reset (qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data);
+void altlp_finished(qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data);
+void altlp_reset(qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data);
 ```
 
 Below your `LAYOUT`, define each of the tapdance functions:
 
 ```c
-// determine the tapdance state to return
-int cur_dance (qk_tap_dance_state_t *state) {
-  if (state->count == 1) {
-    if (state->interrupted || !state->pressed) { return SINGLE_TAP; }
-    else { return SINGLE_HOLD; }
-  }
-  if (state->count == 2) { return DOUBLE_SINGLE_TAP; }
-  else { return 3; } // any number higher than the maximum state value you return above
-}
- 
-// handle the possible states for each tapdance keycode you define:
+// Determine the tapdance state to return
+uint8_t cur_dance(qk_tap_dance_state_t *state) {
+    if (state->count == 1) {
+        if (state->interrupted || !state->pressed) return SINGLE_TAP;
+        else return SINGLE_HOLD;
+    }
 
-void altlp_finished (qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data) {
-  td_state = cur_dance(state);
-  switch (td_state) {
-    case SINGLE_TAP:
-      register_code16(KC_LPRN);
-      break;
-    case SINGLE_HOLD:
-      register_mods(MOD_BIT(KC_LALT)); // for a layer-tap key, use `layer_on(_MY_LAYER)` here
-      break;
-    case DOUBLE_SINGLE_TAP: // allow nesting of 2 parens `((` within tapping term
-      tap_code16(KC_LPRN);
-      register_code16(KC_LPRN);
-  }
+    if (state->count == 2) return DOUBLE_SINGLE_TAP;
+    else return 3; // Any number higher than the maximum state value you return above
 }
 
-void altlp_reset (qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data) {
-  switch (td_state) {
-    case SINGLE_TAP:
-      unregister_code16(KC_LPRN);
-      break;
-    case SINGLE_HOLD:
-      unregister_mods(MOD_BIT(KC_LALT)); // for a layer-tap key, use `layer_off(_MY_LAYER)` here
-      break;
-    case DOUBLE_SINGLE_TAP:
-      unregister_code16(KC_LPRN);
-  }
+// Handle the possible states for each tapdance keycode you define:
+
+void altlp_finished(qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data) {
+    td_state = cur_dance(state);
+    switch (td_state) {
+        case SINGLE_TAP:
+            register_code16(KC_LPRN);
+            break;
+        case SINGLE_HOLD:
+            register_mods(MOD_BIT(KC_LALT)); // For a layer-tap key, use `layer_on(_MY_LAYER)` here
+            break;
+        case DOUBLE_SINGLE_TAP: // Allow nesting of 2 parens `((` within tapping term
+            tap_code16(KC_LPRN);
+            register_code16(KC_LPRN);
+    }
 }
 
-// define `ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN_ADVANCED()` for each tapdance keycode, passing in `finished` and `reset` functions
+void altlp_reset(qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data) {
+    switch (td_state) {
+        case SINGLE_TAP:
+            unregister_code16(KC_LPRN);
+            break;
+        case SINGLE_HOLD:
+            unregister_mods(MOD_BIT(KC_LALT)); // For a layer-tap key, use `layer_off(_MY_LAYER)` here
+            break;
+        case DOUBLE_SINGLE_TAP:
+            unregister_code16(KC_LPRN);
+    }
+}
+
+// Define `ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN_ADVANCED()` for each tapdance keycode, passing in `finished` and `reset` functions
 qk_tap_dance_action_t tap_dance_actions[] = {
-  [ALT_LP] = ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN_ADVANCED(NULL, altlp_finished, altlp_reset)
+    [ALT_LP] = ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN_ADVANCED(NULL, altlp_finished, altlp_reset)
 };
 ```
 
 Wrap each tapdance keycode in `TD()` when including it in your keymap, e.g. `TD(ALT_LP)`.
 
-### Example 6: Using tap dance for momentary-layer-switch and layer-toggle keys
+#### Example 6: Using tap dance for momentary-layer-switch and layer-toggle keys :id=example-6
 
 Tap Dance can be used to mimic MO(layer) and TG(layer) functionality. For this example, we will set up a key to function as `KC_QUOT` on single-tap, as `MO(_MY_LAYER)` on single-hold, and `TG(_MY_LAYER)` on double-tap.
 
@@ -426,97 +421,92 @@ The first step is to include the following code towards the beginning of your `k
 
 ```c
 typedef struct {
-  bool is_press_action;
-  int state;
+    bool is_press_action;
+    uint8_t state;
 } tap;
 
-//Define a type for as many tap dance states as you need
+// Define a type for as many tap dance states as you need
 enum {
-  SINGLE_TAP = 1,
-  SINGLE_HOLD = 2,
-  DOUBLE_TAP = 3
+    SINGLE_TAP = 1,
+    SINGLE_HOLD,
+    DOUBLE_TAP
 };
 
 enum {
-  QUOT_LAYR = 0     //Our custom tap dance key; add any other tap dance keys to this enum 
+    QUOT_LAYR, // Our custom tap dance key; add any other tap dance keys to this enum 
 };
 
-//Declare the functions to be used with your tap dance key(s)
+// Declare the functions to be used with your tap dance key(s)
 
-//Function associated with all tap dances
-int cur_dance (qk_tap_dance_state_t *state);
+// Function associated with all tap dances
+uint8_t cur_dance(qk_tap_dance_state_t *state);
 
-//Functions associated with individual tap dances
-void ql_finished (qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data);
-void ql_reset (qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data);
+// Functions associated with individual tap dances
+void ql_finished(qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data);
+void ql_reset(qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data);
 ```
 
 Towards the bottom of your `keymap.c`, include the following code:
 
 ```c
-//Determine the current tap dance state
-int cur_dance (qk_tap_dance_state_t *state) {
-  if (state->count == 1) {
-    if (!state->pressed) {
-      return SINGLE_TAP;
-    } else {
-      return SINGLE_HOLD;
-    }
-  } else if (state->count == 2) {
-    return DOUBLE_TAP;
-  }
-  else return 8;
+// Determine the current tap dance state
+uint8_t cur_dance(qk_tap_dance_state_t *state) {
+    if (state->count == 1) {
+        if (!state->pressed) return SINGLE_TAP;
+        else return SINGLE_HOLD;
+    } else if (state->count == 2) return DOUBLE_TAP;
+    else return 8;
 }
 
-//Initialize tap structure associated with example tap dance key
+// Initialize tap structure associated with example tap dance key
 static tap ql_tap_state = {
-  .is_press_action = true,
-  .state = 0
+    .is_press_action = true,
+    .state = 0
 };
 
-//Functions that control what our tap dance key does
-void ql_finished (qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data) {
-  ql_tap_state.state = cur_dance(state);
-  switch (ql_tap_state.state) {
-    case SINGLE_TAP: 
-      tap_code(KC_QUOT); 
-      break;
-    case SINGLE_HOLD: 
-      layer_on(_MY_LAYER); 
-      break;
-    case DOUBLE_TAP: 
-      //check to see if the layer is already set
-      if (layer_state_is(_MY_LAYER)) {
-        //if already set, then switch it off
+// Functions that control what our tap dance key does
+void ql_finished(qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data) {
+    ql_tap_state.state = cur_dance(state);
+    switch (ql_tap_state.state) {
+        case SINGLE_TAP:
+            tap_code(KC_QUOT);
+            break;
+        case SINGLE_HOLD:
+            layer_on(_MY_LAYER);
+            break;
+        case DOUBLE_TAP:
+            // Check to see if the layer is already set
+            if (layer_state_is(_MY_LAYER)) {
+                // If already set, then switch it off
+                layer_off(_MY_LAYER);
+            } else {
+                // If not already set, then switch the layer on
+                layer_on(_MY_LAYER);
+            }
+            break;
+    }
+}
+
+void ql_reset(qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data) {
+    // If the key was held down and now is released then switch off the layer
+    if (ql_tap_state.state == SINGLE_HOLD) {
         layer_off(_MY_LAYER);
-      } else { 
-        //if not already set, then switch the layer on
-        layer_on(_MY_LAYER);
-      }
-      break;
-  }
+    }
+    ql_tap_state.state = 0;
 }
 
-void ql_reset (qk_tap_dance_state_t *state, void *user_data) {
-  //if the key was held down and now is released then switch off the layer
-  if (ql_tap_state.state==SINGLE_HOLD) {
-    layer_off(_MY_LAYER);
-  }
-  ql_tap_state.state = 0;
-}
-
-//Associate our tap dance key with its functionality
+// Associate our tap dance key with its functionality
 qk_tap_dance_action_t tap_dance_actions[] = {
-  [QUOT_LAYR] = ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN_ADVANCED_TIME(NULL, ql_finished, ql_reset, 275)
+    [QUOT_LAYR] = ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN_ADVANCED_TIME(NULL, ql_finished, ql_reset, 275)
 };
 ```
 
-The above code is similar to that used in previous examples. The one point to note is that we need to be able to check which layers are active at any time so we can toggle them if needed. To do this we use the `layer_state_is( layer )` function which returns `true` if the given `layer` is active.
+The above code is similar to that used in previous examples. The one point to note is that we need to be able to check which layers are active at any time so we can toggle them if needed. To do this we use the `layer_state_is(layer)` function which returns `true` if the given `layer` is active.
 
 The use of `cur_dance()` and `ql_tap_state` mirrors the above examples.
 
-The `case:SINGLE_TAP` in `ql_finished` is similar to the above examples. The `case:SINGLE_HOLD` works in conjunction with `ql_reset()` to switch to `_MY_LAYER` while the tap dance key is held, and to switch away from `_MY_LAYER` when the key is released. This mirrors the use of `MO(_MY_LAYER)`. The `case:DOUBLE_TAP` works by checking whether `_MY_LAYER` is the active layer, and toggling it on or off accordingly. This mirrors the use of `TG(_MY_LAYER)`.
+The `case:SINGLE_TAP` in `ql_finished` is similar to the above examples. The `SINGLE_HOLD` case works in conjunction with `ql_reset()` to switch to `_MY_LAYER` while the tap dance key is held, and to switch away from `_MY_LAYER` when the key is released. This mirrors the use of `MO(_MY_LAYER)`. The `DOUBLE_TAP` case works by checking whether `_MY_LAYER` is the active layer, and toggling it on or off accordingly. This mirrors the use of `TG(_MY_LAYER)`.
 
-`tap_dance_actions[]` works similar to the above examples. Note that I used `ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN_ADVANCED_TIME()` instead of `ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN_ADVANCED()`. This is because I like my `TAPPING_TERM` to be short (~175ms) for my non-tap-dance keys but find that this is too quick for me to reliably complete tap dance actions - thus the increased time of 275ms here.
+`tap_dance_actions[]` works similar to the above examples. Note that I used `ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN_ADVANCED_TIME()` instead of `ACTION_TAP_DANCE_FN_ADVANCED()`. This is because I like my `TAPPING_TERM` to be short (\~175ms) for my non-tap-dance keys but find that this is too quick for me to reliably complete tap dance actions - thus the increased time of 275ms here.
 
 Finally, to get this tap dance key working, be sure to include `TD(QUOT_LAYR)` in your `keymaps[]`.

docs/feature_unicode.md

@@ -2,11 +2,25 @@
 
 Unicode characters can be input straight from your keyboard! There are some limitations, however.
 
-QMK has three different methods for enabling Unicode input and defining keycodes:
+In order to enable Unicode support on your keyboard, you will need to do the following:
 
-## Basic Unicode
+1. Choose one of three supported Unicode implementations: [Basic Unicode](#basic-unicode), [Unicode Map](#unicode-map), [UCIS](#ucis).
+2. Find which [input mode](#input-modes) is the best match for your operating system and setup.
+3. [Set](#setting-the-input-mode) the appropriate input mode (or modes) in your configuration.
+4. Add Unicode keycodes to your keymap.
 
-This method supports Unicode code points up to `0x7FFF`. This covers characters for most modern languages, as well as symbols, but it doesn't cover emoji.
+
+## 1. Methods :id=methods
+
+QMK supports three different methods for enabling Unicode input and adding Unicode characters to your keymap. Each has its pros and cons in terms of flexibility and ease of use. Choose the one that best fits your use case.
+
+The Basic method should be enough for most users. However, if you need a wider range of supported characters (including emoji, rare symbols etc.), you should use Unicode Map.
+
+<br>
+
+### 1.1. Basic Unicode :id=basic-unicode
+
+The easiest to use method, albeit somewhat limited. It stores Unicode characters as keycodes in the keymap itself, so it only supports code points up to `0x7FFF`. This covers characters for most modern languages (including East Asian), as well as symbols, but it doesn't cover emoji.
 
 Add the following to your `rules.mk`:
 
@@ -14,11 +28,13 @@ Add the following to your `rules.mk`:
 UNICODE_ENABLE = yes
 ```
 
-Then add `UC(c)` keycodes to your keymap, where _c_ is the code point (preferably in hexadecimal, up to 4 digits long). For example: `UC(0x45B)`, `UC(0x30C4)`.
+Then add `UC(c)` keycodes to your keymap, where _c_ is the code point of the desired character (preferably in hexadecimal, up to 4 digits long). For example, `UC(0x40B)` will output [Ћ](https://unicode-table.com/en/040B/), and `UC(0x30C4)` will output [ツ](https://unicode-table.com/en/30C4).
 
-## Unicode Map
+<br>
 
-This method supports all possible code points (up to `0x10FFFF`); however, you need to maintain a separate mapping table in your keymap file, which may contain at most 16384 entries.
+### 1.2. Unicode Map :id=unicode-map
+
+In addition to standard character ranges, this method also covers emoji, ancient scripts, rare symbols etc. In fact, all possible code points (up to `0x10FFFF`) are supported. Here, Unicode characters are stored in a separate mapping table. You need to maintain a `unicode_map` array in your keymap file, which may contain at most 16384 entries.
 
 Add the following to your `rules.mk`:
 
@@ -26,7 +42,7 @@ Add the following to your `rules.mk`:
 UNICODEMAP_ENABLE = yes
 ```
 
-Then add `X(i)` keycodes to your keymap, where _i_ is an array index into the mapping table:
+Then add `X(i)` keycodes to your keymap, where _i_ is the desired character's index in the mapping table. This can be a numeric value, but it's recommended to keep the indices in an enum and access them by name.
 
 ```c
 enum unicode_names {
@@ -44,15 +60,17 @@ const uint32_t PROGMEM unicode_map[] = {
 
 Then you can use `X(BANG)`, `X(SNEK)` etc. in your keymap.
 
-### Lower and Upper Case
+#### Lower and Upper Case
 
 Characters often come in lower and upper case pairs, such as å and Å. To make inputting these characters easier, you can use `XP(i, j)` in your keymap, where _i_ and _j_ are the mapping table indices of the lower and upper case character, respectively. If you're holding down Shift or have Caps Lock turned on when you press the key, the second (upper case) character will be inserted; otherwise, the first (lower case) version will appear.
 
 This is most useful when creating a keymap for an international layout with special characters. Instead of having to put the lower and upper case versions of a character on separate keys, you can have them both on the same key by using `XP()`. This helps blend Unicode keys in with regular alphas.
 
-Due to keycode size constraints, _i_ and _j_ can each only refer to one of the first 128 characters in your `unicode_map`. In other words, 0 ≤ _i_ ≤ 127 and 0 ≤ _j_ ≤ 127. This is enough for most use cases, but if you'd like to customize the index calculation, you can override the [`unicodemap_index()`](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/blob/71f640d47ee12c862c798e1f56392853c7b1c1a8/quantum/process_keycode/process_unicodemap.c#L40) function. This also allows you to, say, check Ctrl instead of Shift/Caps.
+Due to keycode size constraints, _i_ and _j_ can each only refer to one of the first 128 characters in your `unicode_map`. In other words, 0 ≤ _i_ ≤ 127 and 0 ≤ _j_ ≤ 127. This is enough for most use cases, but if you'd like to customize the index calculation, you can override the [`unicodemap_index()`](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/blob/71f640d47ee12c862c798e1f56392853c7b1c1a8/quantum/process_keycode/process_unicodemap.c#L36) function. This also allows you to, say, check Ctrl instead of Shift/Caps.
 
-## UCIS
+<br>
+
+### 1.3. UCIS :id=ucis
 
 This method also supports all possible code points. As with the Unicode Map method, you need to maintain a mapping table in your keymap file. However, there are no built-in keycodes for this feature — you have to create a custom keycode or function that invokes this functionality.
 
@@ -66,15 +84,18 @@ Then define a table like this in your keymap file:
 
 ```c
 const qk_ucis_symbol_t ucis_symbol_table[] = UCIS_TABLE(
-    UCIS_SYM("poop", 0x1F4A9), // 💩
-    UCIS_SYM("rofl", 0x1F923), // 🤣
-    UCIS_SYM("kiss", 0x1F619)  // 😙
+    UCIS_SYM("poop", 0x1F4A9),                // 💩
+    UCIS_SYM("rofl", 0x1F923),                // 🤣
+    UCIS_SYM("cuba", 0x1F1E8, 0x1F1FA),       // 🇨🇺
+    UCIS_SYM("look", 0x0CA0, 0x005F, 0x0CA0), // ಠ_ಠ
 );
 ```
 
-To use it, call `qk_ucis_start()`. Then, type the mnemonic for the character (such as "rofl"), and hit Space or Enter. QMK should erase the "rofl" text and insert the laughing emoji.
+By default, each table entry may be up to 3 code points long. This number can be changed by adding `#define UCIS_MAX_CODE_POINTS n` to your `config.h` file.
 
-### Customization
+To use UCIS input, call `qk_ucis_start()`. Then, type the mnemonic for the character (such as "rofl") and hit Space, Enter or Esc. QMK should erase the "rofl" text and insert the laughing emoji.
+
+#### Customization
 
 There are several functions that you can define in your keymap to customize the functionality of this feature.
 
@@ -84,63 +105,77 @@ There are several functions that you can define in your keymap to customize the
 
 You can find the default implementations of these functions in [`process_ucis.c`](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/blob/master/quantum/process_keycode/process_ucis.c).
 
-## Input Modes
+
+## 2. Input Modes :id=input-modes
 
 Unicode input in QMK works by inputting a sequence of characters to the OS, sort of like a macro. Unfortunately, the way this is done differs for each platform. Specifically, each platform requires a different combination of keys to trigger Unicode input. Therefore, a corresponding input mode has to be set in QMK.
 
 The following input modes are available:
 
-* **`UC_MAC`**: macOS built-in Unicode hex input. Supports code points up to `0xFFFF` (`0x10FFFF` with Unicode Map).
+* **`UC_MAC`**: macOS built-in Unicode hex input. Supports code points up to `0x10FFFF` (all possible code points).
 
   To enable, go to _System Preferences > Keyboard > Input Sources_, add _Unicode Hex Input_ to the list (it's under _Other_), then activate it from the input dropdown in the Menu Bar.
-  By default, this mode uses the left Option key (`KC_LALT`) for Unicode input, but this can be changed by defining [`UNICODE_KEY_MAC`](#input-key-configuration) with another keycode.
+  By default, this mode uses the left Option key (`KC_LALT`) for Unicode input, but this can be changed by defining [`UNICODE_KEY_MAC`](#input-key-configuration) with a different keycode.
 
-  !> Using the _Unicode Hex Input_ input source may disable some Option based shortcuts, such as Option + Left Arrow and Option + Right Arrow.
+  !> Using the _Unicode Hex Input_ input source may disable some Option-based shortcuts, such as Option+Left and Option+Right.
 
-  !> `UC_OSX` is a deprecated alias of `UC_MAC` that will be removed in a future version of QMK.
+  !> `UC_OSX` is a deprecated alias of `UC_MAC` that will be removed in future versions of QMK. All new keymaps should use `UC_MAC`.
 
 * **`UC_LNX`**: Linux built-in IBus Unicode input. Supports code points up to `0x10FFFF` (all possible code points).
 
   Enabled by default and works almost anywhere on IBus-enabled distros. Without IBus, this mode works under GTK apps, but rarely anywhere else.
-  By default, this mode uses Ctrl+Shift+U (`LCTL(LSFT(KC_U))`) to start Unicode input, but this can be changed by defining [`UNICODE_KEY_LNX`](#input-key-configuration) with another keycode. This might be required for IBus versions ≥1.5.15, where Ctrl+Shift+U behavior is consolidated into Ctrl+Shift+E.
+  By default, this mode uses Ctrl+Shift+U (`LCTL(LSFT(KC_U))`) to start Unicode input, but this can be changed by defining [`UNICODE_KEY_LNX`](#input-key-configuration) with a different keycode. This might be required for IBus versions ≥1.5.15, where Ctrl+Shift+U behavior is consolidated into Ctrl+Shift+E.
 
 * **`UC_WIN`**: _(not recommended)_ Windows built-in hex numpad Unicode input. Supports code points up to `0xFFFF`.
 
-  To enable, create a registry key under `HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Control Panel\Input Method\EnableHexNumpad` of type `REG_SZ` called `EnableHexNumpad` and set its value to `1`. This can be done from the Command Prompt by running `reg add "HKCU\Control Panel\Input Method" -v EnableHexNumpad -t REG_SZ -d 1` with administrator privileges. Reboot afterwards.
+  To enable, create a registry key under `HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Control Panel\Input Method` of type `REG_SZ` called `EnableHexNumpad` and set its value to `1`. This can be done from the Command Prompt by running `reg add "HKCU\Control Panel\Input Method" -v EnableHexNumpad -t REG_SZ -d 1` with administrator privileges. Reboot afterwards.
   This mode is not recommended because of reliability and compatibility issues; use the `UC_WINC` mode instead.
 
 * **`UC_BSD`**: _(non implemented)_ Unicode input under BSD. Not implemented at this time. If you're a BSD user and want to help add support for it, please [open an issue on GitHub](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/issues).
 
 * **`UC_WINC`**: Windows Unicode input using [WinCompose](https://github.com/samhocevar/wincompose). As of v0.9.0, supports code points up to `0x10FFFF` (all possible code points).
 
-  To enable, install the [latest release](https://github.com/samhocevar/wincompose/releases/latest). Once installed, WinCompose will automatically run on startup. Works reliably under all version of Windows supported by the app.
-  By default, this mode uses right Alt (`KC_RALT`) as the Compose key, but this can be changed in the WinCompose settings and by defining [`UNICODE_KEY_WINC`](#input-key-configuration) with another keycode.
+  To enable, install the [latest release](https://github.com/samhocevar/wincompose/releases/latest). Once installed, WinCompose will automatically run on startup. This mode works reliably under all version of Windows supported by the app.
+  By default, this mode uses right Alt (`KC_RALT`) as the Compose key, but this can be changed in the WinCompose settings and by defining [`UNICODE_KEY_WINC`](#input-key-configuration) with a different keycode.
 
-### Switching Input Modes
 
-There are two ways to set the input mode for Unicode: by keycode or by function. Keep in mind that both methods write to persistent storage (EEPROM), and are loaded each time the keyboard starts. So once you've set it the first time, you don't need to set it again unless you want to change it, or you've reset the EEPROM settings.
+## 3. Setting the Input Mode :id=setting-the-input-mode
 
-You can switch the input mode at any time by using one of the following keycodes. The easiest way is to add the ones you use to your keymap.
-
-|Keycode               |Alias    |Input Mode  |Description                                                   |
-|----------------------|---------|------------|--------------------------------------------------------------|
-|`UNICODE_MODE_FORWARD`|`UC_MOD` |Next in list|[Cycle](#input-mode-cycling) through selected modes           |
-|`UNICODE_MODE_REVERSE`|`UC_RMOD`|Prev in list|[Cycle](#input-mode-cycling) through selected modes in reverse|
-|`UNICODE_MODE_MAC`    |`UC_M_MA`|`UC_MAC`    |Switch to macOS input                                         |
-|`UNICODE_MODE_LNX`    |`UC_M_LN`|`UC_LNX`    |Switch to Linux input                                         |
-|`UNICODE_MODE_WIN`    |`UC_M_WI`|`UC_WIN`    |Switch to Windows input                                       |
-|`UNICODE_MODE_BSD`    |`UC_M_BS`|`UC_BSD`    |Switch to BSD input (not implemented)                         |
-|`UNICODE_MODE_WINC`   |`UC_M_WC`|`UC_WINC`   |Switch to Windows input using WinCompose                      |
-
-You can also switch the input mode by calling `set_unicode_input_mode(x)` in your code, where _x_ is one of the above input mode constants (e.g. `UC_LNX`). Since the function only needs to be called once, it's recommended that you do it in `eeconfig_init_user()` (or a similar function). For example:
+To set your desired input mode, add the following define to your `config.h`:
 
 ```c
-void eeconfig_init_user(void) {
-    set_unicode_input_mode(UC_LNX);
-}
+#define UNICODE_SELECTED_MODES UC_LNX
 ```
 
-### Audio Feedback
+This example sets the board's default input mode to `UC_LNX`. You can replace this with `UC_MAC`, `UC_WINC`, or any of the other modes listed [above](#input-modes). The board will automatically use the selected mode on startup, unless you manually switch to another mode (see [below](#keycodes)).
+
+You can also select multiple input modes, which allows you to easily cycle through them using the `UC_MOD`/`UC_RMOD` keycodes.
+
+```c
+#define UNICODE_SELECTED_MODES UC_MAC, UC_LNX, UC_WINC
+```
+
+Note that the values are separated by commas. The board will remember the last used input mode and will continue using it on next power-up. You can disable this and force it to always start with the first mode in the list by adding `#define UNICODE_CYCLE_PERSIST false` to your `config.h`.
+
+#### Keycodes
+
+You can switch the input mode at any time by using the following keycodes. Adding these to your keymap allows you to quickly switch to a specific input mode, including modes not listed in `UNICODE_SELECTED_MODES`.
+
+|Keycode               |Alias    |Input Mode  |Description                                                                  |
+|----------------------|---------|------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+|`UNICODE_MODE_FORWARD`|`UC_MOD` |Next in list|Cycle through selected modes, reverse direction when Shift is held           |
+|`UNICODE_MODE_REVERSE`|`UC_RMOD`|Prev in list|Cycle through selected modes in reverse, forward direction when Shift is held|
+|`UNICODE_MODE_MAC`    |`UC_M_MA`|`UC_MAC`    |Switch to macOS input                                                        |
+|`UNICODE_MODE_LNX`    |`UC_M_LN`|`UC_LNX`    |Switch to Linux input                                                        |
+|`UNICODE_MODE_WIN`    |`UC_M_WI`|`UC_WIN`    |Switch to Windows input                                                      |
+|`UNICODE_MODE_BSD`    |`UC_M_BS`|`UC_BSD`    |Switch to BSD input _(not implemented)_                                      |
+|`UNICODE_MODE_WINC`   |`UC_M_WC`|`UC_WINC`   |Switch to Windows input using WinCompose                                     |
+
+You can also switch the input mode by calling `set_unicode_input_mode(x)` in your code, where _x_ is one of the above input mode constants (e.g. `UC_LNX`).
+
+?> Using `UNICODE_SELECTED_MODES` is preferable to calling `set_unicode_input_mode()` in `matrix_init_user()` or similar functions, since it's better integrated into the Unicode system and has the added benefit of avoiding unnecessary writes to EEPROM.
+
+#### Audio Feedback
 
 If you have the [Audio feature](feature_audio.md) enabled on the board, you can set melodies to be played when you press the above keys. That way you can have some audio feedback when switching input modes.
 
@@ -154,20 +189,21 @@ For instance, you can add these definitions to your `config.h` file:
 #define UNICODE_SONG_WINC UNICODE_WINDOWS
 ```
 
-### Additional Customization
+
+## Additional Customization
 
 Because Unicode is a large and versatile feature, there are a number of options you can customize to make it work better on your system.
 
-#### Start and Finish Input Functions
+### Start and Finish Input Functions
 
 The functions for starting and finishing Unicode input on your platform can be overridden locally. Possible uses include customizing input mode behavior if you don't use the default keys, or adding extra visual/audio feedback to Unicode input.
 
-* `void unicode_input_start(void)` – This sends the initial sequence that tells your platform to enter Unicode input mode. For example, it presses Ctrl+Shift+U on Linux and holds the Option key on macOS.
-* `void unicode_input_finish(void)` – This is called to exit Unicode input mode, for example by pressing Space or releasing the Option key.
+* `void unicode_input_start(void)` – This sends the initial sequence that tells your platform to enter Unicode input mode. For example, it holds the left Alt key followed by Num+ on Windows, and presses the `UNICODE_KEY_LNX` combination (default: Ctrl+Shift+U) on Linux.
+* `void unicode_input_finish(void)` – This is called to exit Unicode input mode, for example by pressing Space or releasing the Alt key.
 
 You can find the default implementations of these functions in [`process_unicode_common.c`](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/blob/master/quantum/process_keycode/process_unicode_common.c).
 
-#### Input Key Configuration
+### Input Key Configuration
 
 You can customize the keys used to trigger Unicode input for macOS, Linux and WinCompose by adding corresponding defines to your `config.h`. The default values match the platforms' default settings, so you shouldn't need to change this unless Unicode input isn't working, or you want to use a different key (e.g. in order to free up left or right Alt).
 
@@ -177,54 +213,47 @@ You can customize the keys used to trigger Unicode input for macOS, Linux and Wi
 |`UNICODE_KEY_LNX` |`uint16_t`|`LCTL(LSFT(KC_U))`|`#define UNICODE_KEY_LNX  LCTL(LSFT(KC_E))`|
 |`UNICODE_KEY_WINC`|`uint8_t` |`KC_RALT`         |`#define UNICODE_KEY_WINC KC_RGUI`         |
 
-#### Input Mode Cycling
 
-You can choose which input modes are available for cycling through. By default, this is disabled. If you want to enable it, limiting it to just the modes you use makes sense. Note that the values in the list are comma-delimited.
+## Sending Unicode Strings
 
-```c
-#define UNICODE_SELECTED_MODES UC_MAC, UC_LNX, UC_WIN, UC_WINC
-```
+QMK provides several functions that allow you to send Unicode input to the host programmatically:
 
-You can cycle through the selected modes by using the `UC_MOD`/`UC_RMOD` keycodes, or by calling `cycle_unicode_input_mode(offset)` in your code (`offset` is how many modes to move forward by, so +1 corresponds to `UC_MOD`).
+### `send_unicode_string()`
 
-By default, when the keyboard boots, it will initialize the input mode to the last one you used. You can disable this and make it start with the first mode in the list every time by adding the following to your `config.h`:
-
-```c
-#define UNICODE_CYCLE_PERSIST false
-```
-
-!> Using `UNICODE_SELECTED_MODES` means you don't have to initially set the input mode in `matrix_init_user()` (or a similar function); the Unicode system will do that for you on startup. This has the added benefit of avoiding unnecessary writes to EEPROM.
-
-## `send_unicode_string()`
-
-This function is much like `send_string()` but allows you to input UTF-8 characters directly, and supports all code points (provided the selected input method also supports it). Make sure your `keymap.c` is formatted in UTF-8 encoding.
+This function is much like `send_string()`, but it allows you to input UTF-8 characters directly. It supports all code points, provided the selected input mode also supports it. Make sure your `keymap.c` file is formatted using UTF-8 encoding.
 
 ```c
 send_unicode_string("(ノಠ痊ಠ)ノ彡┻━┻");
 ```
 
-## `send_unicode_hex_string()`
+Example uses include sending Unicode strings when a key is pressed, as described in [Macros](feature_macros.md).
 
-Similar to `send_unicode_string()`, but the characters are represented by their code point values in ASCII, separated by spaces. For example, the table flip above would be achieved with:
+### `send_unicode_hex_string()`
+
+Similar to `send_unicode_string()`, but the characters are represented by their Unicode code points, written in hexadecimal and separated by spaces. For example, the table flip above would be achieved with:
 
 ```c
 send_unicode_hex_string("0028 30CE 0CA0 75CA 0CA0 0029 30CE 5F61 253B 2501 253B");
 ```
 
-An easy way to convert your Unicode string to this format is by using [this site](https://r12a.github.io/app-conversion/), and taking the result in the "Hex/UTF-32" section.
+An easy way to convert your Unicode string to this format is to use [this site](https://r12a.github.io/app-conversion/) and take the result in the "Hex/UTF-32" section.
+
 
 ## Additional Language Support
 
-In `quantum/keymap_extras/`, you'll see various language files - these work the same way as the alternative layout ones do. Most are defined by their two letter country/language code followed by an underscore and a 4-letter abbreviation of its name. `FR_UGRV` which will result in a `ù` when using a software-implemented AZERTY layout. It's currently difficult to send such characters in just the firmware.
+In `quantum/keymap_extras`, you'll see various language files — these work the same way as the ones for alternative layouts such as Colemak or BÉPO. When you include one of these language headers, you gain access to keycodes specific to that language / national layout. Such keycodes are defined by a 2-letter country/language code, followed by an underscore and a 4-letter abbreviation of the character to which the key corresponds. For example, including `keymap_french.h` and using `FR_UGRV` in your keymap will output `ù` when typed on a system with a native French AZERTY layout.
+
+If the primary system layout you use on your machine is different from US ANSI, using these language-specific keycodes can help your QMK keymaps better match what will actually be output on the screen. However, keep in mind that these keycodes are just aliases for the corresponding default US keycodes under the hood, and that the HID protocol used by keyboards is itself inherently based on US ANSI.
+
 
 ## International Characters on Windows
 
-### AutoHotkey allows Windows users to create custom hotkeys among others.
+### AutoHotkey
 
-The method does not require Unicode support in the keyboard itself but depends instead of [AutoHotkey](https://autohotkey.com) running in the background.
+The method does not require Unicode support in the keyboard itself but instead depends on [AutoHotkey](https://autohotkey.com) running in the background.
 
 First you need to select a modifier combination that is not in use by any of your programs.
-CtrlAltWin is not used very widely and should therefore be perfect for this.
+Ctrl+Alt+Win is not used very widely and should therefore be perfect for this.
 There is a macro defined for a mod-tab combo `LCAG_T`.
 Add this mod-tab combo to a key on your keyboard, e.g.: `LCAG_T(KC_TAB)`.
 This makes the key behave like a tab key if pressed and released immediately but changes it to the modifier if used with another key.
@@ -239,8 +268,5 @@ AutoHotkey inserts the Text right of `Send, ` when this combination is pressed.
 
 ### US International
 
-If you enable the US International layout on the system, it will use punctuation to accent the characters.
-
-For instance, typing "\`a" will result in à.
-
+If you enable the US International layout on the system, it will use punctuation to accent the characters. For instance, typing "\`a" will result in à.
 You can find details on how to enable this [here](https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/help/17424/windows-change-keyboard-layout).

docs/feature_userspace.md

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 # Userspace: Sharing Code Between Keymaps
 
-If you use more than one keyboard with a similar keymap, you might see the benefit in being able to share code between them. Create your own folder in `users/` named the same as your keymap (ideally your github username, `<name>`) with the following structure:
+If you use more than one keyboard with a similar keymap, you might see the benefit in being able to share code between them. Create your own folder in `users/` named the same as your keymap (ideally your GitHub username, `<name>`) with the following structure:
 
 * `/users/<name>/` (added to the path automatically)
   * `readme.md` (optional, recommended)
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ The reason for this, is that `<name>.h` won't be added in time to add settings (
 
 ## Readme (`readme.md`)
 
-Please include authorship (your name, github username, email), and optionally [a license that's GPL compatible](https://www.gnu.org/licenses/license-list.html#GPLCompatibleLicenses).
+Please include authorship (your name, GitHub username, email), and optionally [a license that's GPL compatible](https://www.gnu.org/licenses/license-list.html#GPLCompatibleLicenses).
 
 You can use this as a template: 
 ```
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
 along with this program.  If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
 ```
 
-You'd want to replace the year, name, email and github username with your info. 
+You'd want to replace the year, name, email and GitHub username with your info. 
 
 Additionally, this is a good place to document your code, if you wish to share it with others. 
 
@@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ This is ideal for when you want ensure everything compiles successfully when pre
 
 ## Examples
 
-For a brief example, checkout [`/users/_example/`](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/tree/master/users/drashna).  
+For a brief example, checkout [`/users/_example/`](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/tree/master/users/_example).  
 For a more complicated example, checkout [`/users/drashna/`](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/tree/master/users/drashna)'s userspace.
 
 

docs/flashing.md

@@ -26,7 +26,6 @@ Compatible flashers:
 
 * [QMK Toolbox](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_toolbox/releases) (recommended GUI)
 * [dfu-programmer](https://github.com/dfu-programmer/dfu-programmer) / `:dfu` in QMK (recommended command line)
-* [Atmel's Flip](http://www.microchip.com/developmenttools/productdetails.aspx?partno=flip) (not recommended)
 
 Flashing sequence:
 
@@ -240,3 +239,4 @@ There are a number of DFU commands that you can use to flash firmware to a STM32
 * `:dfu-util-split-left` - This flashes the normal firmware, just like the default option (`:dfu-util`). However, this also configures the "Left Side" EEPROM setting for split keyboards.
 * `:dfu-util-split-right` - This flashes the normal firmware, just like the default option (`:dfu-util`). However, this also configures the "Right Side" EEPROM setting for split keyboards.
 * `:st-link-cli` - This allows you to flash the firmware via ST-LINK's CLI utility, rather than dfu-util. 
+* `:st-flash` - This allows you to flash the firmware via the `st-flash` utility from [STLink Tools](https://github.com/stlink-org/stlink), rather than dfu-util.

docs/fr-fr/README.md

@@ -4,8 +4,8 @@
 [![Statut du build](https://travis-ci.org/qmk/qmk_firmware.svg?branch=master)](https://travis-ci.org/qmk/qmk_firmware)
 [![Discord](https://img.shields.io/discord/440868230475677696.svg)](https://discord.gg/Uq7gcHh)
 [![Statut de la doc](https://img.shields.io/badge/docs-ready-orange.svg)](https://docs.qmk.fm)
-[![Contributeurs Github](https://img.shields.io/github/contributors/qmk/qmk_firmware.svg)](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pulse/monthly)
-[![Forks Github](https://img.shields.io/github/forks/qmk/qmk_firmware.svg?style=social&label=Fork)](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/)
+[![Contributeurs GitHub](https://img.shields.io/github/contributors/qmk/qmk_firmware.svg)](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pulse/monthly)
+[![Forks GitHub](https://img.shields.io/github/forks/qmk/qmk_firmware.svg?style=social&label=Fork)](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/)
 
 ## Qu'est-ce que QMK Firmware ?
 
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ QMK (*Quantum Mechanical Keyboard*) est une communauté open source qui maintien
 
 ## Comment l'obtenir
 
-Si vous souhaitez contribuer à une disposition de clavier (keymap), ou à des fonctionnalités de QMK alors le plus simple est de [forker le dépôt avec Github](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware#fork-destination-box) puis cloner le dépôt localement pour y faire des changements. Vous pourrez pousser vos changements sur github puis ouvrir un [Pull Request](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pulls) depuis votre fork Github.
+Si vous souhaitez contribuer à une disposition de clavier (keymap), ou à des fonctionnalités de QMK alors le plus simple est de [forker le dépôt avec GitHub](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware#fork-destination-box) puis cloner le dépôt localement pour y faire des changements. Vous pourrez pousser vos changements sur GitHub puis ouvrir un [Pull Request](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/pulls) depuis votre fork GitHub.
 
 Sinon, vous pouvez aussi le télécharger directement en ([zip](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/zipball/master), [tar](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware/tarball/master)), ou le cloner avec git en ssh (`git@github.com:qmk/qmk_firmware.git`), ou https (`https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware.git`).
 

docs/fr-fr/_summary.md

@@ -101,7 +101,8 @@
   * [Guide des claviers soudés à la main](fr-fr/hand_wire.md)
   * [Guide de flash de l’ISP](fr-fr/isp_flashing_guide.md)
   * [Guide du débogage ARM](fr-fr/arm_debugging.md)
-  * [Drivers i2c](fr-fr/i2c_driver.md)
+  * [Drivers I2C](fr-fr/i2c_driver.md)
+  * [Drivers SPI](fr-fr/spi_driver.md)
   * [Contrôles des GPIO](fr-fr/internals_gpio_control.md)
   * [Conversion en Proton C](fr-fr/proton_c_conversion.md)
 

docs/fr-fr/breaking_changes.md

@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ Ceci est fait immédiatement après la fusion de la branche `future` précédent
     * [ ] Regroupe ChangeLog dans un fichier.
     * [ ] `git commit -m 'Merge point for <DATE> Breaking Change'`
     * [ ] `git push origin future`
-* Actions sur Github
+* Actions sur GitHub
     * [ ] Crée un PR pour `future`
     * [ ] S'assurer que Travis ne relève aucun problème
     * [ ] Fusion le PR `future`

docs/fr-fr/faq_debug.md

@@ -155,11 +155,3 @@ Pour le moment, l'origine du problème n'est pas comprise, mais certaines option
 
 https://github.com/tmk/tmk_keyboard/issues/266
 https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=41989.msg1967778#msg1967778
-
-## FLIP ne marche pas
-
-### `AtLibUsbDfu.dll` Not Found
-
-Supprimez le pilote actuel et réinstallez celui donné par FLIP dans le gestionnaire de périphériques.
-
-http://imgur.com/a/bnwzy

docs/fr-fr/flashing.md

@@ -26,7 +26,6 @@ Méthodes de flash compatibles :
 
 * [QMK Toolbox](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_toolbox/releases) (interface graphique recommandé)
 * [dfu-programmer](https://github.com/dfu-programmer/dfu-programmer) / `:dfu` avec QMK (outil en ligne de commande recommandé)
-* [Atmel's Flip](http://www.microchip.com/developmenttools/productdetails.aspx?partno=flip) (non recommandé)
 
 Ordre des actions :
 

docs/fr-fr/getting_started_github.md

@@ -6,11 +6,11 @@ GitHub peut être un peu compliqué pour ceux qui n'y sont pas familier. Ce guid
 
 Commencez par la [page GitHub de QMK](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware), et vous verrez un bouton dans le coin en haut à droite qui indique "Fork":
 
-![Fork on Github](http://i.imgur.com/8Toomz4.jpg)
+![Fork on GitHub](http://i.imgur.com/8Toomz4.jpg)
 
 Si vous faites partie d'une organisation, vous aurez besoin de savoir quel compte utiliser pour le fork. Dans la plupart des cas, vous voudrez créer le fork dans votre compte personnel. Une fois le fork complet (cela peut quelques fois prendre un peu de temps), appuyez sur le bouton "Clone or download":
 
-![Download from Github](http://i.imgur.com/N1NYcSz.jpg)
+![Download from GitHub](http://i.imgur.com/N1NYcSz.jpg)
 
 Faites attention à sélectionner "HTTPS", et sélectionnez le lien et copiez-le:
 

docs/fr-fr/newbs_best_practices.md

@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ git pull upstream master
 git push origin master
 ```
 
-Cela vous change la branche courante en master, synchronise les données de références du dépôt QMK vers votre ordinateur. La commande pull tire les données de références vers votre branche courante puis les y téleverse. La commande push permet de pousser la branche courante (master) vers votre fork github.
+Cela vous change la branche courante en master, synchronise les données de références du dépôt QMK vers votre ordinateur. La commande pull tire les données de références vers votre branche courante puis les y téleverse. La commande push permet de pousser la branche courante (master) vers votre fork GitHub.
 
 ### Faire des changements
 

docs/getting_started_docker.md

@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+# Docker Quick Start
+
+This project includes a Docker workflow that will allow you to build a new firmware for your keyboard very easily without major changes to your primary operating system. This also ensures that when you clone the project and perform a build, you have the exact same environment as anyone else and the QMK build infrastructure. This makes it much easier for people to help you troubleshoot any issues you encounter.
+
+## Requirements
+
+The main prerequisite is a working `docker` install.
+* [Docker CE](https://docs.docker.com/install/#supported-platforms)
+
+## Usage
+
+Acquire a local copy of the QMK's repository (including submodules):
+
+```bash
+git clone --recurse-submodules https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware.git
+cd qmk_firmware
+```
+
+Run the following command to build a keymap:
+```bash
+util/docker_build.sh <keyboard>:<keymap>
+# For example: util/docker_build.sh planck/rev6:default
+```
+
+This will compile the desired keyboard/keymap and leave the resulting `.hex` or `.bin` file in the QMK directory for you to flash. If `:keymap` is omitted, all keymaps are used. Note that the parameter format is the same as when building with `make`.
+
+There is also support for building _and_ flashing the keyboard straight from Docker by specifying the `target` as well:
+
+```bash
+util/docker_build.sh keyboard:keymap:target
+# For example: util/docker_build.sh planck/rev6:default:flash
+```
+
+You can also start the script without any parameters, in which case it will ask you to input the build parameters one by one, which you may find easier to use:
+
+```bash
+util/docker_build.sh
+# Reads parameters as input (leave blank for all keyboards/keymaps)
+```
+
+## FAQ
+
+### Why can't I flash on Windows/macOS
+
+On Windows and macOS, it requires [Docker Machine](http://gw.tnode.com/docker/docker-machine-with-usb-support-on-windows-macos/) to be running. This is tedious to set up, so it's not recommended; use [QMK Toolbox](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_toolbox) instead.
+
+!> Docker for Windows requires [Hyper-V](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/virtualization/hyper-v-on-windows/quick-start/enable-hyper-v) to be enabled. This means that it cannot work on versions of Windows which don't have Hyper-V, such as Windows 7, Windows 8 and **Windows 10 Home**.

docs/getting_started_github.md

@@ -1,16 +1,16 @@
-# How to Use Github with QMK
+# How to Use GitHub with QMK
 
-Github can be a little tricky to those that aren't familiar with it - this guide will walk through each step of forking, cloning, and submitting a pull request with QMK.
+GitHub can be a little tricky to those that aren't familiar with it - this guide will walk through each step of forking, cloning, and submitting a pull request with QMK.
 
 ?> This guide assumes you're somewhat comfortable with running things at the command line, and have git installed on your system.
 
-Start on the [QMK Github page](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware), and you'll see a button in the upper right that says "Fork":
+Start on the [QMK GitHub page](https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware), and you'll see a button in the upper right that says "Fork":
 
-![Fork on Github](http://i.imgur.com/8Toomz4.jpg)
+![Fork on GitHub](http://i.imgur.com/8Toomz4.jpg)
 
 If you're a part of an organization, you'll need to choose which account to fork it to. In most circumstances, you'll want to fork it to your personal account. Once your fork is completed (sometimes this takes a little while), click the "Clone or Download" button:
 
-![Download from Github](http://i.imgur.com/N1NYcSz.jpg)
+![Download from GitHub](http://i.imgur.com/N1NYcSz.jpg)
 
 And be sure to select "HTTPS", and select the link and copy it:
 
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ To https://github.com/whoeveryouare/qmk_firmware.git
  + 20043e64...7da94ac5 master -> master
 ```
 
-Your changes now exist on your fork on Github - if you go back there (`https://github.com/<whoeveryouare>/qmk_firmware`), you can create a "New Pull Request" by clicking this button:
+Your changes now exist on your fork on GitHub - if you go back there (`https://github.com/<whoeveryouare>/qmk_firmware`), you can create a "New Pull Request" by clicking this button:
 
 ![New Pull Request](http://i.imgur.com/DxMHpJ8.jpg)